Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Application - Permit
\:. \ Garfield County Building & Sanitation Department 108 8'11 Street, Suite #401 Glenwood Springs, Co. 81601 Office-945-8212 Inspection Line-384-5003 [ NO. 10367 Job Addres sOOZI J~jle t)hLe fQr act'lUlG {)l6 ZU: Nature of Work Buildin g Pemrit ¢¥.1 0-=t' .. \1.1.-Q \.-00\ Use of BuildingljPQVX:t PJ uer. Bffl~ro: I d: at wvra vtt ~\ nclr) Owner & l±f&vleutb W\eS) fffit\q fue}flfR Contractor rcr 06V[S\frrc£6 f S AmountofPermit$L(-d€3· ~ Date 3~-oi- \ • \ GARFIELD COUNTY BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION 108 8'" Street, Suite 401. Glenwood Sprillf•, CO 81601 Phou1-0-94S.8212 I Paz: 970.384-3470 /lnpectiou Llue: 970-384-5003 Permit No:} OJ; Parcel/Schedule No: 2407-172-Dl-QOl Job Address: 0071 Sipperlle Drive BattlGIA!iiL Ktisa, eo 8i63tr-Para... Cc, <gtl> 3S Lot No: Block No: 1.. .AJ 001 ~,,, Addr~ss 'hn. 'DAY ~ nnn B;r ~;;~~~~~~~~~L2==~~~A~d~d~~ss~:~~~~~YL~~~~=u~------~L-Ic-.-N-o.------~ POBOX 1767 GRAND Jcr,ro 92-0028 4 Architect/Engineer: I Address: I Ph: 970-945-4040 1 Ll~; No DPA ARCBIDC'!URAL GROUP 406 BYLAND DR. CLRNWOOD .J..~T .. nn ~ zb24!J1 N/A Height: Sq. FL of Building: I Sq. FL of Lot: c J7 6,000 N/A ~~~ 5 li Use o(BJlltdlng: GRAND R1 MEDICAL REBAD AND 00: mNANr FINISH 7 !"Describe Work: t! ~· 10 · S.O.G FINISH, FLOORING, CASEWRK, uriUrY, ACCBSS & MEP WORK, DRYWALL Class of Work: Garage: 0 II n/a C1 Driveway Permit 0 New 0 Alteration Q Single Double 0 Addition CJ Move On·Site Sewage Disposal Carport7· n a Site Plan No . of Floors : 1 o Remove Q u Single Double 11 I Valuation of Work: S DD Adjusted Valuations: ~ 12 I Special Conditions : Interior Tenant finish vith alnt.al site work NOTICE A SEPARATE ELECTRICAL PERMIT IS REQUIRED AND MUST BE ISSUED BY 111£ STATE OF COLORADO. TillS PERMIT BECOMES NULL ANO VOID IF WORK OR CONSTRUC110N AUTHORIZED IS NOT COMMENCED WITHLN 180 DAYS. OR. IF CONSTRUCTION OR \\'ORK IS SUSPENDED OR ABANDONED FOR A PERIOD OF ISO DAYS AT ANY TIME AfTER WORK IS COMMENCED. Plan Check Fee: 421t3.B5 AGREEMENT Permit Fee: z5A4.t5 \ Dated Permlllssued: Setbacks: rsos No. & Fee: PERMISSION IS HEREBY GRAm'ED TO nfE APPUCANT AS OWNER. CONJRACTOR AND/OR nf£ AGENT OF nfE CONTRACTOR OR OWNER TO CONSTRUCT nf£ SfRUcnJRE AS DETAILED ON PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS SUBMI'JTED TO AND REVIEWED BY nf£ BUILDING DEPARTMENT. IN CONSIDERATION OF nfE ISSSUANCE OF TillS PERMIT. ruE SIGNER. HEREBY AGREES TO COMPL\' WITH ALL BUILDING CODES AND LAND USE REGULA110NS ADOPTED BY GARFIELD COUN1Y PURSUANT TO AUTHORI'IY GIVEN LN 30.28.201 CRS AS AMENDED . Tl!E SIGNER FURTHER AGREES nfAT IF1l!E ABOVE SAID ORDINANCES ARE NOT FUU.Y COMPiLED WJ1li IN Tl!E l.COATION . EREC110N. CONSTRUC110N, AND USE OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED STRUCTURE. nfE PERMIT MAY BE REVOKED BY NOTICE FROM THE COUN1Y AND THAT Tl!EN AND TilER£ IT SHALL BECOME NULL AND VOID. TifE ISSUANCE OF A PERM!' BASED UPON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DATA SHALL NOT PREVENT THE BUILDING OFFICIAL FROM TifEREAFTER REQUIRJNG TilE CORRECTION OF ERRORS IN SAID PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DATA OR FROM PREVENTING BUILDING OPERATION BEING CARRIED ON TilEREUNDER WHEN IN VIO!J\TION OF THS CODE OR ANY OTifER ORDINANCE OR REGU!J\TION OF THIS JURISDICTION. Tl!E REVIEW OF SUBMI1TED PU\NS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND INSPECTIONS CONDUCTED TilEREAITER DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN ACCEPTANCE OF ANY RESPONSIBILmES OR UABUTIES BY GARFIELD COumY FOR ERRORS. OMISSIONS OR DISCREPENCIES. THE RESPONSI BILm· FOR niESE ITEMS AND IMPLEMENTATION DURING CONSTRUC110N RESTS SPECIFICIALLY WITH niE ARTICTECT. DESIGNER. BUILDER, AND OWNER. COMMENTS ARE INTENDED TO BE CONSERVATIVE AND IN SUPPORT OF THE OWNERS LNTEREST. FEB .0 2 2007 GARFIELD COUNTY ~HA;~~AN;~]rAN ~:~1"'~Cff ~~s- ~ ~~ ;ak. 3'-&-g-o.:t--- RIIU niN~ R. Cl II t.ll\111\1~ ' The following items are required by Garfield County for a final inspection: 1. A final Electrical Inspection from the Colorado State Electrical Inspector; 2. Permanent address assigned by Garfield County Building Department posted where readily visible from access road; 3. A finished roof, a lockable house, complete exterior siding, exterior doors and windows installed, a complete kitchen with cabinets, a sink with hot & cold running water, non-absorbent kitchen floor coverings, counter tops and finished walls , ready for stove and refrigerator, all necessary plumbing; 4. AH bathrooms must be complete, with washbowl, tub or shower, toilet stool, hot and cold running water, non-absorbent floors and walls finished and a privacy door; 5. All steps outside or inside over three (3) steps must have handrails, guard raiJs on balconies or decks over 30'' high constructed to all IBC and IRC requirements; 6. Outside grading done to where water wilJ detour away from the building; 7. Exceptions to the outside steps, decks and grading may be made upon the demonstration of extenuating circumstances, i.e. weather, but a Cenificate of Occupancy will not be issued until all the required items are completed and a final inspection made; 8. A final inspection sign off by the Garfield County Road & Bridge Department for driveway instaiiation. where applicable; as well as any final sign off by the Fire District, and/or State Agencies where applicable. 9. If you will be connecting to a public water and/or sewer system, proof of the tap fees have been paid and the connections inspected by the service provider prior to issuance of a C.O. A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY WILL NOT BE ISSUED UNTIL ALL THE ABOVE ITEMS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. ****A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY MAY TAKE UPTO 5 BUSINESS DAYS TO BE PROCESSED AND ISSUED. ***•CANNOT OCCUPY OR USE DWELLING UNTIL A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY (C.O.) IS ISSUED. OCCUPANCY OR USE OF DWELLING WITHOUT A C.O. WILL BE CONSIDERED AN ILLEGAL OCCUPANCY AND MAY BE GROUNDS FOR VACATING PREMISES UNTIL ABOVE CONDITIONS ARE MET. I understand and agree to abide by the above conditions for occupan!~.lbr issuance of a Cenificate of Occupancy for the dwelling under building permit #_._{}. .... LL__....._,Je:;_,;_=--T"- ~~ Signature Bpapplicationoctober2006 1/~ t lo1 Date PLAN REVIEW CHECKLIST Applicant fiLrt7ti' R Wk. t/t.i--1. Date '3-U • ~1 Building ~ngineered Foundation doriveway Pennit A/ d. Surveyed Site Plan ~~17~ 'BU'· H!_septic Pennit and Setbacks tL d.. Grade/Topography 30% ~A. Attach Residential Plan Review List ---Minimum Application Questionnaire ~ivision Plat Notes Planning/Zoning ~Department Review ~on Detennination/Fees -~ine Plans/Stamps/Sticker ~h Conditions __ Subdivision Plat Notes ~ation Signed __ Plan Reviewer To Sign Application ~/Schedule No . .j). ;1.40# Snow load Letter-Manf. Hms. ~ d_ Soils Report _, ..... ,~---·--·-- GENERAL NOTES: VM~ 71 z,g '>.f", ~ { SU,I-z 9.97) ,. 3 €.3/)3 3 3lo YS'/,,l GARFIELD COUNTY BUILDING AND PLANNING 970-945-8212 MINIMUM APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF COMMERCIAL OR MULTIMFAMILY RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS Including NEW CONSTRUCTION ADDITIONS ALTERATIONS And MOVED BUILDINGS In order to understand the scope of the work intended under a permit application and expedite the issuance of a permit it is important that complete information be provided. When reviewing a plan and it's discovered that required information has not been provided by the applicant, this will result in the delay of the permit issuance and in proceeding with building construction. The owner or contractor shall be required to provide this information before the plan review can proceed. Other plans that are in line for review may be given attention before the new information may be reviewed after it has been provided to the Building Department. Please review this document to determine if you have enough information to design your project and provide adequate information to facilitate a plan review. Also, please consider using a design professional for assistance in your design and a construction professional for construction of your project. Any project with more than ten (10) occupants requires the plans to be sealed by a Colorado Registered Design Professional. To provide for a more understandable plan and in order to determine compliance with the building, plumbing and mechanical codes, applicants are requested to review the following checklist prior to and during design. Plans to be included for a Building Permit must be on draft paper at least 18"x 24"" and drawn to scale. I Plans must include a floor plan, a concrete footing and foundation plan, elevations all sides with decks, balcony steps, hand rails and guard rails, windows and doors, including the finish grade and original grade line. A section showing in detail, from the bottom of the footing to the top of the roof, including re-bar, anchor bolts, pressure treated plates, floor joists, wall studs and spacing, insulation, sheeting, house-rap, (which is required), siding or any approved building material. Engineered foundations may be required. Check with the Building Department. A window schedule. A door schedule. A floor framing plan, a roofing framing plan, roof must be designed to withstand a 40 pound per square foot up to 7,000 feet in elevation, a 90 M.P.H. windspeed, wind exposure B or C, and a 36 inch frost depth. All sheets need to be identified by number and indexed. All of the above requirements must be met or your plans will be returned . AlJ plans submitted must be incompliance with the 2003 me, IPC, IMC and IFGC. Applicants are required to indicate appropriately and to submit completed checklist at time of application for a permit: 1. Is a site plan included that identifies the location of the proposed structure, additions or other buildings, setback easements, and utility easements showing distances to the property lines from each corner of the proposed structure prepared by a licensed surveyor and has the surveyors signature '4td professional stamp on the drawing? Slopes of 30% or more on properties must be show on site plan. (NOTE: Section 106.2) Any site plan for the placement of any portion of a structure within 50 ft. of a property line and not within a previously surveyed bui1ding envelope on a subdivision final plat shall be prepared by a licensed surveyor and have the surveyors signature and professional stamp on the ·drawing. Any structure to be built within a building envelope of a lot shown on a recorded subdivision plat, shall include a copy of the building envelope as it is shown on the final plat with the proposed structure located within the envelope. Yes. __ _ 2. Does the site plan when applicable include the location of the I.S.D.S. (Individual Sewage Disposal System) and distances to the property lines, wells (on subject property and adjacent properties), streams or water courses? This infonnation must be certified by a licensed surveyor with their signature and professional stamp on the design. Yes No Not necessary for this project~ 3. Does the site plan indicate the location and direction of the State, County or private road accessing the propeny? Yes __ 2 4 . 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14 . Is the I.S.D.S . (Individual Sewage Disposal System) designed, stamped and signed by a Colorado Registered Engineer? . Yes No__ Not necessary for this project~ Are the plans submitted for application review construction drawings and not drawings that are stamped or marked identifying them as "Not for construction, for pennit issuance only'?< Approval drawings only", "For permit issuance only" or similar language? Yes No__ Not necessary for this project __ _ Do the plans include a foundation plan indicating the size, location and spacing of all reinforcing steel in accordance with the uniform building code or per stamped engineered design? Yes~ No__ Not necessary for this project __ If the building is a pre-engineered structure, is there a stamped, signed engineered foundation plan for this building? Yes__ No__ Not necessary for this project* Do the plans indicate the location and size of ventilation openings for under floor crawl spaces and the clearances required between wood and earth? Yes__ No__ Not necessary for project+ Do the plans indicate the size and location of the ventilation openings for the attic, roof joist spaces and soffits? Yes~ No__ Not necessary for this project __ Do the plans include design loads as required under the IBC or IRC for roof snowloads, (a minimum of 40 pounds per square foot in Garfield County)? Yes* No__ Not necessary for this project __ Do the plans include design loads as required for floor loads J.IIJ.der the IBC or IRC? Yes__ No__ Not necessary for this project_X __ Does the plan include a building section drawing indicating foundation, wall, floor, and roof construction? Yes*-No__ Not necessary for this project __ Is th;x~nd speed and exposure design included in the plan? Yes No__ Not necessary for this project __ Does the building section drawing include size and spacing of floor joists, wall studs, ceilinx.oists, roof rafters or joists or trusses? Yes No__ Not necessary for this project __ 3 15. Does the building section drawing or other detaiJ include the method of positive connection of all columns and beams? Yes* No__ Not necessary for this project __ 16. Does the elevation plan indicate the height of the building or proposed addition from the undisturbed grade to the midpoint between the ridge and eave of a gable or shed roof or the to'f a flat roof! (Check applicable wne district for building height maximum) Yes No__ Not necessary for this project __ 17. Does the plan include any stove or zero clearance fireplace planned for installation including make and model and Colorado Phase ll certifications or Phase II EPA certification? Yes__ No__ Not necessary for this project~ 18. Does the plan include a masonry fireplace including a fireplace section indicating design to comply with the me or IRC? Yes__ No__ Not necessary for this projectX 19. Does the plan include a window schedule or other verification that egress/rescue windows from sleeping rooms and/or basements comply with the requirements of the me or IRC? Yes~ No__ Not necessary for this project __ 20. Does the plan include a window schedule or other verification that windows provide natural light and ventilation for all habitable rooms? Yesx....= No__ Not necessary for this project __ 21. Do the plans indicate the location of glazing subject to human impact such as glass doors, glazing immediately adjacent to such doors; glazing adjacent to any surface normally used as a walking surface; sliding glass doors; fixed glass panels; shower doors and tub enclosures and specify safety glazing for these areas? Yes~ No__ Not necessary for this project __ 22. Do the plans include a complete design for all mechanical systems planned for installation in this building? Yes*-No Not necessary for this proj~ct. __ _ 23. Have all areas in the buiJding been accurately identified for the intended use? (Occrcy as identified in the me Chapter 3) Yes No__ Not necessary for this project __ _ 24. Does the plan indicate the quantity, form, use and storage of any hazardous materials that may be in use in this building? . Yes__ No__ Not necessary for this project+ 4 25. Is the location of all natural and liquid petroleum gas furnaces, boilers and water heaters indicated on the plan? Yes...::;(_ No__ Not necessary for this project __ 26. Do the plans indicate the location and dimension of restroom facilities and if more than four zloyees and both sexes are employed, facilities for both sexes? Yes No__ Not necessary for this project __ 27. Do the plans indicate that restrooms and access to the building are handicapped accessible? Yesk No__ Not necessary for this project __ 28. Have two (2) complete sets of construction drawings been submitted with the application? Yesk No __ 29. Have you designed or had this plan designed while considering building and other construction code requirements? Yes~ No__ Not necessary for this project __ 30. Does the plan accurately indicate what you intend to construct and what will receive a final <pection by the Garfield County Building Department 1 Yes No __ 31. Do your plans comply with all zoning rules and regulations in the County related to your zone district? For corner lots see supplemental section 5.05.03 in the Garfield County Zoning Resolution for setbacks. Yes~ No · 32 . Do you understand that approval for design and/or construction changes are required prior to the implementation of these changes? Yes--4--No __ 33. Do you understand that the Building Department will collect a ''Plan Review" fee from you at the time of application and that you will be required to pay the "Permit" fee as well as any "Septic System" or "Road Impact" fees required, at the time you pick up your buil~ perrnit1 Yes No __ 34. Are you aware that you are required to call for all inspections required under the JBC including approval on a final inspection prior to receiving a Certificate of Occupancy and occupancy of the building? Yes~ No __ 5 35. Are you aware that the Pennit Application must be signed by the Owner or a written authority be given for an Agent and that the party responsible for the project must comply with the Unifonn Codes? Yes+ No __ 36. Are you aware that you must call in for an inspection by 3:30 the business day before the requested inspection in order to receive it the following business day? Inspections will be made between 7:30a.m. and 3:30p.m. Monday through Friday. Inspections are to be called in to 384-5003. 37. Are you aware that requesting inspections on work that is not ready or not accessible will result in a $50.00 re-inspection fee? Yes~ No ___ _ 38. Are you aware that prior to issuance of a building pemtit you are required to show proof of a driveway access pemtit or obtain a statement from the Garfield County Road & Bridge Department stating one is not necessary? You can contact the Road & Bridge Department at 625-8601. Yes >( No. ___ _ 39. Do you understand that you will be required to hire a State of Colorado Licensed Electrician and Plumber to perform instaJlations and hookups? The license number will be required at time of inspection. Yes~No ___ _ 40. Are you aware, that on the front of the building permit application you will need to fill in the Parcell Schedule Number for the Jot you are applying for this permit on prior to submittal of the building permit application? Your attention in this is appreciated. Yes ~ No ___ _ 4I. Do you know that the local fire district may require you to submit plans for their review of fire safety issues? Yes ?{, No (Please check with the building department about thi requirement) 42. Do you understand that if you are planning on doing any excavating or grading to the propeny prior to issuance of a building pennit that you will be required to obtain a grading pennit? Yes ;z 43. Did an Architect seal the plans for your commercial project? State Law requires any commercial project with occupancy of more than I 0 persons as per Section I 004 of the me to prepare the plans and specifications for the project. Yes . '£ No Not Necessary for this project ____ _ 6 now ledge that I have read, understand, and answered these questions to 1y ability. \·~·~ 'i Date Phone: a,-,o.~~ 5"' ·~~(days); (evenings) Project Name: ~"'..J«" Nit .. I 6..~ ~'~ ""''Ct.Q~_. ... s~~\.\.. ' ~ \" .€a-~A._tr fl ... L\$J-\ Project Address:40\ ' ~ l'fF'~~ .. ~w~ , ,-,. .. ~~~~-J,.~ "'~"5~. (..O 1!)\<.1<, Note: If you answered "No" on any of these questions you may be required to provide this information at the request of the Building Official prior to beginning the plan review process. Delays in issuing the pennit are to be expected. Work may not proceed without the issuance of the permit. *If you have answered "Not necessary for this project" on any of the questions and it is determined by the Building Official that the information is necessary to review the application and plans to determine minimum compliance with the adopted codes, please expect the following: A . The application may be placed behind more recent applications for building permits in the review process and not reviewed until required information has been provided and the application rotates again to first position for review. B . Delay in issuance of the permit. C . Delay in proceeding with construction. *If you answered "No" to this question the circumstances described in the question could resu1t in a "Stop Work Order" being issued or a "Certificate of Occupancy" not being issued. Bpcomm Apri12006 7 GARFIELD COUNTY BUILDING REQUIREMENTS Codes: 2003 IRC, IBC, IFGC, IMC, lPC, Setbacks: Check subdivisions and zone district for setback requirements . SnowJoad (measured at the roof): 40PSF up to 7000ft. elevation. 50PSF 7001 to 8000ft. 75PSF 8001 to 9000ft. l OOPSF 9001 to l OOOOft. Seismic design category: B Weathering probability for concrete: Severe Termite infestation probability: None to slight Wind speed: 90mph Decay probability: None to slight Wind Exposure: B or C (see section R301.2.l.4) Frost Depth: 36in. to 8000ft. elevation. 42in. 8001 and above. Winter Design Temperature: Minus 2 to 7000ft.; minus 16 over 7000ft. elevation. Air Freezing Index: 2500deg F~days to 7000ft.; over 7000ft. to be detennined by Building Official . Ice shield under-Jayment required. Mean Annual temp.: Variable Insulation: Maximum glazing U factor: 0.50 Minimum R-Values: • Ceilings/roofs R values are: R-30 stick built structures. R~38 log construction and steel rafter construction. • Walls R values are R-19 wood frame; R-19 cavity R-3 sheathing steel studs. • Floors R-values are R-19. • Basement wall R-values are R-10 befow grade, R-19 above grade. • Slab perimeter R-value and depth is R- 10/36in . • Crawl space wall R-values are R-IO below grade and R-19 above grade If floors over crawl spaces are not insulated, the crawl space walls must be insulated. Basement wall must be insulated to frost depth . Common walls garage to house must have R-19 insulation. Common ceiling/floor garage to house must have R-19. Take precautions to protect plumbing in these areas. DATE:~ FAX COVER SHEET COVER. PLtJS { PAGES FCI CONSTRUCfORS, L.'iC. P. 0. BOX 1767 GRAND JUNCTION, COLORADO 81502 (970) 434-9093 FAX: (970) 434-7583 FROM: La(l,~~~ FAXr.u"MBER.: q70 -3B't -~70 ------~----------- PROJECT:--------TO: ATIN: ·9rA.'j 3c bheller COMP&~=~------------~----------- w ··£1 -f'o,'L.-c.-J.d t ' i~ J"J1H V "ff*'t! c. l2 ~-frx :&x-,'fy..Wfk?d ."".I lrl4-Yl'lype rm t+ et fp '·~th ~rlt, tfr......-= lacJ~~~ of -1-~ ftt;y,t-c41k ,. c£ )'QL' badl .&!r:Ysh~~ pie&), cq l L Dl+.Vlf.lVli'.D FEB 6 Z 2667 HARDCOPYMAILED: YES NO. ____ _ .,.Slls.:--....art GARFIL BUILDING u r _ , • •••••••••!••····~!·~···~········································~ \ Andy Schwaller Garfield Cowtty Building & Planning I 08 8th Street, Suite 40 I Glenwood Springs. CO 81601 RECEIVED FEB 0 2 2007 GARFIELD COUNTY BUILDING & PlANNING ~~ \JALl.~J~~~~~ 0~d June 7. 2007 David Pesnichak GRAND VALLEY FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT 1777 S. BAITLEMENT PARKWAY, PO BOX 295 PARACHUTE, CO 81635 PHONE: 285-9119 FAX (970) 285-9748 Garfield County Building and Planning Department 109 8 111 Street, Suite 301 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 Subject: GRMC Health & Safety 71 Sipperelle Drive Parachute, CO 81635 David, This letter is let you know that the GRMC Health and Safety Fire Final was conducted on June 4. 2007. Dean Smith, State Fire Inspector, and I had some questions on a Sprinkler Head design. We contacted the company who designed the product and found that this head was UL approved. The Fire Protection System passed with no deficiencies. There is no longer a concern with the building from a fire safety standpoint. From our position the building is cleared for their Certificate of Occupancy. Thanks for all the help on this project and we look forward to working with you and FCI Constructors again in the future. If there is anything else can be on assistance with feel free to contact me. Rob Ferguso~ Deputy Fire Chief-Operations Grand Valley Fire Protection District Office: {970) 285-9119 Fax: {970) 285-9748 email: gvfudops(@sopris.net Xc: David Blair, Fire Chief File COLORADO STATE ELECTRICAL BOARD 1580 Logan Street, Suite 550 Denver, CO 80203-1941 Inspection Report Permit#: 608843 Date Inspected: 06/04/2007 Permit Holder: 8 & B ELECTRIC INC TERRY FLEMING 2818 1/2 NORTH AVE 2818 1/2 NORTH AVE GRAND JCT 81501 Phone: (970) 242-2450 Fax: (970} 241-8687 Email: heather@bbefectric.net Site: 0071 Sipperelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, Garfield County, 81635 Owner: The Battlement Mesa Compnay Phone: Status: Accepted Inspection type: Final Partial Inspection: No Trim Permit: N NEW COMMERCIAL COMMERCIAL NEW Inspector: Cyrus Tuchscher 970-625-5085 Corrections: 1) Install GFCI outlets within 6' of sinks in treatment rooms 2) Install breaker lock-on for circui t breaker feed to FACP 3) Installer on site making corrections 4) Electrical Final OK Signatur, Comments: 6/4/2007 ~ ...... ~.,J PaQe 1 of 1 West Slope Testing & Inspection 3177 Glendam Dr. Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone:970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Inspection Report Date: 3-15-07 Project: Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project Address: 0071 Sipprelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, CO Building Permit No.: 101 b' General Contractor: FCI Constructors Report#! Page 1 of2 Contractor that Performed Work: Pinnacle Constructors Inspection of shop fabrication or field work at job site: Field Report: Visually inspected some of the field welding at the bar joist reinforcing & mechanical unit roof frames to bar joists welds roof level grids E to D at grids 3 to 5. Note I randomly cleaned some of the slag from the welds inspected above as the welder had not cleaned off any of the slag from the welds. The welding inspected as outlined above appeared to be in general conformance with the drawings, and appeared to meet the quality requirements of the A WS D 1.1 Structural welding Code except as noted below. 1) The welding company would need to clean some more of the slag from the welds for inspection. 2) Where the mechanical unit roof opening support frames were welded to the reinforced bar joist assemblies at the underneath sides. The frames had been welded to the round reinforcing bars. It appeared that the round reinforcing bars would also need to be welded to the existing bar joist members directly below the frame to round bar welds. 3) Add shims if needed for roof deck bearing where the mechanical unit roof opening support frames were welded to the reinforced bar joist assemblies at the underneath sides (per detail section 6 drawing 82.0). Page 2 of2 The job site supervisor Kurt Averill with FCI was made aware of these discrepancies. Inspector/Technician: Douglas E Young ,. .. ~ar 26 07 12:41p Douc Youn~ WEST SLOPE TESTING & INSPECTION 3177 Glendam Dr Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone: 970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Fax Transmittal -=11 1 & 3(IJ 7 To: Kurt Averill @ FCI Date: 3-26-07 Fax#: 1-970-285-7966 From: Doug Young Number of pages sent including cover page: 3 Message: Please find faxed copy of welding inspection report # 1. I will also mail report along with invoice to Lance at the office. I guess you will let me know when they have completed the corrections noted on my report, so that I can reinspect the welds before they become inaccessible. Thank You; Doug Young p .3 ...--- West Slope Testing & Inspection 3 J 77 GJendam Dr. Report#l Grand Junctio~ CO 81504 Phone:97~~988 Cell:970-260-2844 Inspection Report Date: 3-1 5-07 Projeet: Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project Address: 0071 Sipprelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, CO BaRding Permit No .. : General Contractor: FCI Constructors Pagel of2 Contractor that Performed Work: Pinnacle Constructors Inspection of shop fabrication or field w:ork at job site: Field Report: VISually inspected some oftbe field welding at the bar joist reinforcing & mechanical unit roof fiames to bar joists welds roof level grids E to D at grids 3 to 5. Note I randomly cleaned some of the slag from the welds inspected above as the welder had not cleaned otf any of the slag fiom the welds. The welding inspected as outlined above appeared to be in general confonnance with 1hc drawings, and appeared to meet the quality requirements of the A WS DI.l Structural welding Code exeept as noted below. 1) The welding company would need to clean some more ofthe slag from the welds for inspection. 2) Where the Illt"danical unit roof opening support fiames we~e welded to the reinforced bar joist assemblies at the underneath sides. The ftames had been welded to the round reinforcing bars. lt appeared that the round rcinforoing bars would also need to be welded to the existing bar joist members directly below the :fiame to round bar welds .. 3) Add shims if needed for roof deck bearing where the mechanical unit roof opening support frames wen: welded to the reinforced bar joist assemblies at the underneath sides {per detaD section 6 drawing S2.0). ttar 26 07 12:40p Douc: Younc: p. 1 Page 2 of2 The job site supervisor Kurt Averill with FCI was made aware of these discrepancies. Inspector/Technician: Douglas E Young '• .... #' Mar 2~ u ~ U6:b ~a Uou~ Youn~ WEST SLOPE TESTING & INSPECTION 3177 Glendam Dr Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone: 970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Fax Transmittal To: Kurt Averill@ FCI Date: 3-29-07 Fax#: 1-970-285-7966 From: Doug Young Number of pages sent including cover page: 2 Message: Please find faxed copy of welding inspection report for Mondays inspection. Thank You; Doug Young p.2 Mar ~~ U? Ut:i: ~·/a Uou~ Younr; West Slope Testing & Inspection 3177 Glendam Dr. Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone:970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Inspection Report Date: 3-27-07 Project: Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project Address: 0071 Sipprelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, CO Building Permit No.: General Contractor: FCI Constructors Report#2 Page 1 ofl Contractor that Performed Work: Pinnacle Constructors Inspection of shop fabrication or field work at job site: Field Report: Reinspected the items noted in report # 1. The welding inspected/reinspected above appeared to be in general conformance with the drawings,. and appeared to meet the quality requirements of the A WS D 1.1 Structural welding Code. Inspector/Technician: Douglas E Young p .l WEST SLOPE TESTING & INSPECTION 3177 Glendam Dr Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone: 970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 5-4-07 Andrew Schwaller Garfield County Building Official 108 8th St., Suite 401 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 Page I ofl Please find enclosed copies of special inspection reports for Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project. Thank you; Doug Young West Slope Testing & Inspection 3177 Glendam Dr. Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone:970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Final Inspection Report Date: 4-26-07 Project: Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project Address: 0071 Sipprelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, CO Building Permit No.: 10369 General Contractor: FCI Constructors Report#4 Page 1 of 1 Contractor that Performed Work: Pinnacle Constructors Inspection of shop fabrication or field work at job site: Field Report: Visually inspected the remainder of the field welding at the tube steel connections & deck puddle welds new North & West side canopies. Visually inspected the field welding at the new tube steel door headers. Visually inspected the field welding at the offset column splice plate connections per structural engineers detail grids E to F between grids 2 &3. To the best of my knowledge this completes the special inspections of the structural field welding at the new construction as outlined in reports lthru 4 . To the best of my knowledge the structural field welding at the new construction inspected as outlined in reports I thru 4 met the quality requirements of the 2003 me & A WS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code. Inspector/Technician: Douglas E Young West Slope Testing & Inspection 3177 Glendam Dr. Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone:970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Ins~ection Report Date: 4-24-07 Project: Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project Address: 0071 Sipprelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, CO Building Permit No.: 10369 General Contractor: FCI Constructors Report#3 Page 1 of1 Contractor that Performed Work: Pinnacle Constructors Inspection of shop fabrication or field work at job site: Field Report: Visually inspected some of the field welding that was in the process of being performed at the new North & West side canopies by Pinnacle Constructors certified welders at the tube steel connections & deck puddle welds. The welding inspected above appeared to be as shown on the drawings, and appeared to meet the quality requirements of the A WS D 1.1 Structural welding Code. Inspector/Technician: Douglas E Young West Slope Testing & Inspection 3177 Glendam Dr. Grand Junction, CO 81504 Phone:970-434-6988 Cell: 970-260-2844 Inspection Report Date: 3-27-07 Project: Battlement Mesa Company Remodel Project Address: 0071 Sipprelle Dr. Battlement Mesa, CO Building Permit No.: /03 6'! General Contractor: FCI Constructors Report#2 Page 1 of 1 Contractor that Performed Work: Pinnacle Constructors Inspection of shop fabrication or field work at job site: Field Report: Reinspected the items noted in report # 1. The welding inspected/reinspected above appeared to be in general conformance with the drawings, and appeared to meet the quality requirements of the A WS D 1.1 Structural welding Code. Inspector/Technician: Douglas E Young Page I of 2 .., Andy Schwaller From: Doug Porterfield [dpadoug@qwest.net] Sent: Wednesday, March 21, 2007 8:30 AM To: Andy Schwaller Cc: 'John Plano'; Jeff Kehr; Ljshore@cs.com Subject: RE: Meeting Notes from 3-14-07 Code Meeting w Garfield County Andy All of the revised drawings were printed yesterday late morning and are going to John today. Revised sheet A 1 .2 does have the written description of the property lines on it. I will attached an 8.5x1 1 of the site drawing with the distances dimensioned to the set. There should be no problem with sec. 506.2.2 as the distances are on the same lot and are surrounded by access roads and set back areas. Unfortunately, the exposed wood trusses in the existing space keep us out of Type V-A. The owner's plan is the Grand River Medical will be in the space for 3 years and will be building their own building. The project budget will not allow for the 1 hr rating of such a large area of the roof assembly. In the future when renters or economics change , the wood area would have to have a 1 hr lid added and the existing steel portion by fireproofed. Then I would see submitting a classification to get the allowable areas up in size for new occupancy uses. Thanks for your thoughts! Doug Porterfield DPA Architectural Group and DPA Global Design 406 S . Hyland Park Dr., Suite C Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-4040 QP-adoug@ gwest.net WorldVenture dporterfield@ worldventure. net From: Andy Schwaller [mailto:aschwaller@garfield-county.com] Sent: Tuesday, March 20, 2007 2:07PM To: dpadoug@qwest.net Cc: John Plano; Jeff Kehr Subject: RE: Meeting Notes from 3-14-07 Code Meeting w Garfield County Doug, If you could include a site plan verifying the side yards that would be helpful. The one emailed does not show the requirement. As per Sec 506.2.2, these yards must be dedicated open to the public or on the same lot. Conformation that the open space will be maintained by the owners of the property is required . Just a suggestion, but possibly the existing construction may meet Type V-A. If this is the case, if all future construction is also Type V-A, it might open the door for a varied occupancy for the un-improved spaces. Limiting these spaces to S-2 may make them difficult to rent out in the future. You may want to draft a letter to the owners explaining the future 3/21 /2007 Page 2 of2 • limitations of these unimproved spaces. We will make it a condition to the permit and tag it to the property through a recorded document. Thanks for your help with the project. Andy From: Doug Porterfield [mailto:dpadoug@qwest.net] Sent: Monday, March 19, 2007 4:39PM To: 'John Plano'; Andy Schwaller; Ljshore@cs.com; eschmela@battlementmesa.com; gvfpops@sopris.net; gvfrd@sopris.net Cc: '"'Stevens, Don"" Subject: Meeting Notes from 3-14-07 Code Meeting w Garfield County DPA Gentlemen Attached are the meeting minutes from 3-14-07 on the Battlement Mesa/ G RM project code review. Doug Porterfield DPA Architectural Group and DPA Global Design 406 S. Hyland Park Dr., Suite C Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-4040 dpadolJQ@ gwest. net WorldVenture dporterfield@ worldventure.net 3/2112007 ' 03/23/2007 Andy Schwaller Chief Building Official, Garfield County 108 8th Street, Suite 201 Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 RE: PROJECT: Grand River Medical Center INTERNAL PERMIT#: #3163 ADDRESS: 0071 Sipprelle Drive Battlement Mesa Dear Mr. Schwaller: Colorado Inspection Agency has completed a review of the following documents : 1. Plans : • 22 -Architectural sheets • 3 -Structural Sheets • 9 -MEP Sheets • 1 -Project manual These documents were reviewed only for their conformance to the provisions of the 2003 International Building Code, 2003 International Plumbing Code, 2003 International Mechanical Code 2005 NEC and ANSI A 117.1-1998. Colorado Inspection Agency finds the documents submitted to be complete for construction and ready for issuance of the building permit. John Plano Plans Examiner Colorado Inspection Agency Colomdo Inspection Agency 1286 Clmmbcrs Ave, Eagle CO 81631 P: 970.328.1790 F: 970.328.1791 I > Andy Schwaller From: Sent: To: Cc: Doug Porterfield [dpadoug@qwest.net] Monday, March 19, 200712:35 PM 'John Plano' Andy Schwaller; 'Matt Royer' Subject: RE: Battlement Mesa/GAM Revised Code Drawing Attachments: DPA Separate Use Code Calcs.pdf John Page I of 4 Sorry for the confusion. Attached are my calcs that I did for each use since I have set this up to be a separated use and the project meets the requirements. I have called for the required 2 hr occupancy separation between the four areas. A couple of things that differ from your calcs for a non-separated use that you sent me are the following: 1. I used 46 as the W factor on 60 as you used. (Though 60 would have given a greater increase than what I came up with) 2. Since this is a single story building, it qualifies for a 300% increase for fire sprinklers instead of the 200% of your calc. Based on all this, the total use area ratios for each area is .99 which allows for the separated use. Let me know if you have any questions. Doug Porterfield DPA Architectural Group and DPA Global Design 406 S. Hyland Park Dr., Suite C Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-4040 dpadoug@ gwest.net WorldVenture .(;!porterfield@ worldven~ure.n~ From: John Plano [mailto:john.plano@coinspect.com] Sent: Monday, March 19, 2007 11:01 AM To: dpadoug@qwest.net Cc: Andy Schwaller; Matt Royer Subject: RE: Battlement Mesa/GRM Revised Code Drawing Doug, The exception you are sending states you can use 2 instead of 1 for the frontage increase formula. The exception does not allow it to be considered an unlimited building ... Can you attach the calculations on how you came up with 54,403 square feet as the allowable area for this 3/23/2007 building? John Plano Plans Examiner I Senior Building Inspector Colorado Inspection Agency P.O. Box 1618 Eagle, CO 81631-1618 (970)328-1790 (877)428-6412 john .plano@ co inspect.com From: Doug Porterfield [mailto:dpadoug@qwest.net] Sent: Monday, March 19, 2007 10:08 AM To: 'Andy Schwaller'; John Plano Cc: Matt Royer Subject: RE: Battlement Mesa/GRM Revised Code Drawing Andy and John Page 2 of 4 I did more research after my phone call with Andy last Thursday and found that indeed the project would work with the increase exception in 506 because it would meet all the requirements of an Unlimited Building expect the open area on one side. Attached is the commentary section from the IBC that supports the exception in section 506 that the re-design is based on. Doug Porterfield DPA Architectural Group and DPA Global Design 406 S. Hyland Park Dr., Suite C Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-4040 dpadoug@ gwest. net WorldVenture ggorterfield@ worldventure.net From: Andy Schwaller [mailto:aschwaller@garfield-county.com] Sent: Monday, March 19, 2007 9:55AM To: John Plano; dpadoug@qwest.net Cc: Matt Royer Subject: RE: Battlement Mesa/GRM Revised Code Drawing It would appear a fire wall somewhere else in the building would need to be incorporated to keep the area under 40,500 s.f. Unlimited area does not apply due to the building on the one side. Andy From: John Plano [mailto:john.plano@coinspect.com] Sent: Monday, March 19, 2007 9:37AM To: dpadoug@qwest.net Cc: Andy Schwaller; Matt Royer Subject: RE: Battlement Mesa/GRM Revised Code Drawing 3/23/2007 Page 3 of 4 Doug, The building does not meet the criteria for unlimited building because of the 20' between buildings on the south side. I do agree that you can take advantage of the exception to 506.2.1 and utilize the W/30=2 instead of the limit W/2=1 With this added square footage, I have calculated that the entire building can be 40,500 square feet total. The buildin-g is 54,099? See my attached calculations. John Plano Plans Examiner I Senior Building Inspector Colorado Inspection Agency P.O. Box 1618 Eagle, CO 81631-1618 (970)328-1790 (877)428-6412 john.plano@ coinspect.com From: Doug Porterfield [mailto:dpadoug@qwest.net] Sent: Friday, March 16, 2007 6:42AM To: John Plano Cc: Ljshore@cs.com; ""Stevens, Don""; 'Lance Kramer'; klloyd@fciol.com; 'Blaine Buck' Subject: Battlement Mesa/GRM Revised Code Drawing DPA John Attached is a revised code study for the Battlement Mesa and GAM project. I completely revised the study and based it on the entire building. I took your and Andy's advice and looked at the project in light of the requirements for an Unlimited Area. The project would make this classification except for the 20' distance between buildings to the south. This however triggered my thoughts and I carefully reviewed section 506 and found the exception that allows an increase in theW distance to the area calculation formula. I confirmed this was possible with the IBC commentary and followed their prescribed formula for this exception. As you will see the building just makes the allowable area. I have broken the building into 3 occupancy uses. M, Band S-2 and provided for 2 hour separations for the occupancies. Thus the need for the 3 hr fire wall and structural separation is now gone as is the need to rate the ceiling of the corridors and the 4' 1 hr extension of rating the roof structure. This has worked out quite well! I thought I would forward this to you for a cursory review since it is a total sift in thinking. All drawing revisions will go to the printer on Monday and I should have 3 sets of stamped drawings to deliver to you by Wednesday. Thank you again for all your help and I greatly appreciate you patience and effort in working 3/23/2007 with us. Doug Porterfield DPA Architectural Group and DPA Global Design 406 S. Hyland Park Dr., Suite C Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 (970) 945-4040 dpadoug@ qwest.net World Venture dporterfield@ worldventure. net 3/23/2007 Page 4 of 4 ~\::,. \ ~Q~I').,S { ~loo';,~ i t.o· ..5~~~., \:.tn '. I qo'V"""'t"'" / ..... ~,Qa.,'Cr\ }-,s· oS \... 1 t?:> f-l ~-...ca\,-v !a.".r~~~.n ~\? \._~ -~ ""1-'1.. \ ~~·I _3'1..S \.~ "\ '1:. '-\' ~'!"'I~ • l.J; \ il. "":=\ H· o.s ""'"" h .r'l"b I.S ~t'"'j?"o;O<:e. ~~\..;:r <:;),~..,~ o·~~-.~ -. .. r-.). .. v _5 '1.-s "w:! c::> : -.. '"V c:;Jo~ 1 07-. '\-..S"'c.S .S \ .....-oo..t~ '\ -:. 'l.. "'\/ "t ~~ ~\ = r-."V \ ..... ')~~")'">0 --z. -«:::. O.S~DJ h ~ 'I:.. ""Y o~!\_, ~ o~~'o'\ ~ ~o'~ ... "'o~ r-: 00 \ ~ r OC.\ __ ~Q't, ')(. ~~"\' ~J.~\ \'X~ _.,CO~:>"b .. _ 'b""yl ~~ot'.,l.)o ~ ' ' . No. J():f:,± . ' . Assessor's Parcel No3,tl(lj-HJ.i11./Y) I ~-"'"<:---; Date . ) .zv =c Solis Test Weatherproollng ___________ _ Fooling Mechanical ____________ _ Foundation Electrical Rough (State)__,._,..,.__,----- Grout Electrical Final (State)_..,&>::;.. _·.:..'l_-.;:;;o .... 7 __ --::::--::-- Underground Plumbing .3-So - p 1 llc ""'-Final (, -1-o 1 /CheckllsLCo:leted? ~ Rough Plumb}Pg Certificate Occupancy # or=::){.::.!j_:::.d..L-.----- Framing f:!'l-0 ZA:}HL Date '-=1-o=t Insulation 5 -3 ~7&rn Septic System # .!,;:lJ;u(A~--------- Aoofing Date ------------Drywall S-U-o:/~ Final __________ _ Gas Piping X 9=0~ Other --------------- f 3JJ-1jo7 ~l~otf. ~~ ~~ IXTIIRIOR Add ... No. _____________ _ ~~~--------------------- DKkHuppoo11 clo•Mce to wood ------- Dec ... atalral 111111 ----------- Eaterlot lockt --------------FiaiNng ouou!ld doors I.......,.,.,. __________ _ lnMCteco-.a _____________ _ IHTIRIOR GARAGE Fire waN aepwatlotl __________ _ SeMc:odoor.t~·· mln. _________ _ Door (20mln .)w/autodOMr·1~" mln . _____ _ Meclt. equip. 18" allow ltoor ________ _ No opening into •l-Ing oroa _______ _ BASEMENT·CRAWL AREA ~~~~----------------------- lniUiotlon ---------------HIIdn>orn/Siotn ___________ _ Vontlletlon ------------------- PINAL CHICKLIIT MECHANICAL ROOM ~---------------Hotwotor ___________ _ F.A.guton __________ _ Ftoordnoln, ____________ _ ~arance•------------Nr con. oyllaorn.. ________ _ Hot woter heater --------- Combutllon air _________ _ Gu plplng, voi""--------- LPO ~In ---------- RREPLACE/STOVE ~oronco to combuetlbiH·------ Termtnotlon of chtmnoy·------- Combustlon air _________ _ Hnrtto (12" or 20" on stdH) -----GIUIII<Ion __________ _ Conlltld by:: _________ _ REMARKS STAIRWAYS • liMdn>ofn (1'1") --------- Railing &gu-allo --------- ~d~---~----------------- Riel &Nn ------------ KITCHEN a-.... obove 11'1•--------hllaust len ___________ _ Brntter oah•uat (I hr. ell-)------- BEDROOMS Eg'"------------------- Smoko~~------------------ BATltROOMS E•haust lan ____________ _ stuonerproor a••---------- oTKER -1-tl · o1 -~ 1JliF:,'1 iM 6'1 t /41 GR~.-f~ OK ~ t~-llf·o7 &/tJ ~ ~tJ~ cK (..P~) ~1}._ cf~Jtl -o7 1/Vfl-'-~ Ok ittrt Y-:l.(-o7 lff.t.....--61< 1X~M-H...-I ~-w~ ok. :f~~~ tJk ... crM-~~ Pw -. fa-d:. ~' k. ~'-' C-3-o1 ;J~ LlcJ a.e~ , /Jw ~ , 7,._~ Ilk-d .~· , 4""--'.-r..;,. 41'1~ ~ £-(o1 1-~':1 (~· at£d:... . .-01~ r-e;.o7 ~~ ~ ~ ~L ?rS-o1 ~~ /a-f~D~ ol( klw- @ ~tf.ll-!l-1'1•- • INSPECTION WILL NOT BE MADE UNLESS THIS CARD IS POSTED ON THE JOB 1-4 IIOURS NOTICE REQUIRED FOR INSPECTIONS BUILDING PERMIT GARFIELD COUNTY, COLORADO e;v ..:::L 330 -~ \Q-:</_;--r-· Date lssued ............................ Zoned Area ............................... l'ermit No...... ...~ ............ . AGREEMENT In considention of the is!uance of this permit, the applicont hereby agrees to comply with all JaM and regulations related to the mning, location; construction 11nd erection of the proposed structure for which this permit is granted, and furtlti!r agrees that if the above said regulations are not fully complied with in the zoning, location, erection .and construction of the above described structure, the permit may then be revoked by notice from the County Building Inspector and IMMEDIATELY DECOME NULL ANU VOID. u,~-Q £0 wcl. El U\f-!Nifdicq_L EellfCl Add rea or l.q•l Dcsc~.a' 7/ S 'If!!!!_ g 1Jt: 1Lf! Jtnf1-'.;r/-I""-'="' 1 rr-, 1/_. 1 RJI!JYJefd: Setbacks Fool Side Side Rear Tbls Cud Must Bt Posted So It Is Pl81nly VIsible Frvm Tht Street Until Fin•lln,pcclion. INSPECTION RECORD Footing (.;;;At.,. Urivc l\'llY Foundation \j ;J~ Underground Plumbing S • ~ · () 7 {JJ-... Insulation S:/1·01 AJfli.....-- Rough Plumbing 'l~n ~f) 1 !Jn t-Drywall .S:,)/ · o7 "-'rll titi(./JoJn~ Chimney&: Vent '/~J'f_·o? .tmr, Electric Fiaal (by St•te Inspector) tp . 't_o 7 Gas Pipiag _$·_1-D( ~ Final ~ -7-fJ 7 fiJn\..- Eledric Rough CDy Slate Inspector) ~z:;-' Septic: Final Fnming 'l;~lq.f>l t)r'W ...__ Notes: e.,.,....-...I.Vo\.U ~ 8.~ Olt.. -"~4 (To lndade Roof in pl8c •nd indoll's ~~~{ •nd Doors lnst•lled). ALL LISTED ITEMS MUST DE INSrECTED AND ArrROVED DEFORE COVERING • WIIETJIER INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR, UNDERGROUND OR ABOVE GROUND. THIS PERMIT IS NOT TRANSFERABLE For luspcctiuus Cnll384-5003 108 8th S tn~et Glenwood S prings, Colorado APPROVED DO NOT DESTROY THIS CARD oat~o-1 eyJtil IF PLACED OUTSIDE ·COVER WITH CLEAR I'LASTIC ~~A~ K~ 1.) K ~-r-v , "'1•, fltw" ~~&_ 01\ 'l ·}r/-ol ~ 1""""'~ ok J-~ ~ &j<il &~ ,.)1IJ. oV /t"J<)# D~v r•/ t.J~Ok. {? 4-ol ~~J ~-oL 1 ·?-'f·o1 t.\ ~" ~ \'l~ 'ul s .-.,.tl ~ ~J\,·~ t>t. ~-?·\)' ~ ff\J-Rc~'\~ ct.l\J.. .;-.:o;-b'\ ~' ~pG~ · .. ~~~ 6 ~4 -c.)r} ~ 5-ts·tl I IJ¥. ~S\-n4-lt-' GfiU... L' . ..,_, •• , . {JvJ ;J.,'1" .,.... Di--~ o K tactA. \ Parcel Detail · • ,. ' Page 1 of 3 Garfield County Assessor/Treasurer Parcel Detail Information Assessorffreasu rer Property Search I Assessor Subset Query I Assessor Sales Search Clerk & Recorder Recepti9n Se~ch B as ic Building Characteristi.fcl I I~.Jnfo.rnJation Parcel Detail I Value Detail I Sales Detail I Residential/Commercial Improvement Detail Land Detail I Photographs I Tax Area II Account Number II Parcel Number II Mill Levy I I 080 II R470050 II 240717201001 II 39.826 I Owner Name and Mailing Address IBA ITLEMENT MESA REALTY PARTNERS I IPOBOX6000 I !PARACHUTE, CO 81635 I Legal Description lsECT,TWN,RNG:17-7-95 SUB:TOWN !cENTER FLG. #1 BLK:1 LOT:1 IPRE:R270026 BK:0614 PG:0911 BK:0776 [PG:0563 BK:0769 PG:0518 Location Physical Address: 1171 SIPPRELLE DR PARACHUTE Subdivision: IITOWN CENTER FLG. #1 Land Acres: 115.27 Land Sq Ft: llo Section II Township II Range 17 II 7 II 95 Property Tax Valuation Information II 11 11 11 http://www .garcoact.cornlassessor/parcel.asp ?ParcelN urnber-24071720 1 00 I 211/2007 Parcel Detail • • • • Page 2 of3 I Actual Value II Assessed Value I I Land: 229,56~1 66 ,5701 I Improvements: 370,44011 107 ,4301 I Total: 6oo,oooll 174,0001 I Basic Building Characteristics lo ---l Number of Residential Buildings: Number of Comm/lnd II I Buildings: II Commercial/Industrial Building Occurrence 1 Characteristics TOTAL HEATED AREA: 1122,690 ABSTRACT CODE·IIMERCHANDISING- • IMPROVEMENT ARCHITECTURAL STYLE: llsUPER MRKT EXTERIOR WALL: IIcoN BLOCK ROOF COVER: IIPRO PANEL ROOF STRUCTURE: IIWOOD TRUSS INTERIOR WALL: IIUNFINISHED INTERIOR WALL: IIDRYW ALL FLOOR: IIUNFINISHED FLOOR: IIASPH TILE HEATING FUEL: IlGAS HEATING TYPE: IIFORCED AIR STORIES: llsTORIES 1.0 BATHS: 112 ROOMS: lit UNITS: III BEDROOMS: llo YEAR BUILT: llt983 Tax Information (I Tax Year II Transaction Type )I Amount 11 httn://www. Parcoact..com/ass es sor/oarcel.aso?ParcelNumber=24071720 1001 2/112007 Parcel Detail ... ·• . 2006 Tax Amount $6,929.721 2005 Tax Payment: Whole ($9,008.16)1 2005 Tax Amount $9,008.161 2004 Tax Payment: Second Half ($4,763.47)1 2004 Tax Payment: First Half ($4,763.47)1 2004 Tax Amount $9,526.941 2003 Tax Payment: Second Half ($5,076.65)1 2003 Tax Payment: First Half ($5,076.65)1 2003 Tax Amount $10,153.301 2002 Tax Payment: Second Half ($4,179.70)1 2002 Tax Payment: First Half ($4,179.70)1 2002 Tax Amount $8,359.401 2001 Tax Payment: Whole ($4,104.44)1 2001 Tax Payment: Whole ($4,104.44)1 2001 Tax Amount $8,208.881 2000 Tax Payment: Second Half ($5,022.13)1 2000 Tax Payment: First Half ($5,022.13)1 2000 Tax Amount $10,044.261 1999 Interest Payment ($42.53)1 1999 Interest Charge $42.531 1999 Tax Payment: Second Half ($4,252.63)1 1999 Tax Payment: First Half ($4,252.63)1 1999 Tax Amount $8,505.261 Top of Page Assessor Database Search Options I Treasurer Database Search Options Clerk & Recorder Database Search Options Garfield CoJ.I.my_Ji9J1l~ P~g~ Page 3 of 3 The Garfield County Assessor and Treasurer's Offices make every effort to collect and maintain accurate data. However, Good Turns Software and the Garfield County Assessor and Treasurer's Offices are unable to warrant any of the information herein contained. Copyright © 2005 -2006 Good Turns Software. All Rights Reserved. Database & Web Design by Good Turns So ftware. httn·//www u~rrn;-~rt rnm/~""~"""nr/n:~rrf".l ;-~r;;n?P~rrP.INnmhP.r='"J40717?.01 001 2/1 /2007 D 0 0 D D 0 n D 0 n 0 a 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 Battlement Mesa Company Grand River Medical Shell and Core Renovation Tenant Finish IA_.l r rr · ~. E M E" Nt T ME. SA Project Manual January 26, 2007 DPA DPA Architectural Group 406 South Hyland Park Drive Suite C Glenwood Springs, Colorado 81601 970-945-4040 D 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 J l SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 Summary, Alternates, Allowances 01010 Summary ofWork 01011 Weather Conditions 01028 Change Order Procedures 01040 Coordination 01045 Cutting and Patching 01090 Reference Standards 01105 Administration, Procedures, Codes 01 I 20 Alteration Project Procedures 01200 Projects Meetings 0131 0 Schedules, Reports, Payments 01315 Mechanical and Electrical Coordination 01340 Shop Drawings, Project Data and Samples 01400 Quality Control 01500 Temporary Facilities 0 1630 Substitutions and Product Options 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Cleaning DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 02010 Subsurface Exploration 02220 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction for Pipe Lines 02222 Embedment and Base Course Aggregate 02555 Water Transmission and Distribution Lines 02560 Sanitary Sewer Lines 02570 Shallow Utilities 026 I 2 Hot Bituminous Paving 02626 Concrete Curb and Gutter 02861 Delineators and Reflectors DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03001 Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY 041 00 Mortar and Masonry Grout DIVISION 5 METALS 05120 Structural Steel TOC SPECIFICATIONS MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS 0521 0 Steel Joists 05310 Steel Decki ng 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTI C 061 00 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07160 Bituminous Dampproofing 07190 Vapor and Air Barriers 07210 Building Insulation 07270 Firestopping 07510 Bituminous Asphalt Roofing 07551 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing 07600 Sheet Metal F lashings 07800 Roof Accessories 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 0821 0 Wood Doors 08300 Access Doors 08410 A luminum Entrances a nd Storefronts 0871 0 Finish Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 0951 1 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09650 Resi lient F looring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting 09950 Walt Coverings DIVISION 1 0 SPECIAL TIES 10001 Miscellaneous Specialties 10522 Fire Extingu ishers, Cabinets and Accessories I 0800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Not Used roc 0 Page 2 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 .o 0 0 11 0 D SPECIFICATIONS Page 3 MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 0 I 2300 Manufactured Cabinets and Accessories DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 0 I 3900 Fire Suppression DIVISION I 4 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 0 Not Used 0 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15051 Common Work Results for HVAC 15081 Mechanical Insulation 0 15 I 00 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15190 Natural Gas Piping 15730 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment 0 15800 Air Distribution 15950 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing 0 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Refer to Drawings 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 'rOC n D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D n SECTION 01005 SUMMARY, ALTERNATES, ALLOWANCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.00 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and other Division-I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.01 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION: A. Name of project is Battlement Mesa Company-Grand River Medical: Shell and Core Renovation and Tenant Finish, Battlement Mesa, Colorado. The contract documents are prepared by the Architect, DP A Architectural Group. B. Contract Documents indicate the work of contract, and related provisions of project which may include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: Existing site conditions and restrictions Alterations and coordination's with existing work. Other work to be performed concurrently by Owner. Other work to be performed concurrently by separate contractors. Other work subsequent to work of contract. Alternates which are work of Contract, and alternates which are not work of Contract. Allowances established as work of Contract. Pre-negotiated material/equipment orders assigned as work of contract. Pre-purchased material/equipment for Contract with purchase price included in Contract Sum. Requirements for Owner partial occupancy prior to substantial completion of work of Contract. 1.02 SALES TAX EXEMPTION The General Contrac tor shall provide evidence to the Owner and Architect that State sales tax exemption ha s been received on purchases of ma t erials t o be built into the Grand River Medical Tenant Finish portion of the project. 1.03 MECHANICAUELECTRICAL PROVISION OF GENERAL WORK General : Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicab le requ irements of Division-IS sections for mechanical prov isions within uni ts of general work, and comply with applicable requirements of Division-16 sections for electrical provisions within units of general work. refer to Division-IS and Division-16 sections for characteristics of mechanical and electrical services to be connected to units of general work, and provide units manufactured/fabricated for proper connections and utilization of available services as indicated. 1.04 ELECTRICAL PROVJSIONS Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions ofNEC and standards by NEMA, for electrical components of general work. provide UL listed and labeled products where applicable. Electrical components are recogn ized to include, but not by way of limitation, motors, motor starters, internal equipment w iri ng, integral control switches and s imi lar electrical devic es, electrical heating coils, integrated lighting equipment, electronic equipment , electrical sensors and signals, communication equipment scientific devices and similar electrical components . Where not otherwis e indicated for the work, comply with the following requirements : Performance Requirements for Completed Work: General : The contract documents indicated intended occupancy and utilization of building and its individual systems and facilities . Compliance with governing regulations is intended and required, for the work and for Owner's occupancy and utilization. in addition to the requirement that every element of the work comply with applicable requirements of contract documents, it is also required that the work as a whole (the building project) comply with the following general building performances. 1.05 ALTERATION AND COORDINATION A. General : The work of this Contract includes coordination of entire work of project, including preparation of general coordination drawings/diaphragms/schedules, and control of site utilization; from the beginning of activity, through the project close- out and warranty periods. 1.06 ALTERNATES Not Used END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J D ~ [J u 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART I -GENERAL I .0 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: General description of the work of the entire Project with limitations or coordination with other contracts, ifany. 1.2 GENERAL The work to be done under this Contract is the construction in a workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the Architect, of the Work as shown, documented, and set forth in the Contract Documents. If these documents or job conditions make it impossible to produce first class work or to warranty the work or its performance, or should discrepancies appear among the Contract Documents, request interpretation, correction or c1arification prior to bidding. If the Contractor fails to make such request, work must be performed in a satisfactory manner and no request for added cost or extension of time wi11 be considered. Should conflict occur in or between Drawings and Specifications, Contractor (or Installer) is deemed to have estimated on the more expensive way of doing work unless he shall have asked for and obtained written decision before submission of Bid as to which method or materials will be required. The Contractor represents that he fully understands the nature and extent of the work, all factors and conditions affecting or which may be affected by it and characteristics of its various parts and elements and their fitting together and functioning. 1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION Briefly and without force and effect upon the contract documents, the Work of the Contract can be summarized as follows: OllllOA DM-GRM I SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Pagc2 Project Identification: Battlement Mesa Company/Grand River Medical -Shell and Core Renovation and Tenant Finish, Battlement Mesa , Colorado. 1.4.1 SCOPE OF WORK RESPONSIBILITY Work as described in these documents and specifications have been assigned by th e Owner an d outlined below. All items described as Furnished By and/or Installed By shall be considered with the Scope of Work of this project. The attached list also describes the following work : Other work to be performed concurrently by Owner. Other work to be performed concurrently by separate contractors. Other work subsequent to work of contract. Pre-negotiated material/equipment orders assigned as work of contract. Owncr -BM General Contractor-FCI Tenant-GRM Description A. Earthwork & RetaininG Walls Onsite Mass Excavation ~ Site Cut/Fill Export Excess Spoil or lmoort Suitable Fill@ Site Buildina Excavation Sitework Export Excess Spoil or Import Su ltabte Fill @ Buildinq CtP Concrete Retainina Walls Drv Stack Boulder Retainino Walls Masonry Retaining Walls Fine Grade Site Strio/Store/Soread Topsoil Soil Amendments Offsile Mass Excavation & Cut/Fill Export Excess Spoil or Import Suitable Fill CIP Concrete Reta lnina Walls Drv Stack Boulder RetaininCI Walls Masonry Retaining Walls Fine Grading Offstie OIOIOA DM-GRM Furnished By FCI FCI FCI I FCI N/A N/A N/A FCI FC 6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A I 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 ..-, I lnstallt. By J 0 u FCI fCI FCI I f CI N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A u D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n ... ~ .. SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Strip/Store/Import/Spread Topsoil Soil Amendments B. Site Utilities Onsite Domestic Water Lines. Valves & FittinQs Onsite Fire Lines, Valves, FittinQs & Fire Hvdrants Onsite Storm Lines, Inlets, Manholes & Tie-Ins Onsite Onsite Storm Detention/Rip Rap Sanitary Sewer Lines, Cleanouts, Manholes & Taos Onsite Primary Electric Lines & New XFMR Onsite Pads and rouQh in for Primarv Electric and New XMFR Onsite Secondary Power Feeds to Buildina from New XFMR Onsite Main CATV Lines & Pedestals Onsite CATV Conduit & Pulltape from Onsite Pedestal to Main BuildinQ CATV Cable from Onsite Pedestal to Buildina w/Terminatlon Main Tele/Data Lines & Pedestals Onsite Tele/Data Conduit & Pulltape from Onsite Pedestal to Buildina Tele/Data Cable from Onsite Pedestal to BuildinQ w/Terminalion Natural Gas Line Onsite up to & lncludinQ New Gas Meter Natural Gas Line Onsite-Trenching Only Other Gas/Fuel/Live Steam Lines Offsite Domestic Water Lines, Valves. Fittings & Physical Taps Offsite Fire Lines, Valves, Fittings, Hydrants & Physical Taps Offsite Storm Lines, Inlets, Manholes & Tie-Ins Offsite Offsite Storm Detention/Rip Rao/CIP WinQ Walls Sanitarv Sewer Lines, Cleanouts, Manholes & Taos Offsite Primary Electric Lines & New XFMR(s) Offsite Main CATV Lines & Pedestals Offsite Main Tele/Data Lines & Pedestals Offsite Natural Gas Line from Existing Main to Site Boundary Other Gas/Fuel/Live Steam Lines BrouQht to Site Boundary C. Vehicular & Pedestrian Paviml Onsite Curb & Gutter Onsite Vertical Curb Onsite Asphalt Paving @ Parking & Drive Lanes Onsite OUIUIA DM-GRM Page 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI Holy Cross BM Energy FCI FCI FCI FCI BM FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI BM/GRM FCI FCI FCI BM BM X eel Xcel FCI FCI N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI SECTION 01 0 10 SUMMARY O F WORK ~ Vehicul ar Control Bollards & Guard Railings Precast Concrete Pa rkino S top B locks Concrete Drive Pans Pedestrian Paving/Bike Paths Onsite Street Cut & Patch @ Onsite Utility Work in Section "B" Above Pedestrian Pavina/Bike PathsNehicular Pavina Onsite Offsite Curb & Gutter Offsite Vertical Curb Offsite Asphalt Paving @ Parking & Drive Lanes Offsite Vehicular Control Bollards & Guard Railinas Concrete Drive Pans Offsite Pedestrian Paving/Bike Paths Offsite Street Cut & Patch@ Offsite Utility Work in Section "B" Above 1 D. Site Landscaping Onsite Fertilizers & Soil Amendments Special Topsoil Irrigation Mains Irrigation Distribution , Heads. Controllers. & Systems Existino Tree and Lame Plantina Relocation New Trees & Other Laroe , New Plantings Shrubs/Bushes Landscaping Edging Sod Native & Turf Seeding Work Standard Ground Covers Special Ground Cover Material Slope Protection Systems Gravel & Bark Mulch and/or T ri ms Pruning & Shaping Ornamental Accents Landscaping Boulders & Ornamental Stone Ties, Poles & Dividers Fixed Planters Soil & Plants ® Fixed Planters Moveable Planters/Soil Soil & Plants @ Moveabl e Planters Site Lighting (including conduit, fixtures, lampino, controllers, & testina) Planting Ma intenance until Final Comoletion Landscaping Warranty & Maintenance for First Year after FCO 11101111\ DM·GR"' 0 Page4 0 FCI FCI I FCI FCI FCI FC J I FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI J N/A N/A I N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A I [l BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM I BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Fertilizers & Soil Amendments Special Topsoil Irrigation Mains Offsite lrrioation Distribution, Heads, Controllers, & Systems Existino Tree and Larae Plantin~:~ Relocation New Trees & Other Lame. New Plantings Shrubs/Bushes Landscaoina Edaina Sod Native & Turf Seedino Work Standard Ground Covers Soecial Ground Cover Material Slope Protection Svstems Gravel & Bark Mulch and/or Trims Pruning & Shaoina Ornamental Accents Landscaoina Boulders & Ornamental Stone Ties, Poles & Dividers Fixed Planters Soil & Plants (ill Fixed Planters Moveable Planters/Soil Soil & Plants@ Moveable Planters Site Liohtina (includino conduit, fixtures. Iamping, controllers, & testing) Plantino Maintenance until Final Completion Landscaoina Warrantv & Maintenance for First Year after FCO E. Site Equipment, Furnishings & Specialties Ornamental & Architectural Fencing & Gates Chain Link Fencing & Gates Trash Receptacles Bike Racks Benches Bleachers & Other Seating not with Above Telephone Booths Mail Boxes/Kiosks Parkino Attendant Booth( s) Flaa Poles & Flags FlaQ Pole Bases & Lightino Gazebo Unites) & Associated Structure/Electrical Greenhouses( s) & Associated Structure/Mechanicaii/Eiectrical Water Features/Fountains Ornamental Stone Sionaae Playground Equipment IIIOIOA BM.ORM Page 5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Plaaues & Memorials Swimmina Pools Covered Wa lkways T urnstiles, Physic al Traffic Barriers. & Other Access Control Other Site Eauioment & Furn iture I F. Site Slgnaae & Signalization I On site Traffic SiQnalization Traffi c Control Gates and Access Devices Directional/Traffic Striolna Directional/Traffic Sianaae Buildina Identification Sianaae (Attached to Bu il ding ) Buildina Monume nt Sionaae (Separate from Building)- Buildina Monument Slanaae (Separate from Buildina) - Ornamental Stone Sianaae @ Landscapina Plaaues & Memorials Structura l Supports <6:! Above Monument Sign(s) -1 by FCI Structural Supports@ Above Monument Sign(s)-1 by others I Architectural C laddina@ Above Monument Sian(s) -1 by FCI Architectural CladdinQ@ Above Monument Sign(s)-1 by others LandscapinQ & lrriQatlon Svstem@ Above Monument Sign(s) LiQhtina @ Above Monument Sian(s) Conduit, Rouah-ins @ all of above Testing@ a ll above Sianaae Offsite Traffic Signalization Di rectional/Traffic SiQnaQe and Striping BuildinQ Monument SiQnaQe (in Public Right-of-Way) Structural Supports «U Above Monument Sig n(s) Architectural Cladding -@ Above Monument Sian(s) Landscapina & lrriQation System@ Above Monument Sign(s) LiQht ina@ Above Monument Sian(s) Conduit, RouQh -ins and Connections @ all of above Testing@ all above SiQnaae Building A. Furniture Moveable O!OIOA DM·GRM 0 Pagc6 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A u C'l N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI GRM GRM N/A N/A 1 I N/A N/A I N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A J N/A N/A N/A N/A GRM GRM J FCI FCI GRM GRM u N/A N/A N/A I N/A J N/A ' N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A J N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A J N/A N/A n ~_] I Ll II D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 n ' I SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK Fixed by Component System Fixed-Custom Artwork Blockino for Artwork B. Floors Carpet Carpet padding Concrete Floor Sealer Marble or Tile cal Floors Sheet Vinyl VCT Wood Wall Base C. Ceilings ACT Grid ACT Panels Fire Taped Gyp Board Final Tape & Finish@ Gyp Board Stucco Paint Millwork and Trims D. Demising, Code-Required & Exterior PerimeterWalls +Millwork/Finishes -Fire Taped Gyp Board Final Tape & Finish cal Gyp Board Stucco Millwork and Trims Vinyl Wallcoverings Fabric Wallcoverinos Paint Marble or Tile @ Walls E. Interior Partitions+ Millwork/Finishes Fire Taped Gyp Board Final Tape & Finish @ Gyp Board Stucco Millwork and Trims Custom Millwork and Trims Vinyl Wallcoverings Fabric Wallcoverings Paint FRP/Tile @ Walls F. Lighting Plug-in & Moveable Lighting OIOHJA DM-<iRM Page 7 FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A I I SECTION 0 1010 SUMMARY OF WORK Direct Connect/Wall Sconce Recessed Arch itectural G. Doors Wood Door leafs HM Door leafs HM Frames Finishes Hardware Millwork Vision Kits Connecting Doors Balcony Door(s) H. Window Coverings @ Exterior Glazing & Interior Lites Horizontal Blinds DraperiesNalance Blocking for Blinds/DraperiesNalance Electrical Operators for Above Conduit & Rough-ins @ Above Operators Wiring. Ins tallation & Testing@ Above O~rators I. Electrical Conduit, Pulltape & Rough-ins @ Security System SecuritvSvstem Wiri M, Terminations & Testing Conduit. Pulltape & Rough -ins @ Fire Alarm System Fire Alarm System Equipment, Wiring, Terminations & Testing Conduit. Pulltape & Rough-ins@ Telephone System Telephone/Data Wiring , Terminations. and Testing J. Mechanical Fan Coil Units & High Pressure Duct Medium & Low Pressure Duct 1--Grilles, Reqisters & Diffusers Fire Sprinkler System Plumbing Fixtures Controls low Voltage W iring High Voltage Wiring Magnetic Starters I K. A udloNisual for IVS Cla ssroom and Entry Conduit. Pullwire. Sleeves & Boxes Fixed/Recessed Audio/Paging System Speakers Moveable Audio Speakers Audio/Paging Equipment Televisions w/Remote & Swivel OIIIIOA UM.<;RM Page 8 FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI GRM FCI FCI FCI GRM FCI FCI FC I FCI FCI FCI FCS FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A FCI 0 0 I FCI I FCI j FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI I FCI FCI N/A N/A I N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A .. N/A FCI GRM FCI FCI FCI GRM FCI t FCI FCI FCI I FCI FCI 1 FCI FCI FCI J FCI N/A N/A FCI lJ D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 n SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK CATV EQuipment, WirinQ, Terminations & TestinQ VCRs Portable Clocks/Radios/Stereos AN Wirino, Terminations, & Testino not Specifically Mentioned Above L. Finish Carpentry Special Trim Closet Shelf and Rod Millwork -System Component Millwork -All Other Custom Millwork Blockino for Above M. Office Amenities Microwave/Dishwasher Mini-bar/refriQerators Bathroom Specialties Bathroom Amenities Bathroom Towels Moveable Planters Plam/Corian/Marble Tops@ Bathrooms-CAB Parts Only Plam/Corian/Marble Tops@ Bathrooms-All Other Mirror-Framed Mirror-Non-Framed Backino for Mirrors Elevators A. PassenQer Elevators· Standard Cab Cab Interior Walls and Ceilings Floor System Door -Interior Door -Exterior Door Frame and Sill Decorative Lighting Call Numbers/Buttons Motor, Controls, etc. Teleohone A. Service Elevators/If Provided Finishes (all surfaces) Call Numbers/Buttons Lighting Motor, Controls, etc. Telephone OIOIUA DM.GRM Page 9 GRM GRM GRM GRM N/A N/A GRM GRM FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI FCI fCI N/A N/A N/A N/A FCI CMC FCI FCI FCI CMC FCI FCI FCI FCI N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A I . 0 l'lli!>"I'IU VOIOIO ~ 0 I n fJ 0 [] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NOU:>3S !10 ON3 I I I u D )OIQM !10 A"MVWWflS 01 ~8ed 0 I 0 I 0 NOil.:>3S 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01011 WEATHER CONDITIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and other Division-] Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: Extensions of time and/or costs due to weather conditions. 1.2 GENERAL Weather conditions will be considered abnormal if more severe and extended than those reflected by the ten year average for the month as evidenced by the Climatologically Data, U.S. Department of Commerce, for the project area. Delays due to weather conditions will be allowed on a tentative basis only and a final decision made by the Architect when the Work is substantially completed. Jn allowing delays for weather, the Architect will consider weather conditions prevailing throughout the entire contract period. Extensions of time due to weather or other allowable reasons will be granted on the basis of 1.3 calendar days for every working day lost with each separate extension figured to the nearest whole calendar day. No more than 30 calendar days extension for weather will be allowed during the total construction period. END OF SECTION IIIOllllM.GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01028 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 1.2 1.3 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division !-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Procedures for processing Change Orders and Construction Change Directives. Refer to General Conditions Article 7 for definitions and contractual requirements. B. Related Sections: 1. Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit: Supplementary Conditions. 2. Contract Closeout Procedures: Section 01701 3. Project Record Documents: Section 01720 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the name of individual authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of changes in the work. B. Proposal Request Forms: Submit on AlA form G709 DOCUMENTATION A. Maintain detailed records of the work completed. Provide complete information for evaluation of proposed changes and to substantiate changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. lf requested by Architect or Owner, provide the following additional data to support calculations: Dl 112H BM-GRM SECTION 01028 Page2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.4 I. Quantities of products, labor and equipment. 2 . Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3 . Overhead and profit within the limits set forth in Supplementary Conditions. 7.3 .6 4. Justifications for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from the Contract and similar documentation . C. Include with request for Change Order resulting from work performed under a Construction Change Directive the following additional information: 1. Origin and date of Directive. 2 . Dates, time and by whom work was performed. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4 . Invoices and receipts for products, equipment and subcontracts. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. The Owner through the Architect may submit a Proposal Request which will include description of change and may also include supplementary or revised drawings and specifications and projected time for execution. The time period for which the request will be valid will also be stated. B. The Contractor may make a claim for added costs or extension of time by submitting a request to the Architect which describes the claim, the reasons for the claim, change in Contract Sum and Contract Time and full documentation. Include a statement on the effect of the change on the work of separate contractors, if any. For requested substitutions of products, follow procedures and documentation specified in Section 01630. 1.5 AUTHORIZATION Claims by Contractor: A. Architect will fo11ow procedures set forth in Articles 4.3 and 4.4 of the General Conditions which may result in one or more of the following: 1. A written decision on the claim. 2. Issuance of a Construction Change Directive 3. Issuance of a Change Order B. Requests for Change Proposal : DIUl MIIM-GRM After receipt of Contractors' response to a request for a change, Architect will evaluate and either request additional information, issues a Construction 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 [} 0 [J 0 0 n 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u n SECTION 01028 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Change Directive or issue a Change Order. 1.6 PROCESSING Construction Change Directives: A. Architect wi11 prepare Construction Change Directives, with Owner's Architect's signatures, in 3 copies, one each for Owner, Architect and Contractor. Page 3 B. Contractor will proceed with the work directed and respond promptly to the stated amount or method for determining costs and time impact by: I. Agreement with the directive. 2. Providing data to substantiate any disagreement with the Directive. C. Architect will resolve any differences as mutually agreeable to the parties and issue a Change Order or direct the Contractor to continue the work with costs determined under Article 7.3.6 of the General Conditions. Change Orders: A. Contractor will furnish supporting documentation for the Change Order as requested by the Architect in 3 copies. Architect will prepare and sign the Change Order in 3 copies, and forward to the Contractor who will sign all copies and forward to Owner for signature and distribution to Architect and Contractor. 1.7 CORRELATION A. Promptly revise the Schedule of Values on the Application for Payment Form by indication each authorized Change Order or Construction Change Directive as a separate line item and adjusting the Contract Sum as shown on the Change Order or Construction Change Directive. B. Promptly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect any change in the Contract Time and resubmit. C. Promptly enter changes in the Project Record Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Applicable) n102~ DM.(;RM 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART I-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division !-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: A. Requirements for coordination, supervision and administration for Project, including but not necessarily limited to: 1. Coordination with Owner's Security 2. Construction Coordination 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. General installation provisions. 5. Cleaning and protection. Related Sections: 1.2 1.3 1. For descriptions of the work of the entire Project within and outside of the work of this contract: Section 01010. 2. Procedures and field engineering: Section 01105 3. Project meetings: Section 01200 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S SECURITY SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: lf!CJ.IOA OM-GRM SECTION 01040 COORDINATION Pagc2 A. For locations where several clements of equipment, mechanical or combined mechanical and electrical work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare coordination shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions at accurate scale required for the installation. Prepare and submit coordination drawings prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. B. Lay out the mechanical and electrical work in conformity with the Contract Drawings, coordination drawings and other shop drawings, product data and similar requirements, so that the entire mechanical plant will perform as an integrated system properly interfaced with electrical work and other work . Staff Names: A. Within 15 days ofNotice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; their addresses and telephone numbers. B. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room , the temporary field office and each temporary telephone. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION A. General: 1. Each entity involved in the performance of work for the entire Project shall cooperate in the overall coordination of the work; promptly, when requested, furnish information concerning its portion of the work; and respond promptly and reasonably to the decisions and requests of persons designated with coordination, supervisory, administrative, or similar authority. 2. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. a. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their work is required . B. Administrative Procedures: OlewtlA llM-GRM 1. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction work. Such administrative activities include, but 0 0 0 0 [] 0 0 0 [) 0 0 [l D 0 0 0 0 [J II 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01040 COORDINATION Page 3 are not limited to, the following: a. Preparation of schedules. b. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. c. Delivery and processing of submittals. d. Progress meetings. e. Project closeout activities. C. Conservation: I. Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water and materials. D. Site Utilization: I. In addition to the site utilization limitations and requirements shown on the drawings, and indicated by the Contract Documents, administer the allocation of available space equitably among entities needing access and space, so as to produce the best overall efficiency in the performance of the total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize the space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on the site; but do not unduly risk delays in the work. E. Coordination Meetings: 1.. Include in scheduled meetings, coordination of various entities and activities as set forth in Section 01200. Where necessary, schedule additional coordination meetings for this purpose on as as-needed basis. F. Layout: Ulo.IOA IIM-GIIM I. It is recognized that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships ofthc various clements and systems and their interfacing with other elements and systems. Establishment and coordination ofthese relationships is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Do not scale the drawings. Lay out and arrange all elements to contribute to safety, efficiency and to carry the harmony of design throughout the Work. In case of conflict or un- dimensioned locations, verify required positioning with Architect. SECTION 01040 COORDINATION Page4 G . Substrate Examination: I . The Installer o f each element of the work must examine the conditions of the substra te to receive the work, dimensions and spaces adjacent, to lerances, in terfacing with other elements and services and the conditions under which the work will be performed, and must notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper or timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correcte d in a manner acceptable to the lnstalJer. H . Large and Heavy Equ ipmen t: 1. Wherever possible, prearrange fo r the movement and posit ioning of large equipment into the build ing structure, so that enclosing walls and roofs will neither be d e layed nor need to be removed . 2. Otherwise, advise Cont ractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of large equipment units. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing, so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installa ti on. 3 . Where equipment or products to be installed on the roof are too heavy to be hand-carried, do not transport across roof deck ; position by crane o r other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. 1.5 COMPLETE SYSTEMS 1.6 A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all systems, includ ing mechanical and electrical , be complete and functional to provide the intended or specified performance. The Contractor shall provide all incidental items and parts necessary to achieve this requirement. B. Provide correctly sized power, utilities, p iping, drains, serv ices and their connec tions to equipment and syst ems requiring them , whether or not specific items are listed in the schedule at the end of this sect ion. MECHANICALIELECTRICAL/EQUIPMENT COORDINATION A. General: I. Sequence, coordinate and integrate t he various elements of eq uipment, mechanical work and electrical work so that various systems and mechanical plant will perform as indicated and be in harmony with other work of the build ing. Neither the Architect or his engineering lll o.IOAOM.G RM {J 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J [] D 0 [J 0 0 0 u ,..1 u 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D a 0 0 0 J 0 l SECTION 01040 COORDINATION Page 5 consultants will supervise the coordination, which is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Comply with the following requirements: a. Install piping, duct work and similar services straight and true, aligned with other work, close to walls and overhead structure, allowing for insulation, concealed (except where indicated as exposed) in occupied spaces, and out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. b. Install electrical work in neat, organized manner with conduit and similar services in or parallel with building lines, and concealed unless indicated as exposed. c. For all work maintain maximum practical overhead clearance but not less than 6" above ceiling. Where exposed, maintain 7'-0" minimum cJearance. d. Arrange all work to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment. Locate services requiring maintenance on valves and similar units in front of services requiring less maintenance. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other work. e. Provide space to permit removal of coils, tubes, fan shafts, filters, other parts which may require replacement. f. Locate operating and control equipment and devices for easy access. Furnish access panels where units are concealed by finishes and similar work. g. Integrate mechanical work in ceiling plenums with suspension system, light fixtures and other work, so that required performances of each will be achieved. h. Give the right-of-way to piping systems required to slope for drainage over other service lines and duct work. 1. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for accommodation of mechanical and electrical elements. Provide and place sleeves and anchors required in other work. B. Access Panels: 011~111\ OM.(jRM SECTION 01040 COORDINATION Page 6 1.7 1. Access panels for concealed valves, controls, dampers, pull boxes and other devices requiring access and located in concealed positions other than above lift-out ceilings will be furnished by Installer of item needing access. furnish panels as specified in Section 08300. Coordinate locations with other trades and with Architect. COMPATIBILITY Provide products and equipment which are compatible with other work requiring mechanical/electrical interface including electrical connections, control devices, water, drain and other piping connections. Verify electrical characteristics, fuel requirements and other interface requirements before ordering equipment and resolve conflicts that may arise. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES A. Inspection of Conditions: 1. Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. a. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. b. Re-check measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C . Installation: e l tMei\ DM.GJU.1 1. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing work. Secure work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. 0 0 0 0 [J 0 0 fJ 0 11 0 [l 0 0 0 0 u 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 J 0 n SECTION 0 I 040 COORDINATION Page 7 2. Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction form incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. 3. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. D. Visual Effects: I. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. E. Mounting Heights: I. Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at substantial completion. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Limiting Exposures: A. Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the fol1owing: I. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessive internal or external pressures. 3. Excessive high or low temperatures. 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. g ll140i\ llM.GRM SECTION 01 040 COORDINATION 6. Air contamination or poll ution. 7 . Water or ice. 8. Solvents. 9. Chemicals. 10. Light. 11. Radiation. 12 . Puncture. 13. Abrasion. 14. Heavy traffic . 15. Soiling, staining and corrosion. 16. Bacteria. 17. Rodent and insect infestation. 18. Combustion. 19. Electrical current. 20. High speed operation. 21 . Improper Lubrication. 22. Unusua l wear or other misuse. 23. Contact between incompatible materials. 24. M isalignment. 25 . Ex cess ive weathering. 26. Unprotected storage. 27. lmproper shipping or handling. 28. Theft . 29. Vandalism. END OF SECTION 01~01\0M.ORM 0 Page 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 [] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ri 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 u 0 D J 0 0 J 0 n SECTION OI045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I-GENERAL I.OI DESCRIPTION A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: I. Excavation and Back Fill: Section 02200 Earthwork. B. Work Included: contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching including related excavation and back Fill, required to complete the work or to: I. Make its parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation ofill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routing penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notification of Architect: Notify Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alternation which affects: 1. The Work of the owner or any separate contractor. 2. The structural value or integrity of any element ofthe project. 3. The integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 4. The efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety or operational clements. 5. The visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3-EXECUTION OIOol' BM-<li!M SECTION 01045 Page2 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3 .01 INSPECTION A . Inspect existing conditions of the project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or perfonnance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect; do not proceed wi th the work until the architect has provided further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessa ry to assure the structural va lue or in t egrity of the affected portion ofthe work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the proj ec t from damage . C. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A . General : Openings in construction which arc required by other contractors shall be provided by crafts involved. It is the responsibility of various contractors to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently detailed infonnation . In the event of failure to supply this advance infonnation, all cutting as may be required shall be done only after concurrence of Architect and at expense of negligent party. B. Cutting: Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 011~5DM.GRM Execute excavating and back fi ll ing me th od s whi ch will prevent settlement or damage to other work. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. 0 0 0 0 fJ 0 0 [] 0 0 0 0 0 0 u D [} 0 n D 0 D 0 ~ 3 0 0 n a ~ [J 0 0 ·0 0 J 0 n SECTION 01045 Page 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING Cut concrete or masonry using a masonry saw or core drill as applicable. Pneumatic tools will not be allowed unless approved by Architect. C. Fitting: Executing fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetration through surfaces. D. Patching: Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or other material penetrates or passes through fire-resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with cement grout, plaster or fire-resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall ceiling or floor. E. Finishing: Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish schedule or material that is on constructed surfaces. Refinish entire surface as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: I. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. END OF SECTION 1111145DM.(;RM 0 ~ 0 0 D ~ 0 G 0 u ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 J n SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART I-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division !-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.2 A. General infonnation and listing of reference standards. REFERENCE STANDARD A. Applicability ofStandards: 1. Except where Contract Documents include more explicit or stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Individual Sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep available at the project site for reference. B. Conflicting Requirements: 1. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be enforced, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. C. Publication Dates: I. Comply with standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. 010'10 OM-GRM SECTION 01090 REFEREN C E STANDARDS Page2 D . Copies of Standards: I. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activities. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. a. Where copies of standards are needed for proper performance of a recognized construction activity, the C ontractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS Trade Associations, Standards and Abbreviations: Reference s in the Contract Documents to publications and recommendations, by either acronym, name or abbreviation, include but are not necessarily l imited to the following trade associa tions, technical societies, government agencies, recognized authorities and standards: AA AABC AAMA AAN AASHTO AATCC ACI ACIL ACPA ADC AFBMA AGA AHA AHAM AI AlA A. I. A. AIHA AISC AISI AITC ALI ALSC AMCA ANSI 1110'10 OM.(jRM Aluminum Association Associated Air Balance Council American Architectural Manufacturers Assoc iation American Association ofNurserymen American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists American Concrete Institute American Council of Independent Laboratories American Concrete Pipe Association Air Diffusion Council Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association American Gas Association American Hardboard Association Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers The Asphalt Institute The American Institute of Architects American Insurance Association American Industrial Hygiene Association American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute American Institute of Timber Construction Associated Laboratories American Lumber Standards Committee Air Movement and Control Association American National Standards Institute '0 0 0 0 0 r·1 tJ 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D J 0 rj D ~1 0 0 G 0 0 ""j u 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 ] J J n SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS Page3 APA A.P.A. API ARI ARMA ASA ASC ASHRAE ASME ASPE ASSE ASTM AWl AWPA AWPB AWS AWWA BHMA BIA BIFMA CAGI CAUS CBM CDA CE CFR CGA CISCA CIS PI CLFMI CPSC CRI CRSI cs CSI CTI CSSB DHI DLPA DOC DOT 010'10 OM-GRM American Plywood Association American Parquet Association American Petroleum Institute Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Asphalt Roofing Manufacturer's Association Acoustical Society of America Adhesive and Sealant Council American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Plumbing Engineers American Society of Sanitary Engineers American Society for Testing and Materials Architectural Woodwork Institute American Wood Preserver's Association American Wood Preserver's Bureau American Welding Society American Water Works Association Builders' Hardware Manufacturer's Association Brick Institute of America Business & Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association Compressed Air and Gas Institute Color Association of the United States Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association Copper Development Association Corps ofEngineers (U.S. Department of the Army) Code ofFederal Regulations Compressed Gas Association Ceiling and Interior Systems Contractors Association Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute Consumer Products Safety Commission The Carpet and Rug Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) The Construction Specification Institute Ceramic Tile Institute of America Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau Door and Hardware Institute Decorative Laminate Products Association Department of Commerce Department of Transportation SECTION 0 I 090 REFERENCE STANDARDS ECSA EIA EIMA EJMA EA ETL FAA FCC FCI FGMA FHA FM FPL FS FTI GA GSA HEI HI H.I. HMA HPMA HUD IBD ICBO ICEA IEC IEEE IE SMA IGCC ILl IMI lMSA IRI ISA LPI MBMA MCCA MFMA lllo<I(IOM.GRM Exchange carrier's Standards Association Electronic Industries Association Exterior Insulation Manufacturer's Association Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association Environmental Protection Agency ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. Federal Aviation Administration Federal Communications Commission Fluid Controls Institute Flat Glass Marketing Association Federal Housing Administration (U.S . Dept. ofHUD) Factory Mutual Research Organization Forest Products Laboratory (U.S . Dept. of Agriculture) Federal Specification (General Services Administration) Facing Tile Institute Gypsum Association General Services Administration Heat Exchange Institute Hydronics Institute Hydraulic Institute Hardwood Manufacturer's Association Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association Housing and Urban Development Institute of Business Designers International Conference of Building Officials Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, lnc. International Electrotechnical Commission (available from ANSI) Institute ofElectrical and Electronic Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society ofNorth America Insulating Glass Certification Council Indiana Limestone Institute of America International Masonry Institute International Municipal Signal Association Industrial Risk Insurers Instrument Society of America Lighting Protection Institute Metal Building Manufactur er's Association Mechanical Contractors' Association of America Maple Flooring Manufacturer's Association 0 Page4 0 0 0 0 0 0 I"' u 0 0 0 0 l] 0 0 r) u ll 0 rJ 0 1 0 ·'1) J 0 0 il 0 0 0 a 0 ~ ~ ~ 0 G a n SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS Marble Institute of America Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Department of Defense) Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association Midwest Roofing Contractor's Association Page 5 MIA MIL M LISFA MRCA MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society ofthe Valve & Fitting Industry NAAMM NAPA NAPF NBGQA NBHA NBS NCMA NEC NECA NEil NEMA NFPA N.F.P.A. NHLA NIST NKCA NLGA NOFMA NPA NPCA NRCA NSF NSPE NSSEA NTMA NWMA NWWDA OSHA PCA PCI POI PEl PS RFCI RIC RIS RMA 1)tO'III BM·GRM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Asphalt Pavement Association National Association of Plastic Fabricators (Now DLPA) National Building Granite Quarries Association National Builders Hardware Association (Now DHI) National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Dept. ofCommerce) National Concrete Masonry Association National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement National Electrical Contractors Association National Elevator Industry, Inc. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association National Fire Protection Association National Forests Products Association National Hardwood Lumber Association National Institute ofStandards and Technology National Kitchen Cabinet Association National Lumber Grades Authority National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association National Particleboard Association National Paint and Coating Association National Roofing Contractor's Association National Sanitation Foundation National Society ofProfessional Engineers National School Supply and Equipment Association The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (Now NWWDA) National Wood Window & Door Association (Formerly NWMA) Occupational Safety and Health Administration Portland Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute Plumbing & Drainage Institute Porcelain Enamel Institute Product Standard ofNBS (U.S. Dept. ofCommerce) Resilient Floor Covering Institute Roof Insulation Committee Redwood Inspection Service Rubber Manufacturer's Association SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS SAMA SOl S.D.I. SGCC SIGMA SJI SMACNA SPIB SPRl SSPC SSPMA SWI SWPA TCA TIMA TPI UBC UL USDA USPS WCLIB WCMA WIC WRl wsc WSFI WWPA W .W .P.A. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association Steel Deck Institute Steel Door Institute Safety Glazing Certification Council Sealed Insulation Glass Manufacturer's Association Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal & A ir Conditioning Contractor's National Associa tion Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Single Ply Roofing Institute Steel Structures Painting Council Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturer's Associat ion Steel Window Institute Submersible Wastewater Pump Association Tile Council of America, Inc. Thennal Insulation Manufacturer's Association Truss Plate Institute Unifonn Building Code Underwriters' Laboratories United States Department of Agriculture United States Postal Service West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Wall Covering Manufacturer's Association Woodwork Institute of California Wire Reinforcing Institute Water Systems Council Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute Western Wood Products Association (Grading Rules) Woven Wire Products Association PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PA RT 3-EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION lliCI'ICl DM.(;RM 0 Page6 D [1 [1 0 0 D 0 fJ u 0 0 0 0 D D 0 fJ ll D D 0 Q 0 0 J a u 0 0 0 J 0 0 J 0 0 0 SECTION 01105 ADMINISTRATION, PROCEDURES, CODES PART I-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division !-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 A. General administrative requirements and procedures and related applicable codes. CODES A. Obtain all permits, inspections, approvals and certificates required by Jaw. Conform to all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the location of the Project. Regulations: A. In addition to the above conform to the following standards and regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at the Project site, available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need for such reference. I 2003 International Building Code 2 ICC/ANSI AI 17.1-1998 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 3 2003 International Fire Code 4 2003 International Mechanical Code 5 2003 International Plumbing Code 6 2002 National Electrical Code Publication Dates: A. Comply with codes and standards in effect at the date of the Contract Documents, except where a standard of a specific date or edition is indicated. 1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES Oil OS BM-GRM SECTION 01105 Page 2 ADMINISTRATION, PROCEDURES, CODES 1.4 A . The existence and location of underground utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. B. Before starting any work disturbing, moving or penetrating the ground, call the owning utilities, to locate, stake and identify depth of all buried utilities within the construction limits . Obtain location information for water and sewer lines from the appropriate entity. SURVEYS, LAYOUTS, LEVELS General: A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish and maintain bench marks and other dependable markers to set the lines and levels for the work al each story of construction and elsewhere on the site as needed to properly locat e every element of the work of the entire project. 1. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. B . Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown within recognized tolerances. Do not scale the drawings to determine dimensions. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of the marked lines and levels provided for use. C . Record deviations from the required lines and levels, and advise the Architect promptly upon detection of dev iations exceeding indicated or recognized tolerances. Record deviations which are accepted (not corrected) on the record drawings. Refer to Section 01720 for record drawing requirements. Site Improvements: A . Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. Building Lines and Levels: A. Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical Work. Basic Layout: A . The Contractor will locate and maintain positions for building comers and UIIO}DM.(;Rt.l 0 D 0 0 0 n 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 If w 0 [) 0 n D D D 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 n SECTION 01105 Page 3 ADMIN1STRA TlON, PROCEDURES, CODES 1.5 primary wall lines for all entities engaged in construction and will establish final grading control levels. All other layouts, grade stakes and levels required for the Work are the responsibility of each Installer. Layout Procedures: A. Verify layout infonnation shown on the drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing bench marks, before proceeding with the layout of the actual work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C. As the work proceeds, maintain an accurate surveyor's log or record book of such checks, available for the Architeces reference at reasonable times. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Furnish Construction Schedule, as required by General Conditions, not less than 4 copies. 1. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 2. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 3. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of Ill lOS DM-GRM SECTION 01105 Page 4 ADMINISTRATION, PROCEDURES, CODES 1.6 values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports , payment requests and other schedules. 4 . Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to a11ow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Bar Chart Schedule: A. Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar chart type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days of the date established for "Commenc ement ofthe Work." 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". 2 . Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in I 0% increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Include listing of Subcontractors, suppliers and materials men with name of contact person, address and phone number. Updating: A. The schedules shall be updated and reissued monthly and shall reflect actual job progress, delays or gains of time and any rescheduling. The original schedule and each updating shall be furnished in 4 copies, one to the Owner and three tot he Architect. All costs for this scheduling shall be borne by the Contractor. Submit Architect's copies as a part of each pay request which will not be processed without such updates . 1. When schedule revisions affect the submittals schedule, revise that schedule and submit to Architect with revised Construction Schedule. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Properly carton, crate, cover and protect materials, products and equipment for shipping, handling and storing. Use appropriate means for hoisting and loading which will prevent damage or over stress to items being handled or shipped. Store them under roof in controlled environment wherever feasible otherwise store off the ground under suitable coverings properly secured against wind and weather. Protect all items from rain, snow, moisture, wind, CJIICI~ BM-GRM 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 f I 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D n SECTION 0 I I 05 Page 5 ADMINISTRATION, PROCEDURES, CODES cold, heat, frost, sun, staining, discoloration, deterioration and physical damage from any cause. Refer to individual sections for specific requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION Ill lOS IIM-GRM 0 0 0 D D D 0 D 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D n SECTION 01120 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 1.2 A. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by procedures and methods to expedite completion of the work. B. In addition to demolition, specifically shown, cut, move and remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Include such items as: I. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete. 3. Cleaning of surfaces, and removal of surface finishes, as needed to install new work and finishes. C. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified conditions for each material, with a workmanlike transition to adjacent new items of construction. D. Cutting and repairing of existing roof caused by demolition, alteration or any other items within Scope of Work for which penetration of existing roof is necessary. Repair should be made with similar materials to match existing conditions and shall conform to any testing and/or requirements for proper assembly. Architect will be notified or existing conditions and will verify proper conformance. E. CAUTION: Areas within Scope ofWork may asbestos material. If asbestos material is encountered or reasonable suspicion of existence is determined beyond information shown on drawings, all work shall cease and desist and Owner should be notified immediately. RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Cutting and Patching: Section 0 I 045 B. Use of Existing Utilities: Section 01500, Construction Facilities and SECTION 01120 Page2 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 1.3 Temporary Controls. C . C leaning During Construction: Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to c ause least damage to each type of work, and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new work. B. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work. 1. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals by methods to terminate surfa ces in a straight line at a natural point of division . C. Protect existing finishes, equipment and, adjacent work which is scheduled to remain, from damage. 1. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes of temperature . a. Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F . b. Provide weather protection, waterp roofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent damage to remain ing existing work and to new work. D. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from existing building and from area occupied by Owner, and to provide weather protection. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. General requirements that work be complete: 1. Provide same products or types of construction as that in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. a. Generally, Contract Documents will not define products or standards of workmanship present in existing construction; Contractor shall determine products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of the existing as a sample of comparison. 2. Presence of a product, finish, or type of construction, requires that 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 D u 0 0 J r·1 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01120 Page 3 AL TERA TJON PROJECT PROCEDURES patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE 3.2 3.3 3.4 A. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching existing quality of workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work shall be not less than that specified for new work. LAYING OUT WORK A. Verify dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of existing work. Refer discrepancies between drawings, specifications and existing conditions to Architect for adjustment before work affected is performed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in satisfactory, workmanlike manner. B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of the construction contemplated by the Construction Documents. C. Prior to commencing work, carefully compare and check Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings, each with the other that in any way affects the location or elevation of the work to be executed, and should any discrepancy be found, immediately report the same to the Architect for verification and adjustment. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, duct work, etc. are diagrammatic and job conditions shall not always permit their installation in the location shown. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Architect's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the Architect's approval. he shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Architect. PATCHING EXISTING FACILITIES A. Existing structure, facilities, etc. that are damaged or removed due to required construction work, shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be SECTION 01120 Page4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROC EDURES 3 .5 3 .6 3 .7 left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to satisfaction of the Arc hitect. INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK A . Protect existing improvements from damage. B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the new work and shall not in any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from adjacent facilities. C. Where new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Owner. ADJUSTMENTS A. Where partitions are removed, patch floors ; walls and ceilings with finish materia ls to match existing. 1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads. 2. Where extreme change of plane or two inches or more occurs, request instructions from Architect as to method of making transition. DAMAGED SURF ACES A. Patch and replac e any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or shows other imperfections, with matching materials. I . Provide adeq uate support of substrate prior to patching the finish. 2. Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce un iform color and texture over entire surface. 3. When existing surface cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersecti ons. 0 0 0 n D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 II D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D n SECTION 01120 Page 5 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 3.8 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK 3.9 A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike transition. patch work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet. 1. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface. DUST CONTROL A. Precaution shall be exercised at all times to control dust created as a result of any operations during the construction period. If serious problems arise due to air borne dust, and when directed by Architect, operations causing such problems shall be temporarily discontinued and steps taken to control the dust. 3.10 FJRE PROTECTION A. Maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage and injury to workmen. All scrap materials, rubbish and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the work area and shall not be permitted to be scattered to adjacent areas. B. Suitable storage space shall be provided outside the immediate building area for storing flammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods. C. A fire extinguisher shall be available at each location where cutting or welding is being performed. Where electric or gas welding or cutting work is done, interposed shields of noncombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the premises. D. Provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Bulletins Nos. 1 0 and 241. SECTION 01120 Page 6 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 3.11 CLEANING A. Perfonn periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 01710, 01500 and as follows: I . Clean Owner-occupied areas daily, when used by Contractor. 2. Clean spil1age, over spray, and heavy collection of dust in Owner- occupied area immediately. B . At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. C. At completion of work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a condition suitable for use by Owner. END OF SECTION D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 II 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 I PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Pre-construction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference: A meeting will be scheduled by the Architect within 1 0 days following Notice Administrative requirements such as subcontractor lists, schedule of values, payment applications, pay-out schedules, progress charts, change order procedures, sales tax records, and project closeout will be reviewed in detail. Representatives of the General Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors, Owner, Architect and Architect's Consultants will be present. Job site procedures to include the following items will be discussed. 1. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 2. Owner's Requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls. 4. Temporary utilities. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 6. Materials testing. 7. Requirements of start-up trades. 8. Building Layout 9. Use of Architect's Consultants. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Contractor shall schedule weekly progress meetings at Contractor's job site field office. Representatives of the General Contractor and Architect will be present. Also invited as appropriate to items under discussion will be selected subcontractors or suppliers and the Architect's Consultants. The following items will be discussed: 1. Review of work progress since previous meetings. 2. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 3. Problems which impede construction schedule. 4. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to construction schedule. 7. Plan progress, schedule during succeeding work period. 8. Coordination of Schedules. 9. Maintenance of quality standards. I 0. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. U1200 llM.ORM SECTION 0 I 200 PROJECT MEETINGS Page2 I I. Review proposed changes for effect on other trades, construction schedule, and completion date. 12. Coordina tion of separate contracts. 13. Other business as required. END OF SECTION Gl~llp.j.Q M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D u 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 SECTION 01310 SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.00 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate both the procedural timing and the listing (naming and sequencing) of reports/activities required by provisions of this section and other sections, to afford consistency and logical coordination between submitted reports or lists. Maintain coordination and correlation between separate reports by updating at monthly or shorter time intervals. Make appropriate distribution of each report and updated report to entities involved in the work including Architect/Engineer and Owner. In particular, provide close coordination of progress schedule, schedule of values, listing of subcontractors, schedule of submittals, progress reports, and payment requests. I .02 PRELIMINARY PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Not more than 15 days following "Notice of Award", submit a bar-chart type progress schedule indicating a time bar for each major category or unit of work to be performed at site, properly sequenced and intermeshed, and showing completion of the work sufficiently in advance of date established for substantial completion of the work. With submittal of bar chart, submit a tabulation (by date) of submittals required during first 90 days of Construction Time; as required either directly by date/period relation in contract documents, or necessitated by lead times related to individual time bars shown on schedule for associated work. At Contractor1s option, submittal dates may be shown on bar-chart schedule, in lieu ofbeing tabulated. III)IIID BMoGRM Superimpose an S-curve on schedule to show "estimated" total dollar-volume of work performed at any date during Contract Time: with a column of cost figures in left-hand margin, ranging from zero to Contract Sum. SECTION 01310 Page2 SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 1.03 FULLY DEVELOPED PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Based on preliminary development of progress schedule (if any), and whatever updating and feedback may have occurred, during project start-up, secure critical time commitments for performing major elements of the work. W ithin 30 days of date established for "commencement of the work", submit a comprehensive bar-chart type progress schedule indicating (by stage-coded symbols) a time bar for each major category or unit of work to be performed at site, and including minor units which are, nevertheless, involved in overall sequencing of the work. Arrange schedule to graphically show major sequences required in intermeshing of work, and to show how substantial completion is scheduled to a11ow for Architect's or Engineer's procedure for certification thereto. Prepare and maintain schedule sufficiently wide sh eet or series of sheets, of stable transparency or other reproducible stock, to show required data clearly for entire Construction Time, and to permit reproduction for required distribution. B. Phasing: Arrange schedule with notations to show how sequence of work is affected by requirements for phased completion , work by separate contractors, work by Owner, pre-purchased materials, coordination with existing work, limitations of continued occupancies, non-interruptible services, partial occupancy prior to substantial completion, site restrictions , provisions for future work, seaso nal variations, environmental control, and similar provisions of total project. Refer to other sections of Division-I and other contract documents for requirements. C. Distribution : Following i nitial submittal to and response by Architect/Engineer, print and distribute progress schedule to Architect/Engineer (3 copies), Owner, separate contractors (if any), principal subcontractors and suppliers or fabricators, and others w ith a need- to-know schedule-compliance requirement. Post copies in project meeti ng rooms and field (temporary) offices. Distribute and post subsequent updated issues to same entities, whenever revisions are made; except delete entities from d istribution which h ave completed assigned work and are no longer invo lved in performance of scheduled work. 1.04 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE: A . General : Immediately following development and acceptance of fully devel oped progress schedule, prepare a complete schedule of work-related submittals. Submit within 10 days of date required for establishment of progress schedule. Correlate submittal schedule with listi ng of principal OI)IClO OM-GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 [} rl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01310 Page 3 SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS subcontractors, ad required by the General Conditions, and with the 11 listing ofproducts11 or 11 procurement schedule11 as specified in 11 Products and Substitutions" sections and elsewhere in contract documents. B. Form: Prepare schedule in chronological sequence of 11 first submittals11 • show category of submittal, name of subcontractor, generic description of work covered, related section numbers, activity or event number on progress schedule, scheduled date for first submission and blank columns for actual date of submittal, resubmittal, and final release or approved by Architect or Engineer. 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS, REPORTING: A. Initial Progress Meeting: Schedule initial progress meeting, recognized as "Pre-Construction Meeting", for a date not more than 15 days after date of commencement of the work. Use it as an organizational meeting, and review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Progress Meeting: Weekly, to be attended by a representative of the Owner, Architect, Contractor and major subcontractors at the Project Site. C. Schedule Updating: Immediately following each progress meeting, where revisions to progress schedule have been made or recognized, revise progress schedule. Reissue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting and the submittal of progress payment requests. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A. General: Prepare schedule of values, as required by General Conditions, in coordination with preparation of progress schedule. Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and forms required for the work, including progress schedule, payment request form, listing of subcontractors, schedule of allowances schedule of alternates, listing of products and principal suppliers and fabricators, and schedule of submittals. Provide breakdown of Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of payment requests and progress reports. Break down principal subcontract amounts into several line items. Round offto nearest whole dollar, but with total equal to Contract Sum. Submit (3) copies of schedule of values to Architect/Engineer no later than 14 days after Notice to Proceed. B. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit schedule of values when change orders affect listing and when actual performance of the work involves necessary changes of substance to values previously listed. UlJlOB DM·GRM SECTION 01310 Page4 SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS 1.07 PAYMENT REQUESTS: A. General: Except as othetwise indicated, sequence of progress payments is to be regular, and each must be consistent with previous applications and payments. It is recognized that certain applications involve extra requirements, including initial application, application at times of substantia l completion, and final payment application. B. Waivers of Lien: For each payment application, submit waivers oflien from every entity (including Contractor) who could lawfully and possibly file a lien in excess of $100 arising out of Contract and related to the work covered by payment. Submit partial waivers for amount requested (prior to deduction or retainage) on each item; and when application shows completion of item, submit final of full waivers. Owner reserves right to designate which entities involved in the work must submit waivers. C. Waiver Delays: Each progress payment must be submitted with Contractor1s waiver for period of construction covered by application; but may, at Contractor1s option, be submitted with waivers from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for previous period of construction covered by previous application; except final payment application must be submitted with (or preceded by) final or full waivers from every entity involved with performance of the work . D. Waiver Forms : Submit waivers on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to Owner. E . Payment Application Times: The 11daten for each progress payment is as indicated in Contractor Agreement. F. Payment Application Forms: Certificate For Contractors Payment shall be made on fonns as required by Owner's Representative. G. Application Preparation: Except as othetwise indicated, complete every entry provided for on the form, including notarization and execution by authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be returned by Architect without action. Entries must match current data of schedule ofvalucs and progress schedule and report. Listing must include amounts of change orders issued prior to first day of the 11period of construction" covered by application. H. Initial Payment Application: The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation: 111)1116 DM.GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 rl 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01310 Page 5 SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS ]. 0111110 OM-GRM Listing of subcontractors and principal supplier and fabricators. Schedule ofvalues. Progress schedule (final). Schedule of principal products. Schedule of unit prices. Schedule of submittals. Listing of Contractor's staff assignments and principal consultants. Copies of acquired building penn its and similar authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for current perfonnance of the work. Perfonnance and/or payment bonds (if required). Evidence satisfactory to Owner that Contractor's insurance coverages have been secured. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance coverages. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required. Initial progress report, including report of pre-construction meeting. Application at Time of Substantial Completion: Following issuance of Architect's final"certificate of substantial completion," and also in part as applicable to prior certificates on portions of completed work as designated, a "special" payment application may be prepared and submitted by Contractor. The principal administrative actions and submittals which must proceed or coincide with such special applications can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation. 1. Occupancy pennits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and franchised services, assuring Owner's full access and use of completed work. 2. Warranties (guarantees), maintenance agreements and similar provisions of contract documents. 3. Test/adjust/balance records, maintenance instructions, meter readings, start-up perfonnance reports, and similar change-over infonnation gennane to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance of completed work. 4. Final cleaning ofwork. 5. Application for reduction (if any) ofretainage, and consent of surety. 6. Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance coverage's, including proof of extended coverage's as required. SECTION 01310 Page6 SCHEDULES. REPORTS , PAYMENTS J. 7. Final progres s photographs, where required . 8. Listing of contractor1s incomplete w or k, recognized as exceptions to Architcct's!Enginecr's Certi ficate of substant ial completion. Final Payment Application: The administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of final payment application can be summarized as follows, but not nece ssarily by way oflimitation: I . Completion of project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial payment (regardless of whether special payment application was previously made). 3. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner~ that unsettled claims will be settled and that work not actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 4 . Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner. 5. Certified property surety. 6. Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. 7. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 8. Change over of door locks a nd other Contractor's access provisions to Owncr1S property. 9 . Consent of surety fo r final payment. K. Application Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each payment application, one copy of which is completed with waivers of lien and similar attachments. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing those attachments, and recording appropriate information related to application in a manner to Architect/Engineer. Transmit to Archi tect/Engineer by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours. PART 2-PRODUCTS (not applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION (not applicable) OIJIOD DM.GR M 0 0 0 0 Q 0 [J u 0 u 0 0 0 0 0 D [J 0 II u 1~11!:1"1'10 00 I (10 0 D 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NOI.L:J3S .:10 ON3 0 0 S~N3WA Vd 'S~110dffil 'S31fl03H:JS 0 L :)Sed 01£10 NOI.L:J3S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J n SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.01 GENERAL A. Submittals shall be made early enough to account for processing described below and a reasonable period for thorough review by the Architect and/or Engineer. B. Shop drawings submitted for this work will make particular note of fieldwmeasurcd dimensions, aswbuilt conditions, and conditions requiring special coordination with other contractors and/or the requirements of the activities of the Owner. c. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples indicated in specifications sections. Contractor agrees that shop drawings processed by the Architect arc not change orders; that the purpose of shop drawings submitted by the contractor is to demonstrate to the Architect that the Contractor understands the design concept; that the Contractor demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to usc. 1.02 SHOP ORA WINGS A. Subcontractor: Submit six prints per shop drawings sheet to the General Contractor. B. General Contractor: 1. Review all shop drawings and Product Data Submittals for accuracy, completeness, and conformity with the Contract Documents. Make notes and corrections on sepia tracings, stamp with Contractor's stamp/date. Signature of individual who reviewed the shop drawings is required, and located below the Contractor's stamp. 2. Prints as required. 3. Send six corrected prints to Architect. 4. Shop drawings not stamped, corrected and signed by the Contractor will be returned. C. Architect: 1. Check drawings by making notes and corrections on sepia tracings; stamp "No Exceptions Taken", "Revise and Re-submit", "Rejected", etc. as required. 2. In the event that the drawings require a consultant's check, route tracing and two prints through the consultant and back to the Architect as necessary. 3. Retain marked prints, or reproducibles from marked sepia. 4. Return marked sepias to contractor. D. General Contractor: 1. Print necessary copies for record, distribution, etc. SECTlON 01340 Page 2 SHOP ORA WING S, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.03 1.04 2 . Send corrected copy to Subcontractor. 3. Maintain one fina l set for Record Documents. Sec 01700 Closeout. E . Be-submitta l: In the event the d rawings have to be re-submitted to the A rch itect, the origina l sepia tracings shall be returned directly to the General Contractor anywhere in the above routing necessary. The Subcontractor sha11 make h is corrections and re-route new sepia trac ings as outlined above. F. References: Shop drawings shall be referenced to appli cable drawings or specification Sections to facilitate case and accuracy of c hecking. PRODUCT DATA A . Subcontractor: Subcontractor shall s ubmit s ix (6) copies of brochure material and a ny required samples, or as otherwise indicated in various Sections. B. Rout ing : Routing w il l be as indicated above for shop drawings with the Architect and Engineer retaining two (2) copies for file and return ing four copies to the Contractor fo r his file and distribution to the Subcontractor as applicable. C . Refe rence: Product data shall be referenced to applicable drawings or specification sections to facil itate case and accu racy of checking. JOB SITE DOCUMENTS A . Only accepted shop drawings or product data shall be kept at the job s ite . T he Contractor shall keep a complete set of such documents on file at the job site. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01340 Page 3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Required Field Measurements are the responsibility of the General Contractor and will be made after shop drawings have been checked by the Architect. 1.06 SAMPLES A. The Architect will provide the General Contractor with a check list indicating all materials where color, texture or finish is subject to selection by the Architect. Certain other samples will also be requested for usc by the Architect in preparation of color and material samples presentations for the Owner. B. Promptly after receipt of checklist, the General Contractor shall assemble and deliver to the Architect a complete collection of all required samples. C. Upon receipt of such complete collection of samples, the Architect will, with reasonable promptness, make the selections and prepare and deliver to the General Contractor a schedule covering all items subject to selection. D. The Architect reserves the right not to make individual determination or selections until all samples of all materials arc furnished to him. END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL l.OI TESTING-GENERAL Pagel The Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities as the Architect may require for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. The Contractor shall not use any materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required, have been made and the materials or equipment found to be acceptable. Any product which becomes unfit for use after approval thereof shall not be incorporated into the work. All materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their preparation use. The General Contractor shall furnish the required samples without charge and shall give sufficient notice of the placing of orders to permit the testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at the site of the work. Tests shall be made by an accredited testing laboratory. Expect as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of all materials and the laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). Where additional or specific information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is required, such information is included under the applicable sections of the Specifications. Any modification of, or elaboration on, these test procedures which may be included for specific materials under their respective sections in the Specifications shall take precedence over these procedures. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing samples of sufficient size for test purposes and for cooperating with the Owner or his representative in obtaining and preparing samples for tests. All tests will be in accordance with standard test procedures and will be performed by a laboratory selected by the Owner. Results of all tests shall be provided to the Owner, Architect, General Contractor and the applicable subcontractor. 1.02 TESTING AT THE OWNER'S EXPENSE Not Used 1.03 TESTING AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE 1. Materials incorporated into this project will be subject to routine tests as UI4000M-GilM SECTION 0 1400 QUALITY CONTROL Page2 requ ired to insure their compliance with the speci fications , including but not necessarily restrict ed to, the following: A. Concrete: Primary mix design, s lump tests and cylinder compression tests. B . Soils: Subsoil in ves tigat ion, physical analysis and compaction tests. C . Masonry : Mortar and/or Prism tests. D. Weld Tests: X-Ray or ultrasonic tests . E. Asphalt: Mix design, dens ity tests for subgrade, base course and asphalt. 2. Jfrequired, the following testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor installing the materials being tested . A. Material Substitution: Any tests of basic material or fabrication equipment o ffered as a substitute for specified items on which a test may be required in order to provide its compliance with the Specifications. B. Mechanical/Electrical : Tests on mechanical or electrical systems required to insure their proper installation and operation. C. Failed Tests: Any test that fails shall be paid for by the installing contrac tor subject to the following conditions: 1. Quantity and nature of tests will be determined by the Architect. 2. All tests shall be t aken in the presence of the Architect or his representative. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance. 3 . Proof of noncompliance will make the installing contractor liable fo r any corrective action which the Architect feels is prudent including complete removal and replacement of defective material. 4 . Nothing contained herein is intended to imply that the installing contractor does not have the right to have tests performed on any material at any time for his own information and job control so long as the Owner does not assume responsibi1ity for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials. 1.04 TEST REPORTS Reports of all tests made by testing laboratories, whether at Owner's or Contractor's expense shall be distributed by the testing laboratory as follows : illoiOO DM·GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IJ 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 n 0 D a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL I Copy -Contractor I Copy -Applicable supplier or subcontractor 1 Copy -Owner 1 Copy -Applicable Engineer 1 Copy -Arc hi teet Other Copies -As directed 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM Page 3 The General Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform a sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, the functional performance and identification. This control shall be established for ail construction by testing laboratories or engineer employed by the Owner. Contractor's control system shall specifically include a1J testing assigned to the contractor or his subcontractors by various sections of the Specifications. Contractor's quality control system is the means by which he assures himself that his construction complies with the requirements of the contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations and should be keyed to the proposed construction schedule. Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all inspections and tests performed, instructions received from the Architect, and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These records shall include evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by each Section of the Specifications. Contractor shall furnish to Architect, with his proposed Schedule ofValues and Construction Progress Schedule, his quality control plan which shall include the personnel, procedures, instructions, and records to be used. The plan shall specifically include the following: I. A list of control tests which the Contractor understands he or his subcontractors are to perform. 2. Procedures for reviewing all shop drawings, product data, samples or other submittals before submission to Architect. Include procedures for obtaining required field measurements. 3. Method of documenting quality control operations, inspection and testing 01400 DM-GR M SECTION 01400 Page4 n QUALITY CONTROL [] including samples of proposed forms. n END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 fJ 0 III41100M.()ItM 0 /) 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1-Spccification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Minimum requirements for temporary services, utilities and facilities. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication by Architect that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work. The use of alternative facilities equivalent to those specified is the Contractor's option, subject to Architect's acceptance. I. Except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary utility services arc included in the Contract Sum. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards 1. 2. Comply with governing regulations, industry standards and utility company regulations and recommendations including, but not necessarily limited to, code compliance, permits, inspections, testing, and health, safety, fire, pollution and environmental compliances. Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations," ANSI AlO Series and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." a. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services," prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. b. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). B. Definitions UI500DM-GRM SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page2 l . Cold Weather Protection is defined as all heating required during construction period prior to enclosure of the buildings. 2 . Tempormy Heat is defined as all heatin g required after enclosure of the buildings o r fl oors. A building or fl oor is closed in when it is roofed and such p rotection at doorways, windows, and other openings as will prov ide a reasonable heat retent ion is provided. Usc of permanent equipment is subject to provisions of Division I 5. C. Temporary Utilities I. Engage the appropria te local utility company to install temporary service o r connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with ma lching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A . Scheduled Uses 1. Provide temporary facilities and services at the time first needed at the site; and maintain, expand and modify the facilities as needed throughout the construction period and do not remove until no longer needed. At the earliest feasible time. and when acceptable to the owner, change over from the use of temporary utility service to permanent service. B. Temporary Usc of Permanent Facilities 1. Regardless of assigned responsibility for initial installation of a temporary facility, the primary Installer of the corresponding permanent facility shall assume responsibil ity for its operation, maintenance and protection during use as a temporary facility prior to the Owner's acceptance and assumed operation of the facility . C. Conditions of Use 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance . Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not aUow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nu isances to develop or persist on the site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2. I MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Provide either new or used materials and equipment for temporary fac i l ities, which arc in substantially undamaged and serviceable condition. Provide types and qualities which arc recognized in the construction industry as suitable for the intended usc in each application. I ISOOOM.(jRM 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 [J u 0 0 0 0 0 [J 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 1 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page 3 Comply with the requirements of Section 06100 for temporary facilities using carpentry materials. PART 3 w EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Usc qualified workers for the installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately, and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Locate field offices for easy access to and observation of the construction work. 3.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES BY CONTRACTOR A. Usc of Site I. The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to the work areas indicated, so as to allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. 2. Confine operation to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 3. Contractor must maintain the North road open at all times for access by the fire department. B. Field Offices 1. Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings. C. Storage and Fabrication Facilities; (For work not subcontracted) I. Install individual trailers or sheds as required to accommodate the work; sized, furnished and equipped properly including temporary utilities as needed. D. Sanitary Facilities 1. Comply with governing regulation including safety and health codes for the type number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities, but provide not less than the specified requirements. Install sanitary facilities in available locations which will best serve the needs of personnel at the project site. a. Provide temporary toilets as required. b. Supply and maintain toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials as appropriate for each sanitary facility, and provide OI51Ml DM-CiRM SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILlTIES Page4 appropriate waste paper containers for used materials. 2 . Drink ing Water: Supply drinking water for construction personnel by drinking fountains connec,ed to water system o r by containerized tap-dispensers with paper cups . E. Project Iden tification and Temporary Signs I . Prepare project identification sign(s) at location(s) indicated or as directed. Support and install signs on suitable posts and fram ing of treated wood or ste el . Maintain signs throughout the construction period. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs, 2 . Project Jdentification Sign(s): Engage an experienced sign painter to apply the requ ired g ra phics, in a neat and professional manner. a. Provide project identification sign of 32 sq. ft . area, colors and lettering as later detailed, indicating name ofProject, Owner, Owner's Rep, Architect, Architect's Consultants and Contractor. F. Temporary Telephones I. Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities throughout the construction period. Pay for services except for toll calls which will be paid for by party making such calls. 2 . Include as part of the telephone system a telephone a nswering machine, a separate voice-data telephone line and a facsimile machine with adequate paper supply. G. Temporary Power 1. Where utili ty service in currently in place, the Owner will pay the cost of energy used. H. Thermometer 1. Install an official project outdoor thermometer, in a shaded-from-the-sun, conveniently readable location, which will give reasonable accurate readings of the actual temperatures, and which can be reached easily for resetting. Instrument: Re-settable type indicating daily maximum and minimum temperatures. Keep a permanent daily log of those readings. 1. Walks J. 01$0(1 DM.VRM 1 . Install and maintain temporary walkways around th e construction work and to offices, toilets and simil ar places at the site. Temporary Enclosure 0 n 0 0 n 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 D u [] 0 J n 0 0 0 D 0 u 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 1 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page 5 I. Provide temporary enclosure for protection of construction in progress and completed from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and similar activities. 2. Provide temporary enclosure wherever temporary heat is needed and permanent building enclosure is not yet completed nor adequate for the containment of temporary heat. 3. Coordinate temporary enclosures with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and deleterious effects. 4. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load- bearing wood-framed construction. K. Not Used L. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: I. Comply with standards and code requirements for the erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. Provide sidewalk/public right of way protection as required by Code. M. Enclosure Fence I. When excavating begins, install an enclosure fence with locked entrance gates. 2. Locate to enclose that portion of the site determined by the Contractor to be sufficient to accommodate his construction operations. Provide open mesh galvanized fencing as acceptable to Architect, 6 ft. height. N. Heating During Construction OUOOPM.ORM 1. Cold Weather Protection: Provide such heat and fuel, heating units, equipment as necessary to protect the work from damage due to cold. Maintain equipment and surroundings in a clean, safe condition. 2. Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or clements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. 3. Provide temporary heat as necessary to heat enclosed spaces to the SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page6 temperatures described below: a . Except as otherwise specified, maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees and a maximum temperature of 78 degrees. At all times during the placing, setting and curing of plaster, drywall and ceramic tile, provide sufficient heat to produce a uniform temperature in the spaces involved of not less than 55 degrees. Before, during and through the placing of wood finish and the application of other interior finishing, varnishing, paint ing, etc., and until final acceptance of the work, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 60 degrees. b. Jnclude power and operating cos ts. 0 . Heating Facilities 1. Except where use of the permanent system is authorized, provide vent ed self- containcd LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. a . Usc of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type heating units is prohibited. 2. Ventilation: Provide such temporary ventilation as may be required to prevent hazardous accumulation of fumes, remote excess humidity, ventilate sanitary facilities and storage spaces for volatile and hazardous materials. P. Miscellaneous Facilities 1. Provide ladders, ramps, temporary stairs, for access to all levels of the construction for general access by all trades . Individual contractors and subcontractors will furnish their own stepladders, scaffolds, staging, work platforms and other facilities for usc of their workers and as necessary to the expeditious completion of their work. Provide waste chutes as required by applicable laws and regulations. Q. Temporary Fire Protection OI$1XI bM -<l RM I . Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers", and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations." a . Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell . b. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. c. Maintain unobstructed access to fire e xtinguishers, fire hydrants, [j 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 f1 0 0 [1 0 D 0 [] 0 J II 0 0 0 0 0 0 rl D 0 0 a D 0 J 0 0 0 D n SECTJON 01500 TEMPORARY FACJLITIES Page 7 temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas. d. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. R. Protection of Work 1. The Contractor shall obtain the advice and recommendations of his installers for procedures to protect their work. Installers are responsible for protecting their work and that of other trades while working at the job site or in an area thereof. When the installer is no longer working in the area or at the job, the Contractor shall provide protective measures and materials to assure that each clement will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering for exterior exposed materials) throughout the remainder of the construction period up to the date of substantial completion final acceptance. Remove protective coverings and materials at the appropriate time but no later than final cleaning operations. 2. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage. 3. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, on lawn and landscaped areas. 4. Always protect excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers. Provide pumps, equipment, enclosures, to provide this protection. S. Security I. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism and theft. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 2. Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrance to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. a. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or are attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. T. Environmental Protection OI~IIIM·GRM 1. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and SECTION 0 1500 TEMPORARY F ACILlTIES Page 8 3.3 minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesireable effects ,might result. A void use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict usc of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. TEMPORARY FACILITIES BY APPROPRJATE SUBCONTRACTOR A. Water Service (by Mechanical) I. Where water service is currently in place, the Owner will pay the cost of water used. B . Temporary Fire Protection (by Mechanical for standpipes, sprinklers) l. During construction provide temporary standpipes and other fire protection as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain in operating condition until permanent systems arc in working order. 2. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible days in each area of the Project, complete the installation including connected services and place into operation and usc. Instruct key personnel on usc of facilities. C. Hcac and Ventilation I. Where permanent systems arc used for temporary heat and ventilation, Mechanical Installer shall maintain equipment, clean, adjust, put in new condition before building occupancy as specified in Division 15 . D. Light and Power (by Electrical) 1. Provide a weatherproof, grounded, electric power distribution system of sufficient size, capacity and power characteristics to accommodate all activities during construction period. Include transformers, overload protected disconnects , automatic ground fault interrupters and main distribution switch gear. 2. Extend from temporary service point and meter provided by Contractor. 3. Provide the following services: a . Sufficient 220v outlets for special tools, welding equipment and similar devices requiring such service at locations where required. b. Sufficient circuits and duplex 120v single phase outlets so located that any part of the work can be reached with a 75ft. extension cord to accommodate normal power tools and supplemental lighting. c. Temporary light to levels and as required by governing regulation but not 'fii~HO llM.(iRI\4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J [1 0 0 [] 0 [! 0 0 0 [I r 1 0 0 0 0 0 a 0' 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 J D .l SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page9 3.4 3.5 less then minimum 5 footcandle illumination in all areas accessible to workers during hours they are at the job; minimum I 0 footcandles for shop areas; 20 footcandles or more where detailed or finishing work is being done, supplemented as may be required. d. Provide additional exterior and interior lighting as required for warning, public safety, and project security. 4. Contractor and each Subcontractor furnishes his own extension cords for power as required by him. Electric Utility power charges will be paid by Contractor. 5. Where permanent light fixtures have been used for temporary lighting, supply temporary lamps and replace with new lamps at time of Substantial Completion. FACILITIES BY SUBCONTRACTORS REQUIRING THEM A. Storage and Fabrication Facilities 1. Install individual trailers or sheds as required to accommodate the work, sized, furnished and equipped properly including temporary utilities as needed. 2. Sizes, quantities and locations arc under control of the Contractor. 3. Spaces within the building may be used when approved by the Contractor, provided permanent construction clements are adequately protected. B. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights 1. Comply with standards and code requirements for the erection of structurally adequate barricades. 2. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. C. Cold Weather Protection 1. Provide such heat and fuel, heating units, equipment as necessary to protect the work from damage due to cold. Maintain equipment and surroundings in a clean, safe condition. OPERATIONS AND TERMINATION A. Supervision I. Enforce strict discipline in the use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. 01500 BM.ORM SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Page 10 B. Janitorial Services 1. Provide daily janitorial services for temporary offices, t oilets, and simil ar areas at the project site. Require users of other temporary facilities to maintain clean and orderly premises. C . Maintenance 1. Installing entity shall maintain temporary facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and simi lar clements. a . Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. b. Prevent water filled piping from freezing . Mainta in markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operation. D. Tennination and Removal 1. At the time the need has ended for each temporary facility, or when it has been replaced by authorized use of a pennancnt facility, or at the time of Substantial Completion, promptly remove the facility unless requested by the Architect to be retained for a longer period of time. 2. Complete or, if necessary, restore pennancnt construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged work , clean exposed surfaces and replace construction which cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities arc the property of the installing entity. END OF SECTION OISUODM-GIIM 0 0 n 0 n ~] D [l [1 r1 0 [J 0 0 0 0 0 [J f I 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 tl SECTION OI630 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Direct reference in the specification to any article, device, product, materials fixture, form or type of construction, etc. by name, make or catalog number, with or without the words"or approved equal", shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competitions and the Contractor in such cases may, at his option, use any article, device, product, materials, fixtures, form or type of construction, which in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equivalent to that named. If the Contractor elects to utilize any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction other than those defined in the contract documents, the Contractor shall list such substitutions as deduct alternates on submitted Bid Form for Owner evaluation after bid opening. In addition, the Contractor shall provide complete technical data and laboratory reports, if applicable, on the proposed substitution. No substitutions will be reviewed prior to bid opening. 1.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any Manufacturer. B. For products names by naming several products or Manufacturers, select any product and Manufacturer named. Requesting party must submit request as provided herein for any product no specifically named. 1.03 WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES) A. Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on the work arc in several categories, including those of General Conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to) the following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of divisions 2 through 16 of these specifications: Special Project Warranty (Guarantee): A warranty specifically written and signed by Contractor for a defined portion of the work; and, where required, countersigned by subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor. Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by contract documents, to be provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the work; regardless of whether manufacturer has published warranty without regard for specific incorporation of product into the work, or has written and executed a special project warranty as a direct result of contract document requirements. Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty which is not specifically required by contract documents (other than as specified in this Section); but which is available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of product has published warranty in connection witb purchases and uses of product without regard for speci fi c applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty. B . Refer to individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for the determination of units of work which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and tenns of those warranties (or guarantees). C. General Limitations: It is recognized that specific warranties arc intended primarily to protect Owner against failure of the work to pcrfonn as required, and against deficient, defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources. Except as otherwise indicated, specific warranties do not cover failures in the work which result from : I) Unusual and abnormal phenomena of the clements, 2) The Owner's misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of the work, 3) Vandalism after time of substantial completion, or 4) Insurrection or acts of aggression including war. D. Related Damages and Losses: Jn connect ion with contractor's correction of warranted work which has failed, remove and replace other work of project which has been damaged as a result of such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. Consequential Damages: Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, special project warranties and product warranties are not extended to cover damage to building contents (other than work of Contract) which occurs as a result of failure of warranted work. E. Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered by a special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement for the following time period, starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work. A period of time equal to original warranty period of time. F. Replacement Cost, Obligations: Except as otherwise indicated, costs of replacing or restoring failing warranted units or products is Contractor's obligation, wit hout regard for whether Owner had already benefited from usc through a portion of ant ic ipated useful service lives. G. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right, at time of substantial completion or thereafter, to reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor, which in opinion of Owner tend to detract from or co nfuse interpretation of requirements of contract documents. H. Contractor's Procurement Obligation: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or sub-subcontract for materials or units of work for project where a special project warranty, specified product warranty, certification or similar commitment is required, until it has been determined that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1. Specific Warranty Fonns: Where a special project warranty (guarantee) or specified product warranty is required, prepare a written document to contain tcnns and 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 n 0 0 [J n D 0 u 0 [} u n n D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 D u 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 appropriate identification, ready for execution by required parties. Submit draft to Owner (through Architect/Engineer) for approval prior to final executions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCES A. General: The compliance requirements, for individual products as indicated in contract documents, arc multiple in nature and may include generic, descriptive, proprietary, performance, prescriptive, compliance with standards, compliance with codes, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with. Also "allowances" and similar provisions of contract documents will have a bearing on the selection process. B. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products arc limited by contract document requirements, and governing regulations, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include, but arc not necessarily limited to, the following for various indicated methods of specifying: Single Product/Manufacturer Name: Provide product indicated, except advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding, where known that named product is not a feasible or acceptable selection. Two of More Product/Manufacturer Names: Provide one of the named products, at Contractor's option; but excluding products which do not comply with requirements. Do not provide or offer to provide an unnamed product, except where none of named products comply with requirements or are a feasible selection, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding. "Or Equal": Where named products in specifications test are accompanied by the term "or equal", or other language of similar effect, comply with those contract document provisions concerning "substitutions" for obtaining Architect's/Engineer's approval (or change order) to provide an unnamed product. "Named", except as otherwise indicated, is defined to mean manufacturer's name for product, as recorded in published product literature, of latest issue as of date of contract documents. Refer requests to use products of a later (or earlier) model to Architect/Engineer for acceptance before proceeding. Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where only compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation is required, selection from among products which comply with requirements including those standards, codes and regulations, is Contractor's option. Performance Requirements: provide products which comply with specific performances indicated, and which are recommended by manufacturer (in published product literature or by individual certification) for application indicated. Overall performance of a product is implied where product is specified with only certain specific performance requirements. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced in accordance with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients and components, and complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing, finish ing, testi ng and similar operations in manufacturing process. Visual Matching: Where matching of an established sample is required, final judgment of whether a product proposed by Contractor matches sample sat isfactorily is architect's judgment. Where no product within specified cost category is available, which matches sample satisfactorily and complies with requirements, comply with contract document provisions concerning, "substitutions" and "change orders" for selection of a matching product outside established cost category, or, of a product not complying with requirements. Visual Selection: except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirements include " ... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures .. " or words of similar effect, the selection of manufacturer and basic product (complying with requ irements) is Contractor's option, and subsequent selection of color, pattern and texture is Architect's selection. Where specified product requirements include " ... as selected from standard colors, patterns, textures available within the industry ... ",or words to that effect, selection of product (complying with requirements, and within established cost category) is Architect's selection, including designation of manufacturer where necessary to obtain desired color, pattern or texture. 2 .02 Substitution Request All Requests for Substitutions shall be forwarded to the Owner, Owners Representative and Architect for rev iew. The following Substitution Request Form shall be used. [J 0 0 0 0 IJ 0 0 0 0 D [I 0 D D [1 0 0 n 0 D Q, n 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D. 0 n j n 0 J n SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PROJECT: [name] TO: FROM: (Contractor) [arch i teet] [address] [city. CO zip] Attention: [name] CONTRACTOR AND SUPPLIER HEREBY REQUEST ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS AS A SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORD WITH PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM: Substitution request for: Specification Section No·-------------------------------------------------- Article(s) Paragraph(s) SUPPORTING DATA: Product data for proposed substitution in accord with contract requirements. Sample is attached ___ _ Sample will be sent if requested QUALITY COMPARISON: SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION Name, b rand: Catalog No.: Manufacturer: Variations: Maintenance Service Available: Yes No Where? Spare Parts Source: PREVIOUS INSTALLAT IONS: PROPOSED Attach list of minimum of 5 previous ins tallations giving following data regarding projects on which proposed substitution was used: Project #1: Address: Architect/Tel: Ownerffel: Date Installed: Dollar Value this work: $ __________________________________ __ D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D [1 u 0 0 0 r' I I D r] Project #2: ] Address: J Architect/Tel: J Ownerffel: 3 Date lnstaUed: 0 Do11ar Value this work: $ 0 Project #3: D Address: n Architect/Tel: u Ownerffel: g Date lnsta11ed: a Do11ar Value this work: J $ a Project #4: D Address: 1 Architect/Tel: J u n Owner/Tel : Date Installed : Dollar Value this work: $ ________________________________ __ Project #5 : Address: Architect/Tel : Owner/Tel : Date Installed : Dollar Value th is work: $ __________________________________ __ REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS: EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION: Proposed substitution affec ls other parts of Work: No Yes _(If yes, explain) D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [l 0 0 0 0 0 rl lJ D o. 0 n 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 'l 7 D 0 a 0 n b 0 D Q 0 0 D Substitution changes contract time: No Yes Add/Deduct days Substitution requires dimensional revision, redesign of structure or M&E Work: No Yes _ (If yes, attach complete data.) Saving or credit to Owner, if any, for accepting substitution: $. _______ . Extra cost to Owner, if any, for accepting substitution: $ CONTRACTOR'S/SUPPLIER'S STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. 1/wc have investigated the proposed substitution. 1/we: Believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as Stated above. Will provide same warranty as specified. Have included complete Cost data and implications of substitution. Will pay redesign and special Inspection costs caused by usc of this product Will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by substitution. Will coordinate incorporation of proposed substitution in Work. Will modify other parts of Work as may be needed, to make all parts of Work Complete and functioning. Waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by substitution. Supplier:---------------------- Date:--------------------- By: General Contractor: ---------------------------------------- Date: ---------------------- By:==--== Position: -------------------------------------- Comments ------------------------------------ II [ l r L r 0 r L: 0 0 0 G [j 0 0 [l (j r' tJ NOI.L::l'3S :10 CN3 0 0 0 0 D D D D SECTION OI700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART I -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Schedule of Values: Section 01310 Schedule of Values B. Cleaning: Section 01710 Cleaning C. Closeout Submittals Required ofTrades: The respective sections of specifications. D 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 0 D D D 0 0 0 D 0 D D n A. B. c. D. E. The following procedures shall apply at the conclusion of Project. Contractor: I. Submit written certification to Architect that project, or designated portion of project, is substantially complete. 2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected. Architect will make an inspection within seven days after receipt of certification, together with Owner's Representative. Should Architect consider that Work is substantially complete: J. 2. 3 Architect shall prepare, and submit to Contractor, a list of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the inspection. Architect will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, AlA G704, complete with signature of Owner and Contractor, accompanied by Architect's list of items to be completed or corrected. Owner occupancy of Project of Designated Portion of Project: a. Contractor shall: ( l) Obtain certificate of occupancy. (2) Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 017 I 0 Cleaning. b. Owner will occupy Project, under provisions stated in Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction within designated time. Should Architect consider that Work is not substantially complete: 1.03 1.04 1.05 I. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating re asons. 2. Contractor: Complete Work, and send second written notice to Architect certifying that Project, or designated portion of Project , is substantially complete. 3. Architect will re-inspect Work. FINAL INSPECTION A . The following procedures shall apply at the conclusion of the Project. B. Contractor shall submit written certification that: c . D. E. 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Doc uments. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in p resence of Owner's Representative and arc operational. 5 Project is completed and read y for final inspection. Architect will make final inspection within seven days after receipt of certificat ion. Should Architect consider that Work is finally complete in accordance w ith requirements of Contract Documents, he shall request Contractor to make Project Closeout s ub mittals. Should Architect consider that Work is not finally complete: 1. He shall notify Contractor, in writing, state reasons. 2. 3. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second written notice to A rchitect certifying that Work is complete. Architect will reinspect Work. RE-INSPECTION COSTS A. Should Architect be requ ired to pcrfonn inspections in addition to those specified above because of failure of Work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect for additional services, and deduct amount paid fro m fin a l payment to Contractor. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A . Submit the following to the Architect before Final Payment Request: l. Project Record Documents: See Article 1.08, th is section. 0 0 0 0 D D D 0 D 0 0 D D 0 0 D 0 0 n 0 0 0 D D D D D 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 n 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Article I .06, this section. Evidence ofPayments and Release of Liens: The Contractor is required to submit the following before his final Application for Payment: a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: AlA G706 b. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AlA G706A, with: (I) Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AlA G707 (2) Contractor's release or waiver of liens. (3) Separate releases of waivers ofliens for subcontractors, subcontractor, suppliers and others with lien rights, against property of Owner, together with list of those parties. Warranties: As specified in individual sections. Maintenance Materials and Spare Parts: In lieu of delivery to the Architect, submit receipt indicating maintenance materials and spare parts have been turned over to the Owner's Representative. Keys: Submit receipt indicating all required keys have been turned over to the Owner's Representative. Miscellaneous Keys, Switches, and Wrenches: At the completion of the project, all loose keys for hose bibs, adjustment keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware, keys for electrical switches, electrical panes, etc., shall be accounted for and turned over to the General Contractor for transmittal to Owner. Submit receipts indicating receipt by Owner's Representative. Inspection Certificates: The General Contractor and/or each Subcontractor shall, upon completion of the work, secure in triplicate certificates from any state of local governing bodies having jurisdiction indicating that the work is in strict accordance with the applicable codes and deliver same to the Architect. Certificate of Occupancy: Deliver Certificate of Occupancy to Owner. 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Mechanical -By Mechanical Contractor I. Prepare a maintenance manual for the complete system in accordance with the following outline: a. Alphabetical list of components of system, with the company who installed each component and the company responsible for servicing it. Include name, address, and a 24-hour telephone number. b. Operating instructions for complete system with sequence of operation for cold start, normal operating shutdown for short period, shutdown for long period, and temperature control. c. Maintenance instructions with schedule offrequency oflubrication, cleaning, adjustment, replacement, etc. d. Complete manufacturer's data on each device, including installation instructions and specifications arranged alphabetically. 1.07 1.08 B. 2. 3. e. Blueprints of complete wiring and control wiring and/or piping diagrams, with schematic operational d iagram for each system. Submit o ne copy of the maintenance manual to the Architect for approval, and then re-submit three corrected and bound copies to the Architect for the Owner. The above procedure shall be done at the conclusion of construction. Electrical -By electrical Contractor I . Submit three hard-bound sets of instructions and material lists for the following: a. Lighting fixtures catalog data identified by drawing type and lamps supplied for respective fixtures. b . Fire alarm system. 2 . The operating and maintenance manual will contain the following : 3. a . Complete parts list b. Complete information as to whom the Owner will contact for service and parts. Include name, address and 24-hour telephone number. c . Evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repai r parts for the above items and systems and that the organization is available for service. Deliver to the General Contractor for transmittal to the Architect immediately after co mp letion of electrical work. 4 . The above procedure shall be done at the conclusion of construction. DEMONSTRATIONS A . Mechanical Systems -By Mechanical Contractor Instruct the Owner, at a time to be designated by the Architect, in tbe proper operation and maintenance of sys tem, using the maintenance manual as a guide. This shall be done at the conclusion of construction. B . Electrical System -By Electrical Contractor Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Architect, demonstrate to the Owner the operation of the entire electrical ins tallation, inc luding any and all special systems provided under this contract. This shall be done at the conclusion of construction. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A . Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, in an organized fili ng system, one record copy of the following : I . Drawings 2. Specification 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 D 0 0 0 B. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c. D D. 0 0 n 3. Addenda 4. Reviewed shop drawings 5. Change orders 6. Other modifications to Contract 7. Field test records Do not usc record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document". Mark all information with contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. Record following on drawings: I. Depth of foundation clements. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. Record following information on specifications: 1. 2. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. Change by change order of field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified. Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect with transmittal letter containing date, project title and number, contractor's name and address, titled and number of each record document, and certification that each document is complete and accurate. Digital AsBuilts: After marked up drawings are reviewed by the Architect, he will provide the Contractor with AutoCad digital file of all drawings. The Contractor shall then obtain a draftsman to transfer all changes as shown on the marked up drawings to digital drawing files. After changes are made, marked up drawings a nd digital files of a ll d rnwings shall be delivered to the Architect. 1.09 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS J.J O A. Submit final statement f account to Architect at conclusion of entire project. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments. I. Original Contract Sum 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders b . Unit Prices c. Other Adjustments d . Deductions for Un-corrected Work c . Deductions for Re-inspection Payments 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted 4. Previous payments 5. Sum remaining due C . Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum no' prev iously made by Change Order. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit fina l applicat io n in accordance w it h requirements of General a nd Supplementary Conditions. 1.11 FINAL CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT A . Architect will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of General Conditions. B. Should final completion be materially delayed through no fault of Contractor, Architect may issue a Semi-Final Certificate for Payment in accordance with provisions of General Conditions. 1.1 2 POST-CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION A . Prior to expiration of one year from Dates of Su bstantial Completion, Arch itect wilt make v isual inspection of Project in company with Owner a nd Contractor to determine whether correction of Work is required , in accordance wi th prov ision of General Condi t ions. B. For guaran tees beyond one y ear, Architect will make inspe ctions at request of Owner, after notification to Contractor. C. Architect will promptly notify Contractor, in wri ti ng, or a ny observed deficiencie s. E ND OF SECTION 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 u D 0 0 n 0 D D 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 01710 CLEANING 1.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Each Contractor shall keep the building and premises free from all surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of his work he shall remove all such surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish, as well as all his tools, equipment and scaffolding, and shall leave his work clean and spotless, unless more exact requirements arc specified. B. Each Contractor shall perform his cleanup daily and shall transport his rubbish to an on-site location designated by the General Contractor who will arrange for its removal. C. Masonry cleaning is the responsibility of the masonry Contractor and is specified under the masonry Section of the Specifications. 1.02 CLEANERS A. With the exception of cleanup of the site and cleaning specifically assigned to Contractors under various sections of the Specifications, all final cleanup of exterior and interior of the building shall be done by professional cleaners. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Divisions 2 through I6. General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General Conditions and as temporary services in "Temporary Facilities" section of this Division. Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit or work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required: Remove labels which arc not required as permanent labels. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator equipment and similar equipment; remove excess lubrication and other substances. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free o f stains including those resulting from water exposure. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. Clean projec t site (yard and grounds), including landscape, development areas. of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petro- chemicals spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither pl a nte d nor paved, to a smooth, even-textured surface. B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect/Engineer, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously competed work during remainder of construction period. C . Compliances: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not bum waste materials at site, or bury debris or excess materia ls on Owner's property, or d ischarge volat ile or other harmful or dangerous materials into d rainage systems; remove waste material fro m s ite and dispose of in a lawful manner. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become Owner's property, d ispose of these at Owner's best advantage as directed . END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 n SECTION 02010 SUB SURF ACE EXPLORATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division ]-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 A. Section Includes: 1. Infonnation regarding soil investigation for the project. B. Related Sections 1. Earthwork: Section 02200 2. Trenching, excavation and backfilling for pipelines: Section 02221 Excavation and backfill for structures: Section 02222 Aggregate base course: Section 02232 Asphalt paving: Section 02513 Concrete: Section 03001 EXAMINE SlTE A. The Contractor shall retain a licensed Soi1s Engineer to inspect the existing soil conditions after excavation has occurred and back fill operations. The Soils Engineer shall verify in writing that the soil capacity is at or greater than the assumed foundation design. Refer to Structural Notes for specific requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not applicable) END OF SECTION 0 D 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 SCOPE A. Work to be performed under this section shall include all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous items necessary to perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work not specified elsewhere, as shown on the Drawings and required by the Specifications. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 0220 1 -Trenching, Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities 1. Underground utilities, except service lines, known to the Engineer have been shown on the Drawings. Locations are approximate only and may prove to be inaccurate. The Contractor is responsible for verification of the existence, location and protection of all utilities within the construction limits. 2. Before commencing with work, the Contractor shall notify all public and private companies who may have utilities within the project limits. The Contractor shall coordinate with these entities all excavation performed. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required by utility owners. 3. In the event of damage to any existing utility, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the repair and payment for repair of all such damage. 4. The Contractor shall make arrangements for and pay all costs for relocation of utilities requiring relocation as indicated on the Drawings. Should utility obstructions, not shown on the Drawings, be encountered and require relocation, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Engineer and shall make arrangements necessary for such relocation. The Owner shall pay the costs for such relocation. B. Existing Improvements 1. The Contractor shall restore or protect from damage all existing improvements encountered in performance of the work. Improvements damaged as a result of this work shall be restored to original condition or onnPM.C.RM SECTION 02222 Page 2 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES 1.5 better, as detennined by the Engineer. 2. Adjacent property shall be protected by the Contractor from any damage. The contractor shall be held solely liable for any damage to adjacent property and shall be respons ible for all costs resul ting from repair of such damage. C . Soil Conditions 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine soil conditions and characteristics, incJuding the presence of groundwater, that will be encountered within the limit of construction. PROTECTION OF WORK A. Safety I. All excavations shall be protected by barricades, lights. signs, etc. as required by governing federal , state and local safety codes and regulations. B. Sheeting, Shoring, and Bracing I . Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope, provide and maintai n sheeting, shoring and bracing systems necessary to protect adjoining grades and structures from caving, sliding, erosion or other damage, and suitable fonns of protection against bodily injury., all in accordance with applicable codes and governing authorities. 2. Remove sheeting and shoring systems as excavations are backfilled in a manner to protect the construction or other structures, utilities or property. Do not remove any sheeting after backfilling. 3. Sheeting and shoring systems shall be structurally designed and sufficiently braced to provide necessary restraining of retained backfill. Prior to installation of such systems, methods of installation and materials proposed shall be discussed with and approved by Engineer. All systems shall be in strict compliance with local, state and federal safety regulations. Contractor is solely liable for non-compli ance. 11!222 DM-GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u u 0 0 0 0 [J 0 0 D II 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 n SECTION 02222 Page 3 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES C. Site Drainage I. Excavation to be protected from surface water drainage at all times. 1.6 BLASTING A. No blasting shall be permitted without written consent of the Engineer. Blasting shall be done only after Engineer receives permission from the appropriate governmental authority(ies). Blasting shall be performed only by properly licensed, experienced individuals and in a manner such that no damage to any property or persons will occur due to either the blast or debris. B. Contractor shall provide proof of insurance as required by these Specifications, the governing authority or as required by Engineer prior to any blasting. All damage as the result of blasting shall be repaired, at the Contractor's expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All earth or rock loosened by blasting shall be removed from excavations prior to proposed construction. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION IN STREETS When construction operations are located within streets, make provisions at cross streets and walks for free passage of vehicles and pedestrians. Do not block streets or walks without prior approval. PART 2 -MATERIALS All materials for construction fills and backfills shall meet specified requirements for gradation and other factors defining suitability for the intended use. All classes of suitable material shall be free from perishable matter, debris, frozen material and stones and/or cemented pieces larger than permitted by the specified gradation. Classification of materials shall be as follows: 2.1 2.2 EXCAVATION Excavation shaH consist ofthe excavation of all materials of whatever character required for the Work, obtained within the right-of-way, including surface boulders and excavation for ditches and channels and not being removed under some other item. MATERIALS FOR EMBANKMENT A. Embankment material shall consist of approved material acquired from excavation, hauled and placed in embankments in reasonably close UlnlDM-CiRM SECTION 02222 Page 4 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES conformity with the line, grades, thicknesses and typical cross sections shown on the plans or as designated . B. When source of embankment material is not designated on the plans, approval of the source will be contingent on the material having a resistance value of at least that shown on the plans, when tested by the Hveem Stabilometer, and a maximum dry density of not less than 90 pounds per cubic foot. 2.3 TOPSOIL Topsoil shall consist of selectively excavated, loose, friable loam reasonably free of admixtures of sub-soil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, brush, weeds or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development of vegetative growth; topsoil to be free of any stone or rock greater than 3" in size. PART 3-METHODS AND PROCEDURES 3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 3.2 The excavation and embankments required shall be finished to smooth and uniform surfaces. Materials shall not be wasted without permission of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to change grade lines, cut slopes or fill lines during the progress of the work. EXCAVATION Material outside of the limits of excavation will not be disturbed. Prior to beginning excavation operations in any area, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been performed in accordance with these Specifications, The Contractor shall not excavate beyond the dimensions and elevations established. Common excavation shall include all materials of whatever nature encountered in the work for construction of excavations to the lines and graded called for on the Drawings. Structure excavation shall include all earthwork required for the construction of structures to the lines and graded called for on the Drawings. If any areas are inadvertently over-excavated, fill such over- excavation with embankment material and compact in accordance with Section 3.5 0222211MaJ.t ( ' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 u il 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 n SECTION 02222 Page 5 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES A. Tolerances 1. In those areas upon which a subbase material is required, or upon which a structure is to be constructed directly, deviation of not more than 1 inch shall be permitted when tested with a 16-foot straight edge. Deviation from grade shall not exceed 1 inch at any point. 2. In those areas upon which a base course material is required, deviation of not more than 0.04 foot shall be permitted when tested with a 16-foot straight edge. Deviation from grade shall not exceed 0.04 foot at any point. 3. In those areas where no additional construction, other than topsoil addition, will occur, the finished surface shall be smooth and shall not deviate from grade by more than 0.5 foot at any point. B. Groundwater Control I. Contractor to maintain facilities on site to remove all groundwater from excavated area and keep water below the bottom of the excavation to such a point such that a firm base for equipment or concrete installation exists. Facilities shall be maintained until all backfilling is in place at least 24 inches above anticipated water levels before water removal. All water removal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. 2. Removal of water by bucketing, sump or trench diversions, intermittent pumping, or sump or submersible pumps is considered incidental to excavation work. Inclusion of a bid item for dewatering indicates dewatering by continuous pumping, well-point type systems is expected. If such dewatering system is required, in the opinion of the Engineer, this work to be paid for as indicated in the bid schedule, or if not included in the bid schedule to be considered extra work paid for at a price negotiated between Contractor and Owner prior to the start of dewatering. C. Stockpile Excavated Material 02~22 IIM-GRM 1. Excavated material to be stockpiled so as not to endanger the work or public safety. Maintain existing vehicular and pedestrian traffic with minimum disruption. Maintain emergency access and access to existing fire hydrants and water valves. Maintain natural drainage courses and street gutters. 2. Backfill material to be segregated from stockpiled topsoil and unusable backfill materials. SECTION 02222 Page 6 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES D . Over-excavation 1. Whenever the site is over-excavated more than 0 .1' to eliminate point bearing by rocks or stones beneath proposed structures or when grade tolerances are exceeded, the Contractor is to re-establish grade using Class 1 Backfill (CDOH Section 703 .08-Class 1). Compaction shall be 95% maximum density. All work to re-establish grade shall be at the Contractor's expense. E. Unstable Materials 1. Materials which are not capable of supporting superimposed loadings are defined as unstable materials. Should unstable materials be encountered during excavation, immediately notify Engineer. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, unstable soil excavation is required and the Contractor could not have reasonably been expected to discov e r the existence of such materials during his site investigation, then a contract price for Unstable Soil Excavation shall be negotiated between Owner and Contractor. No payment shall be made for materials excavated prior to notification of the Engineer and negotiation of payment for extra work. 2 . lnclusion of a bid item for Unstable Soil Excavation indicates such excavation is antici pated. The Contractor is to notify the Engineer prior to any unstable soil excavation; no payment shall be made for materials excavated prior to authorization of Engineer. F. Rock Excavation 022220M.(;RM I . Rock excavation shall be defined as removal of boulders in excess of three (3) cubic yards or solid or fractured rock, which requires techniques, such as blasting or jacking for removal, other than those which are being employed by the Contractor or arc normally used in excavation, such as use ofbackhoes, trenchers, draglines, etc . Should unanticipated rock conditions be encountered, immediately notify the Engineer. If in the opinion of the Engineer, rock excavation is required and the Contractor had in fact made a diligent and determined effort to remove the material using normal excavation procedures as stated above and the Contractor could not have reasonably been expected to determine the existence of such material during his site investigation, then a contract price for Rock Excavation shall be negotiated between the Contractor and the Owner. No payment shall be made for excavation performed prior to determination of a negotiated price. 2 . Rock shall be removed to a 4 11 depth below grade. In addition, all rock loosened during j a ck ing, blasting, etc. shall be removed from the site. For payment purposes, maximum depth to be paid for shall be 12" below 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [] n I I 0 0 D 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 l SECTION 02222 Page 7 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES 3.4 required grade. All over-excavation shall be replaced as specified in Subsection 3.3, D. 3. Inclusion of a bid item for Rock Excavation indicates such excavation is anticipated. Contractor to notify Engineer prior to any rock excavation; no payment shall be made for excavation prior to notification. G. Disposal of Excess Excavation I. Contractor to dispose off excess excavation off-site. The Owner shall have the right to elect to have the excess excavation disposed of at a designated site within the Work limits. Excavation may be wasted on site only if approved by the Engineer and shall be done at the direction of the Engineer. Disposal in any case shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. H. All floor slabs shall be placed on at least three feet of compacted, non- expansive fill. See soils report prepared by Geotechnical Engineer I. A minimum four inch (4") layer of free draining gravel shall be placed beneath slabs. See soils report for materials specifications. J. Foundation walls and retaining structures shall be backfill with import granular soils and shall be placed to within two feet (2') of the ground surface and to a minimum distance beyond the walls at one-half the height of the wall. The upper two feet of the wall backfill should be an impervious soil of a pavement structure to prevent surface water infiltration into the backfill. K. All fill material used inside building limits and within 1.5 feet of pavement grade shall be a non-expansive soil. See soils report. EMBANKMENT AND BACKFILLING A. Do not begin embankments until construction below grade has been approved, underground utility systems have been inspected, tested and approved and trash and debris have been cleaned from the excavation. B. Place approved excavated material in successive uniform maximum loose layers not exceeding 8 inches for the full width of the cross-section in all accessible areas. Place material in successive uniform loose layers not exceeding 4 inches in areas not accessible or permitted for the use of self propelled rollers or vibrators. Do not place fill on muddy or frozen subgrade, or until subgrade is approved by the Engineer. C. Plow, step, or bench sloped surfaces steeper than 4 to 1 on which fill or backfill is to be placed in such a manner that fill material will adequately 0~~~~ DM-GRM SECTION 02222 Page 8 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES 3.5 bond with existing surfaces. Scarify all surfaces to receive backfill to a depth of 6" before filling. D. Construct fills and embankments to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings within tolerances stated in Section 3.3, A above . E. Use suitable materials removed from the excavation prior to obtaining material from borrow areas . F . Where otherwise suitable material is too wet, aerate, dry or blend to provide the moisture content specified for compaction. COMPACTION During placing and/or compacting operations of earth or earth-and-rock m ixtures, the moisture content of materials in the layers being compacted shall be near optimum and uniform throughout the layer. In general, mai ntain the moisture content of the material being placed and compacted within 2% of optimum condition as determined as ASTM Standard D698. A . Compaction Equipment 1. Perform all compaction with approved equipment wen suited to locat ion and material being compacted. Use heavy vibratory rollers or sheepsfoot rollers where heavy equipment is authorized. Do not operate heavy equipment closer to structures than a horizontal distance equal to height of backfill above bottom of structure foundat ion. Compact remaining area with hand tampers suitable for material being compacted. Place and compact backfill around pipes with care to avoid damage. 2. Compact fill materials to following densities at optimum moisture content based on ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99 : a. Structure fill under or within 5' horizontally of all concrete structures: 95%. b. Backfill beneath or within 5' horizontally or within the area defined by a line extended at an angle of I : 1 of existing or proposed pavements, roadways, sidewalks, curbs, utility lines or other improvements: 95%. c. Backfill with lagoon berm: 95%. d . Backfill within public or designated rights-of-way: 90% shown or as shown on the Drawings. e Backfill within undeveloped, green or undesignated area: 85%. B . Jetting 1. Jetting and water inundation are generally not permitted methods of 02222 DM·GRM 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 n II 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 02222 Page9 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES 3.6 3.7 compaction. The Engineer may allow jetting under certain field conditions. Techniques inc1uding depth of lifts, amount of water to be used, penetration of hose jet, etc., shall be at the direction ofthe Engineer. No jetting will be allowed on materials with a 200-minus gradation of greater than 15%. Contractor shall pay cost of all water used, soi1 classification testing and compaction testing and any retesting or recompaction required. No jetting shall be done prior to written approval and direction ofthe Engineer. C. Maintenance 1. Contractor to maintain all embankment in satisfactory condition during the extent of the contract and warranty period. All surface deterioration determined to be the responsibility of the Contractor and all settlement shall be repaired at once by the Contractor upon notice by the Owner. All costs for repair and all liability as a result of surface deterioration or settlement shall be the responsibi1ity of the Contractor. PROOF ROLLING Proof rolling with a heavy rubber-tired roller will be required as designated on the plans or when ordered. Proof rolling shaH be done after specified compaction has been obtained. Areas found to be weak and those areas which failed shall be ripped, scarified, wetted if necessary and recompacted to the requirements for density and moisture at the Contractor1s expense. Equipment to be used for proof rolling may also be fully loaded, tandem axle dump truck or water truck or rubber-tired ro1ler with equivalent loading characteristics. SURF ACE RESTORATION All existing surface improvements and site conditions disturbed or damaged during construction to be restored to a condition equal to pre-construction condition. All restoration costs are considered incidental to excavation and backfill. A. Improvements I. Replace, repair or reconstruct all improvements as required. Work will not be accepted until restoration is accepted by Engineer and all affected property owners. OlllliJM..(JRM SECTION 02222 Page 10 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES B. Final Grading I . The Contractor is to re-establish existing final grade or finish to final grades as modified and shown on the Drawings. The Contractor is to backfill to proper subgrade elevation with backfill material to allow placement of surface improvements or materials. C. Green Areas PART4 1. Place excavated topsoil from the roadway or from pits directly upon constructed cut and fill slopes without the use of stockpiles whenever conditions and the progress of construction will penn it. 2. Do not place topsoil until the areas to be covered have been properly prepared and grading operations in the area have been completed. 3 . Place and spread topsoil at locations and to the thickness shown on the plans. Key to the underlying material by the use of harrows, rollers or other equipment suitable for the purpose. 4. Apply water to the topsoil at the locations and in the amounts designated. Apply in a fine spray by nozzles or spray bars in such manner that it wiJI not wash or erode the topsoil areas . 5. All loose exposed rock larger than six inches shall be removed from slopes that are to receive topsoil. 4.0 QUALITY CONTROL -FIELD 4 .1 INSPECTION AND TESTING Inspection and testing to be perfonncd at the direction of the Engineer. Contractor to cooperate fuiJy with all persons engaged in testing . Contractor to excavate as required to allow tes ting; Contractor to backfill all test excavation in accordance with these Specifications. 4 .2 DENSITY TESTING AND CONTROL A . Reference Standards 02222 Oloi·GilM I. Density/moisture relat ionships to be developed for all soil types encountered according to ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J 0 0 0 0 [1 0 0 0 0 fl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 fl SECTION 02222 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT FOR STRUCTURES B. Field Testing 1. Testing for density during compaction operations to be done in accordance with ASTM 02922 using nuc1ear density methods. C. Frequency of Testing I. Frequency of testing to be done at the direction of the Engineer. D. Retesting Page II 1. In the event of failure to meet compaction criteria, Contractor shall re- excavate andre-backfill at direction of Engineer. All retesting to be paid for by Contractor and to be performed by soils testing firm approved by the Engineer. 4.3 PAYMENT FOR TESTING Owner responsible for all costs of initial testing ofbackfill. Contractor to pay all costs of any retesting required. END OF SECTION Ollll BM.GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Scope. Work to be performed under this section shall include all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous items necessary to perform all excavation, backfilling and compaction of underground pipelines, conduits, cables and appurtenances shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All work within the rights-of-way of the Federal Government of the Colorado Division of Highways, County Governments or Municipal Governments shall be done in compliance with requirements issued by those agencies. All such requirements shall take precedence over these Specifications. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to secure all required excavation permits and pay all costs thereof. Contractor will be required to obtain necessary road cut permits. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere. Section 02222-Embedment and Base Course Aggregate Section 02555-Water Transmission and Distribution Lines Section 02560-Sanitary Sewerlines 1.03 Field Conditions. A. Existing Utilities. Underground utilities, except service lines, known to the Engineer have been shown on the Drawings. Locations are approximate only and may prove to be inaccurate. The Contractor is responsible for verification of the existence, location and protection of all utilities within the construction area. Before commencing with work, the Contractor shall notify all public and private companies who may have utilities within the project limits. The Contractor shall coordinate with these entities all excavation performed. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required by utility owners. In the event of damage to any existing utility, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the repair and payment for repair of all such damage. The Contractor shall make arrangements for and pay all costs for relocation of utilities requiring relocation as indicated on the Drawings. Should utility obstructions, not shown on the Drawings, be encountered and require relocation, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Engineer and shall make arrangements necessary for such relocation. The Owner shall pay the costs for such relocation. B. Existing Improvements. The Contractor shall restore or protect from damage all existing improvements encountered in performance of the work. Improvements damaged, as a result of this work shall be restored to original condition or better, as determined by the Engineer. 02221-1 \\Fileservet\dpafs1\2006.05 Banlemenl Mesa ShaM and Co111 Renovation\Spec\Specifrcalions 1-21Hl7102221 -TRENCHING BACKFI~LING & COMPACTION.sld.doc 1.04 Adjacent property shall be protected by the Contractor from any damage. The Contractor shall be held solely liable for any damage to adjacent property and shall be respons ible for all costs resulting from repair of such damage. C. Soil Conditions. It shall be the responsibil ity of the Contractor to examine soil conditions and characteristics, including the p resence of groundwater that w ill be encountered within the limits of construction . Protection of Work. A. Safety. All excavation sha ll be protected by barricades, lights, signs, etc., as required by governing federal, state and local safety codes and regulations. B. Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing. Where trench walls are not excavated at a stable slope, the Contractor shall provide and maintain support sufficient to prevent caving, sliding or fa ilure and property or bodily damage. Any damage due to inadequate support shall be repaired at the sole expense of the Contractor. Under normal construction conditions, support shall be removed as work progresses . Support shall remain installed if directed by the Engineer or if pipe does not have sufficient strength to support backfill based on trench w idth as defined by the sheeting . Sheeting shall not be removed after the start of backfilling . Use of a movable trench shield or coffin box will not be allowed where pipe strength is insufficient to support backfill as defined by the trench width after the trench shield is removed . The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for any violation of applicable safety standards. Particular attention is called to minimum requirements of OSHA and COSH (Colorado Occupational Safety and Health). C. Site Drainage. Excavation to be protected from surface water at all times. At no time sha ll excavated area be allowed to fill with storm water runoff. Contractor sha11 provide proper, temporary drainage structures at their cost to detour runoff from excavated areas. 1.05 Blasting. No b lasting shall be permitted without written consent of the Engineer. Blasting shall be done only after Engineer receives permission from the appropriate governmental authority (ies). Blasting shall be performed only by properly licensed , experienced individuals and in a manner such that no damage to any property or persons will occur due to either the blast or debris . Contractor shall provide proof of insurance as required by these Specifications, the governing authority or as required by Engineer prior to any blasting. All damage as the result of blasting shall be repaired, at the Contractor's expense , to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All earth o r rock loosened by blasting shall be removed from excavations prior to proposed construction. 1.06 Construction in Streets. When construction operations are located within streets make provi sions at cross streets and walks for free passage of vehicles and pedestrians. Do not lock streets or walks without prior approval. 02221 -2 1\f~aserverldpafat\2006 05 Balllamenl Mesa Shea end Cora Renovation\Spec\Spec:i(oc:alions !.26-07\02221 ·TRENCHING, SACKFILUNG & COMPACT10fb1d.doc 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LJ u 0 0 0 [J D n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 0 n 1.07 Submittals. A. Bedding Material 1. Submit sieve analysis B. Select Fill 1. Submit sieve analysis 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 Embedment Material. Pipeline embedment material shall comply with the appropriate classes as listed below and as illustrated in the Construction Drawings: A. Class A-Use where improper trenching or unexpected trench conditions require its use as determined by the Engineer. B. 1. Characteristics -Concrete cradle foundation with densely compacted Class 6 aggregate base backfill to 12" above top of pipe, or densely compacted Class 6 aggregate granular foundation with concrete arch cover to 6" above top of pipe. Class B-Use for all PVC, DIP, CMP and concrete pipe under normal construction conditions. 1. Characteristics -Densely compacted Class 6 aggregate granular foundation of depth shown on Typical Details with densely compacted Class 6 aggregate 12" above top of pipe. ~" screened rock shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer. Contractor must notify engineer at time of bid that he would prefer to use~" screened, in writing. 2.02 Select Material. Subject to approval by the Engineer, select material shall be allowed in place of the aggregate backfill for Class B when excavation and soil conditions allow, but only if approved by Engineer. Contractors shall bid project based upon Class B. If Class A or select material is used, price adjustments shall be made. A. Characteristics -Soil materials free from rocks, clods, and organic material. 2.03 Concrete for Embedment. Shall be 2000 psi concrete (28-day compressive strength). 2.04 Backfill Material. A. Characteristics-Native materials free from debris, organic matter and frozen material. Uniformly graded sufficient to allow proper compaction. B. Gradation -No boulders greater than 6-inch diameter in top 12 inches of backfill. Generally no boulders greater than 12-inch diameter in remainder of trench. Limited number of boulders not exceeding 24-inch diameter to be allowed at discretion of Engineer provided boulders can be uniformly dispersed and will not interfere in 02221-3 1\F~esel'l&rldpalst\2006.05 BaUiamont Mesa Shell and Co"' Renava~an\Spec;\Spedlicatians 1·2EM1710222t ·TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION.sld.dac 3 .00 3 .01 3 .02 compactive effort. METHODS AND PROCEDURES Site Preparatio n . A. Clearing. Remove all vegetation, stumps, roots, organic matter, debris and other miscellaneous structures and materials from project site. Dispose of off site. B. Topsoil Removal. Strip existing topsoil from all areas to be disturbed by construction. Topsoil to be stockpiled separately from excavated materials. C. Pavement Removal. See Section 02101 -Removal of Structures and Obstructions . Trench Excavation. A. Limits of Excavation. Trenches to be excavated along lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as modified in the field by the Engineer. Trench widths for pipe load i ng to be measured 12 inches above top of pipe. 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 Minimum trench width to be the outside diameter of the pipe or conduit plus 16 o inches. B. c. D. Maximum trench width to be the outside diameter of the pipe or conduit plus 24 o inches for all pipes or conduits with outside diameter of 24 inches or less, and p lus 30 inches for all pipes or conduits with outside diameters greater than 24 inches. If maximum trench width is exceeded, Contractor wil l provide at his expense, higher 0 strength pipe or special bedding including concrete a& the direction of the Engineer. Trench excavation not to be completed more than 1 00 feet in advance of pipe o installation . Backfill to be completed within 100 feet of pipe installation. Groundwater Control. Contractor to maintain facilities on-site to remove all groundwater from trench and keep water at least 12 inches below the trench bottom to a point such that a firm base for pipe or conduit installation exists. Facilities shall be maintained until all concrete is cured and backfilling is in place at least 24 inches above anticipated water levels before water removal is discontinued; all water removal shall be subject to approval by the Engi neer. Stockpile Excavated Material. Excavated material to be stockpiled so as not to endanger the work or public safety. Maintain existing vehicula r and pedestrian traffic with minimum disruption. Maintain emergency access and access to existing fire hydrants and water valves . Maintain natural drainage courses and street gutters. Backfill material to be segregated from stockpiled topsoil and unusable backfill materials. Excavation for Appurtenances . Excavation to be done in accordance w ith these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. Adequate working c learances to be maintained around appurtenances. Provisions for base and bottom preparations 02221-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 \IF~esaMIIIdpal&112006 .05 BaWemenl Mesa Shel and Core Renova~on\Spec\Spedtlcations 1·26-C7\02221 • TRENCH:NG . BACKFILLING & COMPACTlON.sld.doc [) n J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 3.03 shall apply to all appurtenances. Precautions to be taken to maintain trench widths in the vicinity of adjacent pipelines and conduits. Bottom Preparation. A. B. C. D. E. F. Undisturbed Foundation. Where soils are suitable and have adequate strength, bottom to be graded and hand-shaped such that pipe barrel rests uniformly on undisturbed soil. All rocks or stones, which may result in a point bearing on the pipe, shall be removed. Undisturbed grades shall be within 0.1 feet± tolerance. Soils for final pipe grade placed within these limits shall be fine granular (100% passing No.4 sieve) or may be native materials, hand compacted to 95% maximum density. Bell Holes. Material to be removed to allow installation of all fitting and joint projections without affecting placement of pipe. Over-excavation. Whenever trench is over-excavated to eliminate point bearing by rocks or stones or when undisturbed grade tolerances of 0.1' are exceeded, the Contractor is to re-establish grade using Class 6 aggregate bedding material. Compaction shall be 95% maximum density. All work to re-establish grade shall be at the Contractor's expense. Unstable Materials. Materials incapable of supporting superimposed loadings are defined as unstable materials. Should unstable materials be encountered during excavation, immediately notify Engineer. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, unstable soil excavation is required and the Contractor could not have reasonably been expected to discover the existence of such materials during his site investigation, then a contract price for Unstable Soil Excavation shall be negotiated between Owner and Contractor. No payment shall be made for materials excavated prior to notification of the Engineer and negotiation of payment for extra work. Inclusion of a bid item for Unstable Soil Excavation indicates such excavation is anticipated. The Contractor is to notify the Engineer prior to any unstable soil excavation; no payment shall be made for excavation prior to authorization of Engineer. Rock Excavation. Rock excavation shall be defined as removal of boulders in excess of three (3) cubic yards of solid or fractured rock, which makes hand shaping of the bottom impossible and which requires techniques, such as blasting or jacking for removal, other than those which are being employed by the Contractor or are normally used in trench excavation, such as use of backhoes, trenchers, draglines, etc. Should unanticipated rock conditions be encountered, immediately notify the Engineer. If in the opinion of the Engineer, rock excavation is required and the Contractor has in fact made a diligent and determined effort to remove the material using normal excavation procedures as stated above, and the Contractor could not have reasonably been expected to determine the existence of such material during his site investigation, then a contract price for rock excavation shall be negotiated between the Contractor and the Owner. No payment shall be made for excavation 02221-5 IIF~eHM!rldpals112006.05 Banlemenl Mesa Shel and Core RenQVation\S~pecificaUDns 1·~7\02221 ·TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION.sld.dC>C 3.04 performed prior to determination of a negotiated price. Rock shall be removed to a 4" depth bel ow grade. Additional ly, all rock loosened during jacking , blasting, etc., shall be removed from the trench. For payment purposes , maximum trench width to be paid for shall be as defined in Subsection 3 .02, A . Maximum depth to be paid for sha ll be 12" below required grade. All over- excavation shall be rep laced as specified in Subsection 3.03, C. Inclusion of a bid item for rock excavation indicates such excavation is anticipated . Contractor to notify Eng ineer prior to any rock excavating; no payment shall be mad e for excavation prior to notification. Backfilling. A . Tamping Equipment. Except immediately next to the pipe, mechanical or air operated tamping equipment to be used . Hand equipment. such as T -bar, to be used to pipe if necessary. Care to be taken when compacti ng under, along side and immediately above pipe to prevent crush ing , fracturing or shifting of l he pipe . The Contractor is to note densities required for materials being backfilled and shall use appropriate approved equipment to obtain those densities. Wheel rolling is not considered to be an adequate compaction technique to meet these Specifications and will not be allowed. Where 85% compacti on is required, wheel rolling may be considered . Before acceptance, the Contractor shall backfill a portion of the trench and pay for density testing to verify adequacy of the proposed backfill techniques. A hydro hammer may be allowed to obtain the specified density up to 4 t in depth . The Contractor will be required to re-excavate those areas that have been tamped so that density tests can be taken to Insure that t he specified intensity is being obtained full depth. B. Moisture Control. Generally maintain moisture of backfi ll material with ± 2% of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM 0698. Maintain closer tolerances as needed to obtain densities required. C. Compaction . Maximum density (100%) based on ASTM 0698 or AAS HTO T99. 1. Bedding Material, including material used fo r over-excavation of any kind : 95% 2. Select Material: 95% 3. 4. Backfill beneath existing or proposed pavement, roadways, si dewalks, cu r bs, utility lines and other i mprovements or within 5' horizontally of such improvements: 95% Backfill within public or designated right-of-way: 90% or as shown on the Drawings. 02221-6 11Fl'eseMINipola112006 05 BaUiemenl Mesa Shell and Corw Renovallon\Spec\Spedfio::allons 1·26-07102221 • TRENCH~. BACKFII.tiNG & COMPACTJON.slc!.doc 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 [J Cl 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 l D. E. F. G. H. 5. Backfill within undeveloped, green or undesignated area: 85% 6. Backfill for any fill over over-cut grading in areas of lot/home construction: 95%. Placing Backfill. The maximum loose lifts of backfill material to be as follows: use smaller lifts where necessary to obtain required densities: 1. 2. Bedding and select material: 6" (or see Section 3.03A). Backfill Material: 12" where 95% compaction required; 24" where less than 95% compaction required. Backfilling Appurtenances. Backfilling to be done generally at the same time as adjacent pipelines. Backfilling procedure to conform to this section. Use special techniques or materials as shown on drawings. Disposal of Excess Excavation. Contractor to dispose of excess excavation off site. The Owner shall have the right to elect to have the excess excavation disposed of at a designated site within the project limits. Excavation may be wasted on-site only if approved by the Engineer. Disposal in any case shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Jetting. Jetting and water inundation are generally not permitted methods of compaction. The Engineer may allow jetting under certain field conditions. Techniques including depth of lifts, amount of water to be used, penetration of hose jet, etc., shall be at the direction of the Engineer. No jetting will be allowed on materials with a 200 minus gradation of greater than 15%. Contractor shall pay cost of all water used, soil classification testing and a retesting or recompaction required. No jetting shall be done prior to written approval and direction of the Engineer. Maintenance of Backfill. Contractor to maintain all backfill in a satisfactory condition during the extent of the contract and warranty period. All surface deterioration determined to be the responsibility of the Contractor and all settlement shall be repaired at once by the Contractor upon notice by the Owner. All costs for repair and all liability as a result of surface deterioration or settlement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. I. Clay Barrier Water Stops. Because of the presence of ground water, a clay barrier may be required to be installed full depth in trench in place of all bedding material and backfill. This barrier shall be full depth and two feet thick and installed every 500 lineal feet of trench. Clay barrier installation shall be considered incidental to the pipe installation and not paid for separately. 3.05 Surface Restoration. All existing surface improvements and site conditions disturbed or damaged during construction to be restored to a condition equal to pre-construction condition. All restoration costs are considered incidental to excavation and backfill. A. Improvements. Replace, repair or reconstruct all improvements as required. Work will not be accepted until Engineer accepts restoration and all affected property owners. Improvements include, by example, other utilities, culverts, structures, curb 02221-7 '•IF~eser.el'wlpala112006.05 Battlement Mesa Shell and Cora Renavabon\Spec\SpecifiCIIbons 1·2S.01\02221 • TRENCHING. BACKFILLING & COMPACTION.atd.doc B. c. and gutter, mailboxes, signs, sprinkler systems, etc. Final Grading . The Contractor is to re-establish existi ng final grade or finish final grades as modified and shown on the Drawings. The Contractor is to backfill to proper subgrade elevation with backfill material to allow placement of surface improvements or materials. Roadways. All roadways to be restored to orig1inal condition with material types removed. Materials and methods to conform to Section 02222, Embedment and Base Course Aggregate; and Section 02612, Hot Bituminous Pavement. Additional requirements are: 1. Minimum base course material on gravel roadways or minimum depth gravel on hard surface roadways to be 8", unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2 . Minimum bituminous surfacing to be 3" unless shown otherwise on Drawings . 3. Minimum concrete pavement surfacing to be 6 ", unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 4 .00 QUALITY CONTROL -FIELD 4 .01 Compaction. It should be fully understood that it will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to achieve the specified densities for all embedment and backfill material placed. Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that correct methods are being used for the placement and compaction of said materials. Correct backfill methods i nclude, but are not limited to: 1. Use of proper equipment for existing so n condition encountered. 2. Moisture content of existing soils; determination if water should be added or if soil should be air dried to reduce moisture content. 3 . Thickness of backfill lift. Contractor may, at his own expense, have an approved geotechnical engineer monitor the methods of backfill and compaction used to ensure that the desired densities are being obtained . Inspection and testing will be performed as directed by the Engineer. Testing will be conducted as a quality control check to ver ify the Contracto r's compliance with the standards indicated in the Specifications. 4 .02 Inspection and Testing. Inspection and testing to be performed at the direction of the Engineer. Contractor to cooperate fully with all persons engaged in testing. Contractor to excavate as required to allow testing. Contracto r to backfill all test excavations in accordance with these Specifications. Any areas that require a specified density, including fill, backfill, trenches, embankments, road base, hot bituminous pavement, backfill for structures, shall be tested. 4 .03 Densitv Testing and ControL A. Reference Standards. Density/moisture relationships to be developed for all soil types encountered according to ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99. B. Field Testing. Testing for density during compaction operations to be done in accordance with ASTM D2922 using nuclear density methods. 02221-8 llf~eservol'dpals1\2006 OS Battlement Mesa Sllell and Cont Renovatlon\Spae\Specifatians 1·26-07102221 ·TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COIAPACTI ON.std.doc 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IJ [} [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 [1 J f I 0 [l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n C. D. Frequency of Testing. Minimum of one (1) test every 250' trench per lift or as directed by Engineer. Contractor to excavate to depths required by Engineer for testing and backfill test holes to density specified. Testing to be paid for by Owner. Retesting. In the event of failure to meet compaction criteria, Contractor shall re- excavate and re-backfill at direction of Engineer. All retesting to be paid for by Contractor and to be performed by soils testing firm approved by the Engineer. 4.04 Payment for Testing. Owner responsible for all costs of initial testing of backfill. Contractor to pay all costs of any retesting required. 5.00 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT See Bid Schedule. End of Section 02221-9 1\Filaserverldpafsl\2006.05 Balllemenl Mesa Shell and COlli RenovaUon\Spec\Specir.cslions 1·21Hl7102221 ·TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTION.ald.doc 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n SECTION 02222 EMBEDMENT AND BASE COURSE AGGREGATE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Scope. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing one or more courses of aggre- gate on the prepared surface in accordance with these Specifications In reasonably close con- formity with the lines, grades and typical cross sections shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer in the field. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere. 1.03 Section 02201 -Excavation and Backfill for Structures Section 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Section 02555 -Water Transmission and Distribution Lines Section 02612-Hot Bituminous Pavement Reference Standards. A. Colorado Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction," latest edition. 1.04 Submittals. A. Aggregates. Certified statement from independent testing laboratory, acceptable to Engineer, of material compliance. 2.00 MATERIALS Aggregate used for pipeline bedding, base course and subbase course and specified by Class in other sections of this Specification shall conform to the gradation schedule shown below. CLASSIFICATION TABLE FOR AGGREGATE BASE COURSE* Percentage by Wei ht Passing Square Mesh Sieves Sieve LL not greater than 35 LL not greater than 30 Designation Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class4 Class 5 Class 6 Class 7 4inch -100 -- - -- 3inch -95-100 -- - - -i 2~ inch 100 --- - - - 2inch 95-100 - -100 - - - 1~ inch - - -90-100 100 - - 1 inch -- -95-100 -100 - o/. inch - - -50-90 -100 - No.4 30-65 - -35-50 30-70 3Q-65 - No.8 - - - - -25-65 20-85 No.200 3-15 3-15 20 max . 3-12 3-15 3-12 .. ___ 5_:-_'I_L *Reproduced from Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 02222-1 \\Filas11M1r'ldp.!lls112006.05 BaiUemonl Meoa Shell and Co111 Ranova~on\Spec\Specific.alion l 1·2~7102222 ·EMBEDMENT & BASE COURSE AGGREGATE_sld doc 2.01 3.00 METHODS AND PROCEDURES 3 .01 Placing. The base course material shall be placed on the previously prepared subgrade at the locations and in the proper quantities to conform to the typical cross sections as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. Placing and spreading shall be done by means of spreader machine, moving vehicle, motor grader or other approved equipment methods. The material shall be placed without segregation. Any segregated areas shall be removed and re- placed with uniformly graded material at the Contractor's expense. The base material may be placed in lifts of up to 6 inches, providing that after compaction, uni- form density is obtained throughout the entire depth of the lift. If the required depth exceeds 6 inches, it shall be placed in two or more lifts of approximately equal thickness. If uniform density cannot be obtained by 6-inch lifts, the maximum lift shall not exceed 4 inches in final thickness. 3.02 Compacting. Rolling will be continuous until the base material has been compacted to not less than 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99. Water shall be uniformly applied as necessary during compaction to obtai n optimum moisture content and to aid in consolidation . The surface of each layer sha tl be maintained during the compac- tion operations in such a manner that a uniform texture is produced and the aggregates are firmly keyed. The finished base course surface shall be smooth and free of ruts and irregularities and true to grade and crown as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The final surface shall be finished with a surface smoothness tolerance of Y. inch, measured as vertical ordinate from the face to a ten-foot straight edge. The base course shall be maintained in this condition by watering, drying, rolling or blading as necessary, or as the Engineer may direct, until the surface material is placed. 4 .00 QUALITY CONTROL-FIELD 4 .01 lnspectjon and Testing. Inspection and testing to be performed at the direction of the Engineer. Contractor to cooperate futly with all persons engaged in testing . Contractor to exca- vate as required to allow testing; Contractor to backfill all test excavations in accordance to these Speciftcations. 4.02 Density Testing and Control. A . Reference Standards. Density/moisture relationships to be developed for all soil types encountered according to ASTM D698 or ASSHTO T99. B. Field Testing. Testing for density during compaction operations to be done in accor- dance with ASTM D2922 using nuclear density methods. C. Frequency of Testing. Conduct a minimum of one test for each layer of specified depth of fill or backfill as follows: Foundations: For each 1 00 lineal feet or less of trench. Slabs on Grade : For each 2 ,000 square feet or less of building area. Pavement and Walks: For each 2,000 square feet or less. 02222-2 11Fdes81\181\dpals11200G 05 Batllemenl Mesa SJ!en lll!ld Cont RenovaUon\Spec:\SpaciliCOIIions 1·26-07102222 -EMBEDMENT & BASE COURSE AGGREGATEsl.d.doc 2.01 0 0 0 [_J 0 0 [j IJ u [J Ll n 0 , .. , u 0 0 [J r~ u r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u :J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D n All Other Areas: For each 5,000 square feet or less. Utility Trenches: For each 250 lineal feet or less of trench. 4.03 Payment for Testing. Owner is responsible for all costs of initial testing of backfill. Con- tractor to pay for all costs of any retesting required. 5.00 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT See Bid Schedule End of Section 02222-3 \\F~esel\'8r\dpals1\2006.05 BatUement Mesa Shell and Cor11 Renovation\Spec\Speo:if~ealiona 1·21).()7\02222 ·EMBEDMENT & BASE COURSE AGGREGATE.st.d.doc 2~1 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 J 0 u 0 0 0 B 0 J 0 n SECTION 02555 WATER TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION LINES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Scope. Work under this Section shall include furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and miscellaneous items necessary to install, disinfect, and test all raw water and potable water transmission and distribution pipelines and appurtenances as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere. Section 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Section 02222-Embedment and Base Course Aggregate Section 02612-Hot Bituminous Pavement 1.03 Submittals. Product data including catalog sheets and descriptive literature shall be submitted for all materials and equipment specified. Submittal shall state manufacturer's compliance with all published standards referenced herein. 1.04 Protection of Work. All pipe fittings, valves and equipment shall be carefully handled, stored and protected in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. At no time shall such materials be dropped or dumped into trench. Precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign matter from entering the pipe, fittings and valves prior to and during installation. Place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in the pipe during installation. At such time as pipe installation is suspended, either temporarily or overnight, the open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a watertight plug to prevent entrance of trench water, debris or foreign matter. Under no circumstances shall trench water be allowed to enter the pipeline. When water is present in the trench, the seal shall remain in place until such time as the trench is pumped dry. Whenever trench water becomes evident, adequate measures shall be taken to prevent pipe floatation. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor is incapable of keeping the pipe free of foreign matter during installation, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to cover the pipe ends with close woven bags until the start of the joining operation. 2.00 MATERIALS This item covers the types of materials that will be required for the construction and installation of water lines. All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available, and conform with applicable standards as indicated herein. [NOTE: Local jurisdiction specifications (i.e., municipality, district, etc.), will govern when two or more alternatives are given in these specifications, or where there is a discrepancy between these specifications and local jurisdiction specifications. specs\02555.std 1-02 02555-1 2.01 Ductil e Iron Pipe and Fittings. A. Ductile Iron Pipe . 1. Reference Standard-ANSI 21 .51/AWWA C151, l atest edition . 2 . Thickness C lass -52 3 . Pipe joints sha ll be push on joints, except where specifica ll y shown or detailed otherwise. 4. Pressure Rating -350 psi B. Fittings c . D. E. F. 1. Type -All fittings shall be mechanica l joint. exc ept where specifically shown or detailed otherwise. 2 . Reference Standard -ANSUAWWA C153, latest edition, for mechanical "compact" joints. 3. Material-Ductile iron 4. Pressure Rating -350 ps i Joints 1. 2. 3. Mechanical, Referen ce Standard -ANSI A. 21 .53/AWWA C153, latest edition . Push-on, Reference Standard-ANSI A 21.15/AWWA C115, Class 125. Flanged, Reference Standard -ANSI 8 16 .1, Class 125. Gaskets 1. Type -Rubber-ring gasket shall be suita ble for the specified pipe sizes and pressure. 2. Reference Standard -AWWA C111, latest edition. 3 . Lubricant-A non-toxic vegetable soap l ubricant shall be supplied with the pipe. Protective Coating 1. Underground Service -Manufacturer's standard bituminous coating - min imum 1 mil thickness. 2. Polyethylene Film Envelope -Polyethylene encasement shall conform to AWWA C105, latest edition, or ANSI A.21 .5. Film shall be Class C with a nominal thickness of 8 mils. Tape for securing the film shall have a minimum thickness of 8 mils and a mi nimum width of 1 inch. The polyethylene film shall be free of streaks, pinholes, tears or blisters. Protective Lining 1. Type -Cement mortar 2 . Reference Standard-ANSI A 21.4/AWWA C104, latest edition . 3. Thickness -Standard specs\02555.std 1-02 02555-2 fJ 0 0 ll [) ~ JJ 0 0 [} u 0 0 Lj 0 D J n a J 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 J 0 ) 0 n 2.02 Polwinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings A. B. PVC Pipe 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Fittings Materials-ASTM 01784, Type 1, Grade 1, PVC 1120, 2000 psi design stress. Reference Standard-AWWA C900, latest edition, 4" -12". Class-200 (DR-14), 4" -12". Reference Standard-AWWA C905,1atest edition, 14"-36" Class-235 (DR-18), 14"-16" Markings -Manufacturer's name, nominal size, class pressure rating, PVC 1120, NSF logo, identification code. Specialties-Electric tracing wire, 14-gauge solid copper insulated wire. Size-Shall conform to outside diameter of DIP. 1. Type -All fittings shall be mechanical joint except where specifically shown or detailed otherwise. 2. Reference Standard-ANSI A 21.10/AWWA C110 or A.21.53/C153, latest edition. 3. Pressure Rating-250 psi for C110; 350 psi for C153. 4. Gasket Reference Standard-AWWA C111, latest edition. C. Joints 1. 2. Push-on rubber gasket. Gasket Reference Standard -AWWA C111, latest edition. 2.03 Fire Hydrants. A. specs\02555.std 1-02 Dry Barrel Type 1. Reference Standard -AWWA C502, latest edition. 2. Outlet Size-one 4Y:z -inch, two 2 %-inch. 3. Hydrant Size-5 ~-inch. 4. Inlet Size-6 inch. 5. Operation - 1 %-inch pentagonal national standard operating nut, open counterclockwise. 6. Special Features-outlet hydrant shall open when turned to the left (counter clockwise). 7. Depth of Bury -As shown on Drawings. 8. Additional Requirements -Furnish hydrant complete with pipe and tee, 6 inch (6") restrained mechanical joint gate valve and thrust blocks. Hydrant shall be restrain-to the hydrant tee by 3/4 inch threaded rods protected from corrosion by the use of an approved bituminous coating, or approved equal. 9. Traffic Model with breakaway bolts and coupling. 10. Manufacturers Reference -Mueller Super Centurion A423, or Kennedy 02555-3 K81 D. Confonn to local j urisdiction requirements. 2 .04 Valves. A . Gate Valves B. c . specs\02555.std 1-02 1. 2. Double Disk a. Size as shown on Drawings. b . Reference Standard -AWWA C500, latest edition. c. Style -Iron body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem, double disk, parallel seat, NRS valves with 0-ring seals. d. Rotation-Open, left or counterclockwise. e. Pressure rating -200 psi. f. Operator -2'' square nut. g. Manufacturer's Reference -Mueller, Kennedy h . Ends -MJ unless specified on Drawings. Resilient a. Size as shown on Drawings. b. Reference Standard-AWWA C509, latest edition. c. Style-Iron body, bronze stem resilient seat gate val ves , lubrication free , unobstructed through port to minimize head loss, entire body encapsulated inside and out with epoxy coating . d. Pressure Ra ting -200 psi. e. Wrench Nut - 2 inch square. f. Manufacturer's Reference -Mueller, Kennedy Combination A ir Release Valve. 1. Size -As recommended by manufacturer for correct application. 2. Inlet -Pipe Thread FNPT 3. Materials Body -Cast Iron Float -Stainless Steel Seat -Buna-N Lever Frame-Delsrin 4 . Pressure Rating -200 psi 5 . Manufacturer's Reference-APCO 6. Performance -Permits efficient filllng or dra ining of long pipelines, for protection against vacuum, and will continuously vent pockets of air as they accumulate in pipeline. Pressure Reducing Valves . All pressure reducing va lves shall be Golden-Anderson cushioned, single globe , pilot pattern, hydraulica lly operated with flanged ends (Figure 4500) or equal. The valve body shall be of cast iron ASTM-126 with flanges con forming to the latest 02555-4 0 0 0 0 n !] [J [J 0 0 [1 n .J i I u 0 0 0 r1 0 0 0 0 D Q 0 0 0 ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 j l ANSI standards. The valve body shall be extra heavy construction throughout. The valve interior trim shall be bronze B-62 as well as the main valve operation. The valve seals shall be easily renewable while no diaphragm shall be permitted within the main valve body. All controls and piping shall be non-corrosive construction. 2.05 Valve Boxes. 2.06 A. Screw Type -Three Piece 1. Material -Castlron 2. Size -5 1/4 inch diameter 3. Type -Three piece adjustable screw type 4. Cover-Deep socket type with the work "water'' cast in the top 5. Base -#160 type with 20.5" bottom opening Debris Caps. A. Debris caps shall be installed as close under the cast iron cover without interfering with cover operation. B. Flexible skirt shall be trimmed to provide a smooth contact with the interior diameter of the pipe. C. Flexible caps shall be manufactured by SW Services, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona, or equal approved by Engineer. D. Debris caps shall be comprised of a hollow member having a cylindrical outer surface. The caps shall have a flexible skit providing an outward seal preventing debris from getting past the cap. The cap must withstand, without slippage, a minimum vertical force of 50 pounds, at a loading rate of 1.0 inch per minute. The cap shall be molded using General Electric ABS #HIM 4500. The caps shall have retaining prongs to retain a standard locating coil. 2.07 Mechanical Couplings. Only M.J. solid sleeves allowed. 2.08 Water Service & Tap Components. A. Corporation Stops specs\02555.std 1-02 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Material -Brass or bronze As shown on Drawings Reference Standard-AWWA C800, latest edition. Thread inlet-Tapered (CC) Type Thread outlet -Copper Service Thread for flared connection or compres- sion connection if local jurisdiction permits. Manufacturer's Reference-Mueller H 15000, Ford F600, for flared. Mueller 25008 for compression. 02555-5 B. c . D. E. F. specs\02555.std 1-02 Copper Service Pipe 1. Reference Standard ~ AWWA C800 2. Material-Type K, ASTM 888 3. Size -As shown on Drawings. Polyethylene (Pure-Core Blue or equal ) 1. Reference Standard-ASTM D2239/D2737 and AWWA C901 2 . Size -As shown on drawings, specification envelopes Y2" to 2" diameter 3. Pressure rating -200 psi 4 . Maximum length -Confirm with local public works department. Otherwise, 100 linear feet maximum laying length. 5. Contractor to confirm Polyethylene tubing will work with standard fittings , curb and corporation stops and use of stainless steel collar insert. Curb Box 1. Material -Cast iron box, complete w/lid and red brass screw. 2. Type -McDonald 5605 with stationary rod . 3 . Size -1" thru 2", depending on local jurisdiction preference. Curb Stop 1. Materials -Cast bronze body, resilien t 0 -ring seal, standard tee-head operator. Teflon ball valve. 2 . Size -As shown on Drawings. 3. Inlet -Copper service thread for flared connection or compression connection if local jurisdiction permits. 4. Outlet -Copper service thread for flared connection or compression connection, if local jurisdiction permits. 5. Manufacturer's Reference -Mueller B-25204, Ford B22-333, McDonald 6100. For flared, Mueller B-25209 for compression . Service Clamps 1. For use with Ductile Iron Pipe: 2. a . b. Materials -Bronze service c lamp, O~ring gasket, double strap, (CC) threads. Manufacturer's Referen ce ~ Mue11er BR-2 Series, Smith Blair 323, or equal. For use with PVC Pipe: a. Materials -Bronze service clamp, 0-ring gasket, two-section of three-section clamp, (CC) threads. 02555-6 n n 0 0 0 IJ c-· l j [j [} [J 0 0 0 u u [] 0 0 r-\ .I I 0 n 0 J 0 D 0 0 D 0 ] 0 J D 0 0 J n n 2.09 b. Manufacturer's Reference -Mueller H-134 Series, Smith Blair 397, or equal. Joint Restraints. A. Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands. B. 1. For use with ductile iron pipe. 2. a. Materials -Multiple wedge, ductile iron ASTM A536, 60-42-10 minimum. b. Manufacturer's reference -EBAA Iron Series 1100 MEGALUG or Ford Uni-flange Series 1400. For use with PVC pipe. a. Materials -Multiple wedge ductile iron A536, 60-42-10 minimum. b. Manufacturer's reference -EBAA Iron Series 2000PV or Ford Uni- flange Series 1500 "Circle-Lock" Push-on Joint Restraints. 1. For use with ductile iron pipe. 2. a. Materials-Ductile iron retainer gland and restraint ring ASTM-536, 60-42-10 minimum, 526 alloy steel tie bolts ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. b. Manufacturer's reference -EBAA Iron Series 1700 MEGALUG restraint harness or Ford Uni-flange Series 1450. For use with PVC pipe. a. Materials -Ductile iron restraint harness ASTM 536, 60-42-10 minimum. b. Manufacturer's reference -EBAA Iron Series 1600 (C-900) and Series 2800 (C-905) or Ford Uni-flange Series 1350. 2.10 Tapoinq Sleeves. 1. Type -Split-body, 0-ring sealed with flanged outlet. 2. Manufacturer's reference-Smith Blair Model622. 2.11 Concrete for Thrust Blocks and Encasing of Pipe. Concrete for thrust blocks and for encasing the water pipe line shall have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi. specs\02555.std 1-02 02555-7 2.12 Tracer Wire. No. 15 o r larger, insulated, stranded copper. All splices to be watertight, underground type, (Tracer wire is required for ductile iron pipe). 2 .13 Magnetic Tape. Detectable marking tape shall consist of a minimum of 5 mil (0.0005") overall thickness; five-ply composition; ultra-high molecular weight' 100% virgin polyethylene; acid alkaline and corrosion resistant. Elongation properties shall be in accordance with ASTM D882-80A and shall be less than 150% at break. The tape shall have a 20-gauge (0.0020") solid aluminum foil core, encapsulated within 2 .55 mil (0.00255") polyethylene backing. Tape color and legend combination shall be in accordance with APWA or local requirements. The color shall be blue. The legend shall read "CAUTION-WATERLINE BELOW'. The tape tensile strength shall be in accordance with ASTM D882-80A and be not less than 7800 psi. Tape width shall be 3/4 of the diameter of the pipeline being protected. Tape Width Tape Bury Depth 2" 6"-18" 3" 6" 6"-28" 6"-36" The tape shall be as manufactured by T . Christy Enterprises, or equal. 12" or wider 6"-36" 2.14 Continuitv Straps. Continuity straps may be supplied with ductile iron pipe. The straps should not be connected except as ind icated on the Drawings or as required by local jurisdiction. 3.00 METHODS AND PROCEDURES 3.01 Cleaning and Inspection. Clean aU pipe, fittings, valves and related material thoroughly of all foreign material and inspect for cracks, flaws or other defects prior to installation. Mark all defective, damaged or unsound materials with bright marking crayon or paint and remove from jobsite. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any construction debris from entering the water lines during construction of water lines and appurtenances. If this debris should enter the distribution system, the Contractor shall furnish all labor and material necessary to clean the system. Under no circumstances will the Contractor flush the debris into an existing distribution system. 3 .02 Verification. Verify dimensions and class of all existing and proposed pipe, valves, fittings and equipment prior to installation to ensure the piping system will fit together properly. 3 .03 Pipe Embedment. A. Placing Embedment Material -Refer to Section 02221 for placement methods. B. Embedment Classes -Refer to Section 02222 for embedment materials as listed below: specs\02555.std 1..02 02555-8 0 0 c 0 0 n n I-; ·' [J 0 u [! 0 0 ~ 0 0 u n l 0 J 0 0 n 0 0 ] 0 D 0 0 0 ~ n ~1 0. 1 3.04 A. B. c. D. specs\02555.std 1-02 Use Class 6 aggregate 4" below pipe and 12" above pipe for all pipe materials. Contractor shall compact trench bottom before placing bedding and shall compact bedding. Pipe Installation. Methodology -Pipe shall be laid in straight section with bell ends facing the direction of laying unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on a grade of ten percent ( 1 0%) or greater, the installation shall proceed uphill with the bell ends facing upgrade. The pipeline shall be installed so that a continuous positive or negative grade is maintained between high and low points to avoid air pockets. Jointing of the pipe shall be made in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the pipe and the manufacturer of the coupling. The pipe shall be brought to correct line and grade, and secured in place with the specified bedding material as directed in Section 02221. Pipeline Depth -as indicated on Drawings, or as per local jurisdiction but always below frost level. Depth shall be based on depth below finished grade of a project and not existing grade. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping pipelines from freezing if fire line is temporarily installed above frost line before fill material is installed. Concrete Encasement -Install concrete encasement where indicated on the drawings or as required by other sections of this Specification. Concrete shall have a three thousand (3000) psi compressive strength. Reinforcing shall consist of four (4) evenly spaced longitudinal No.4 rebars. Installation of Ductile Iron Pipelines. 1. Pipe Handling. Pipe should be lowered into the trench with ropes, slings or machinery. Under no circumstances should the pipe be pushed off the bank and allowed to fall into the trench. 2. Pipe Laying. Pipe shall be laid in straight sections, in an uphill direction, with bell ends facing in the direction of laying, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 3. Jointing of Push-on Joints. In joining the pipe, the exterior four inches of the pipe at the spigot end and the inside of the adjoining bell shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, tar (other than standard coating) and other foreign matter. The gasket shall be placed in the bell as per manufacturer's installation instruction. A thick film of the pipe manufacturer's joint lubricant shall be applied to the gasket over its entire surface. The spigot end of the pipe shall then be wiped clean and inserted into the bell to contact the gasket. The pipe shall be forced all the way into the bell by crowbar or by jack and choker slings. Check the position of the gasket with a feeler gauge to ensure it is not rolled. 02555-9 3.05 E. 4. Pipe Cutting. The cutting of pipe for fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or Uning and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. The flame cutting of pipe by means of an oxyacetylene torch will not be allowed . 5. Polyethylene Film Envelope. Encase main and fittings using procedures recommended by manufacturer. Special care shall be used at all overlap joints. Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. 1. Pipe Handling. Pipe should be carefully lowered into the trench to avoid pipe falling into trench . 2. Pipe laying. Pipe shall be laid in straight sections with bell ends facing th e direction of laying. When pipe laying is not in progress , a watertight plug shall close the open end of the pipe. 3. Jointing the Pipe. The outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be thoroughly wiped clean. Set the rubber ring in the bell with the marked edge facing toward the end of the bell. lubricate the spigot end using a thin film of the manufacturer-supplied lubricant. Push the pipe spigot into the bell. Position the completed joint so that the mark on the pipe end is in line with the end of the bell. 4. Pipe Cutting. The cutting of pipe for fitting or closure pieces shall be don e in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Bevel the end o f the pipe with a beveling tool after the pipe is cut. Place a clearly visible position mark at the correct distance from the end of the field-cut pipe . Installation of Pipeline Appurtenances . A. General. Install all valves, meters, manh ofes, and other equipment appurtenant to pipeline at the locations indicated on the drawings or as otherwise designated by the Engineer to accommodate field conditions . Document "record" measurements prior to backfill referencing all appurtenant equipment to the nearest permanent surface improvement. B. Installation of Valves. Install valves in the pipeline in the same manner specified for laying and jointing the pipe and in accordance with details included in Drawings . C. Valve Boxes . Except where specified otherwise, install valve boxes on all buried valves. Install boxes such that no stress is transmitted to the valve . Set boxes plumb and directly over the valve with the top of the box placed flush with the finished grade. Backfill and thoroughly compact around each box . Provide extended stems on valves where required such that the operating nut Is not lower than seven feet (7') below finished grade. specs\02555.std 1-02 02555-10 0 0 0 ~- 0 0 D n J ; .... D [] D 0 0 0 u 0 [J u n 0 J D ~ n ~\ 0 1 D 8 U· J 0 31 0' n J 0 l D. E. F. Debris Caps. 1. Debris caps shall be installed as close under the cast iron cover without interfering with cover operation. 2. Flexible skirt shall be trimmed to provide a smooth contact with the interior diameter of the pipe. 3. Flexible caps shall be manufactured by SE Services, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona, or equal approved by Engineer. 4. Debris caps shall be comprised of a hollow member having a cylindrical outer surface. The caps shall have a flexible skit providing an outward seal preventing debris from getting past the cap. The cap must withstand, without slippage, a minimum vertical force of 50 pounds, at a loading rate of 1.0 inch per minute. The cap shall be molded using General Electric ABS #HIM 4500. The caps shall have retaining prongs to retain a standard locating coil. Fire Hydrants. Install hydrants in accordance with the standard details on the drawings. All tie rods and appurtenances to be completely covered with a bitumastic coating prior to backfill. Hydrant to be set plumb and true to grade. Contractor to bag or cover the fire hydrant that is not in operation. Joint Restraint. Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided, as shown in the details included with the Drawings for all tees, elbows, plugs, reducers, valves, fire hy- drants and crosses if one or more sides of the cross is plugged. The bearing area of the block shall be at least equal to that stated on the drawings. The bearing sur- face shall be against undisturbed earth. The block shall be placed normal to the thrust as shown on the drawings. Concrete for thrust blocks shall have three thou- sand (3000) psi compressive strength. Contractor will be required to use either plywood forms or plastic to protect the nuts and bolts on the fittings when the concrete reaction block is placed. Mechanical joint retainer glands and push-on joint restraint devices to be used as shown on the Drawings and as required by the local jurisdiction. Contractor to verify prior to construction. Contractor to also use joint restraint or wood blocking as a method of temporary restraint to secure fittings while concrete reaction blocks set up. (Note: Temporary restraint to be used for those cases where a tie-in is being made and the water needs to be turned back on as soon as possible). 3.06 Connection to Existing Water Facilities. All main line connections between existing and proposed piping shall be made during non-business hours or at a time, which is acceptable to the Owner. All shut-offs shall be planned 24 hours in advance and all persons affected by the shut-off shall be given a 24-hour notice in the local newspaper and/or local radio at the Contractor's specs\02555.std 1-02 02555-11 expense. In addition, the Contractor shall personally warn those affected 1 hour before the water is shut off. The tie-ins between existing and proposed mains shall be made so that both the proposed main and existing main a re in service at the same time. Only after the new main i s tested, approved and in service can the individual proposed service lines tie into the existing service line on the bu ilding side of the curb vatve. The affected property shall be given a minimum of one (1) hour notice before the water is shut off. The new line must have passed the pressure testing and bacteriological test prior to connecting the services to the proposed water line. Remove existing curb boxes and locate new curb boxes on property line unless otherwise instructed by Project Engineer. Contractor is ·to provide all necessary fittings needed to reconnect service line on property side of curb box. Contractor shall notify Project Engineer if existing service line is leaking prior to connection. Contractor shall be responsible for repair of existing service line if it leaking after connection is made. Contractor shall keep the connection to existing pipe exposed, and notify Project Observer, and again approval from Project Observer prior to backfilling over connection to existing service line. Take all precautions to prevent contamination when making connections to existing potable water lines. No trench water , mud or other contaminating substances shall be permitted to enter the pipeli ne. Swab the interior of all new pipe, fittings and valves installed in the existing pipeline with a 5 percent (50,000 ppm) chlorine solution prl or to installation. After the connection is completed , flush the main to remove all contaminated water. 3.07 Protection of Water Supplies. Water lines shall be located a minimum of l en feet (10') horizontally from existing or proposed sewer mains. Wherever the sewer line crosses above or within eighteen inches (18") beneath the water mains, the sewer line shall be made impervious by the method listed below: 1. Concrete encasement for twenty feet, centered over the waterline. In all cases, select granular backfill shall be used to prevent any settling of the higher pipe. 3.08 Service Connections. Customer service connections shall be installed in accordance wit h the details set forth on the Drawings. Terminate the service with a curb stop and box and mark with a stake except where shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3.09 Tracer Wire. Tape electrical tracing wire to the top of the pipe at 20-foot intervals to prevent dislocation of the wire during backfilling. Extend wire to ground surface at all valves, fire hydrants, and other locations shown on drawings. The tracing wire shall be brought up on the outside of the valve box. When the wire is within 4 " of the top of the lid , the wire shall be brought back inside the box and securely fastened . Provide sufficient slack in the wire outside of the box to compensate for any future adjustment to the valve box. Required on all water mains . 4.00 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL specs\02555 .std 1-02 02555-12 D ,0 0 .n 0 ~ Q ~~ [J Q u [J u 0 ·o 0 [1 0 r 1 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 CJ 0 0 J J D \ .l 4.01 Hydrostatic Tests. Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Furnish all necessary equipment and material, make all taps in the pipe as required, and conduct the tests. The tests shall be conducted between valved sections of the pipeline, or as approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will monitor the tests. Furnish the following equipment and material for the tests: Amount 2 2 1 1 Description Approved graduated containers Pressure gauges Hydraulic force pump approved by the Engineer Additional %-inch pressure tap for Engineer's test gauge Suitable hose and suction pipe as required Conduct the tests after the trench has been partially backfilled with the joints left exposed for inspection, or when completely backfilled, as permitted by the Engineer. Where any section of pipe is provided with concrete reaction blocking, do not make the pressure test until at least 5 days have elapsed after the concrete thrust blocking is installed. If high-early cement is used for the concrete thrust blocking, the time may be cut to 2 days. Conduct pressure test in the following manner, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer after the trench has been backfilled or partially backfilled as hereinbefore specified, fill the pipe with water, expelling all air during the filling. The test pressure shall be 1% times normal working pressure at the point of lowest elevation of the test gauge. A. Duration B. c. specs\02555.std 1-02 1. The duration of each pressure test shall be 2 hours, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Procedure 1. Slowly fill the pipe with water and allow to stand for 24 hours. Expel all air from the pipe. Allow and maintain the specified test pressure by continuous pumping if necessary for the entire test period. The test pressure shall be calculated for the point of lowest elevation, or as specified by the Engineer. The pump suction shall be in a barrel or similar device, or metered so that the amount of water required to maintain the test pressure may be measured accurately. 2. Before the line is pressurized, the Engineer shall verify that all necessary main line valves are open or closed with regard to the section of line being tested. In addition, the Engineer shall verify that all hydrant valves are open. Leakage 02555-13 1. Leakage shaU be defined as the quantity of water necessary to hold the specified test pressure for the duration of the test period. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage i s greater than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the following formula: L =-NDJP 7400 In the above formula : L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour N = Number of joints in the length of pipe tested D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches P = Average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. D. The pressure testing of water service lines shall follow the same procedure as outlined in the section. In all cases, however, the corporation stop, service line and curb stop shall be visually inspected under full test pressure and any leaks fixed. E. Correction of Excessive Leakage 1. Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that al towed, locate and repair the defective joints or pipe until the leakage of a subsequent test is within the specified allowance. 5.00 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATERLINES 5.01 General. Flush and disinfect potable waterlines in accordance with the procedure set forth in AWWA C651, latest edition, Disinfecting Water Mains. Provide all temporary blow-offs, pumps, chlorination equipment, chlorine and all other necessary apparatus required. 5 .02 Pipe Cleaning. If the pipe contains dirt or heavy encrusted matter that, in the opinion of the Engineer, will not be removed during the flushing operation, the Contractor shall clean and swab the interior of the pipe with a five percent (50,000 ppm) chlorine solution. A. Preliminary Flushing. Flush pipeline p rior to disinfection, except when the tablet method is used, to remove all remaining foreign material. The flushing operation shall develop a minimum velocity of 2.5 ft./sec. 5.03 Chlorine Application . In general, chlorine shall be applied using the continuous feed method. However, on large diameter lines where this would not be practical, the slug method may be used. The tablet method may be used on short extensions (up to 2500 feet) of small diameter mains (12 inches and smaller). A. Continuous Feed Method. Introduce water into the line at a constant rate wh il e adding chlori ne at a minimum concentration of 50 mg/1. Maintain the chlorinated specs\02555.std 02555-14 1-02 D D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 lJ 0 0 0 D 0 f}j 0 0 0 D D D D 0 0 D D D 0 0 0 0 0 D n water in the pipeline for a minimum of 24 hours after which period the treated water shall contain no less than 1 0 mg/1 of chlorine throughout the entire length. B. Slug Method. Introduce water with a minimum chlorine concentration of 100 mg/1 at a constant measured rate into the pipeline. Apply column or slug of chlorinated water that will, as it passes along the line, expose all interior surfaces for a period of three hours. Check the application at the upstream end of the line. C. Tablet Method. This method shall not be used if trench water or foreign material has entered the line or if the water is below soc (41 °F). Because preliminary flushing cannot be used, this method shall only be used when scrupulous cleanliness has been exercised. Place tablets in each section of pipe in sufficient number to produce a dose of 25 mg/1. Refer to Table 2 of AWWA C651, latest edition, for the required minimum number of tablets. All tablets within the main must be attached at the top of the pipe. Introduce water into the pipeline at a rate no greater than 1 ft./sec. and retain the water in the pipeline for a period of 24 hours after which period the treated water shall show a detectable chlorine residual at each sampling point. 5.04 Final Flushing. After the applicable retention period, heavy chlorinated water should not remain in prolonged contact with pipe. In order to prevent damage to the pipe lining or to prevent corrosion damage to the pipe itself, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the main fittings, valves, and branches until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that generally prevailing in the distribution system or that is acceptable for domestic use. The environment to which the chlorinated water is to be discharged shall be inspected. If there is any possibility that the chlorinated discharge will cause damage to the environment, then a neutralizing chemical shall be applied to the water to be wasted to neutralize thoroughly the residual chlorine. 5.05 Bacteriologic Tests. Standard conditions. After final flushing and before the new water main is connected to the distribution system, two consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart, shall be collected from the new main. At least one set of samples shall be collected from every 1200 feet of the new water main, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. A minimum of two sampling points is required for any segment over 500 feet in length. All samples shall be tested for bacteriological (chemical and physical) quality in accordance with Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, and shall show absence of coliform organisms. Collect samples in sterile bottles from sampling points furnished and installed by the Contractor in the main. 5.06 Final Connections to Existing Mains. When connections to existing mains are made without a new valve at the connection point, new water main and appurtenances shall be installed, flushed, disinfected and satisfactory bacteriological sample results received prior to permanent connections being made to the active, existing system. specs\02555.std 1-02 02555-15 Final connections or those portions of the new system installed that have not been disinfected as part of a previous disinfection procedure, shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 4.6 of C651 . 6 .00 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT See Bid Schedule specs\02555.std 1..02 End of Section 02555-16 D 0 0 0 n [ 0 ,_, LJ D D 0 ~ u CJ J [j 0 0 r 1 0 0 0 D D D 0 D D 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 D D n 1.00 GENERAL SECTION 02560 SANITARY SEWERLINES 1.01 Scope. Work under this section shall include furnishing all materials, labor and tools necessary to perform all installation, cleaning and testing of all sanitary sewer lines and appurtenances as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere. Section 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Section 02222 -Embedment and Base Course Aggregate 1.03 Submittals. Product data including catalog sheets and descriptive literature shall be submitted for all materials and equipment specified. Submittals shall state manufacturer's compliance with all published standards referenced herein. 1.04 Protection of Work. All pipe, fittings and equipment shall be carefully handled, stored and protected in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials. At no time shall such materials be dropped or dumped into trench. Precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign matter from entering the pipe and fittings prior to and during installation. Place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in the pipe during installation. At such time as pipe installation is suspended, either temporarily or over night, the open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a water-tight plug to prevent entrance of trench water, debris or foreign matter. A mechanical-type fitting shall be used for this seal. At no time shall duct tape or any other tape be used for this seal. Under no circumstances shall trench water be allowed to enter the pipeline. When water is present in the trench, the seal shall remain in place until such time the trench is pumped dry. Whenever trench water becomes evident, adequate measures shall be taken to prevent pipe flotation. Contract shall bear all costs associated with keeping trench free of liquids. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor is incapable of keeping the pipe free of foreign matter during installation, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to cover the pipe ends with close woven bags until the start of the jointing operation. 2.00 MATERIALS This item covers the types of materials that will be allowed for the construction and installation of sewer lines. All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and conform with applicable standards as indicated herein. 2.01 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. Not permitted. C·\Docurnenls and StUlings\Richard Cartei\Local Sett"'1ls\Temporary Internet Fias\OI.K261D2560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES std.docC·\Documants and Sartings\Richard CBIIenL.ocal Saltings\Temporary Internet Filas\OLK26\02560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES 1td.doc: 02560-1 2.02 Polvvioyl Chloride <PVC) Pioe__and Fittings <Gravity Main) 2.03 A. B. c. D. PVC Pipe, through 15" diameter. 1. Material Reference Standard -ASTM 01784 2. Pipe Reference Standard -ASTM 03034 3. Class -SOR35 4 . Markings-Manufacturer's name, nominal size, PVC classification, Type PSM, SOR-35, PVC gravity sewer pipe, ASTM 03034 and code number, green coloring dyed into PVC . PVC Pipe, 18" to 27" diameter. 1. Material Reference Standard-ASTM 01784 2. Pipe Reference Standard -ASTM F679 3. Markings -Manufacturer's name, nominal size, PVC cell classification, PS 46 PVC Sewer Pipe and ASTM F679 . Green coloring dyed Into PVC. 4 . Variance-PVC piping meeting the stiffness requirement of ASTM F679 but not meeting wall thickness requirement will be allowed under this specification. Manufacturers will be requ ired to provide a list of at least five (5) similar projects with references in which pipe has been successfully used and laboratory testing data showing the pipe meets the structural requirements of ASTM F679. Fittings 1. Type -PVC push-joint 2. Materials-ASTM 01784 3. Reference Standard -ASTM 03034 or ASTM F679 Joints 1. Type-push-on rubber gasket 2. Gasket reference standard -ASTM F4 77 E. Restraint-type Glands. Force Main. A. PVC Pipe. 1. Materials -ASTM 0 1784, Type 1, Grade 1, PVC 1120, 2000 psi design stress. 2. Reference Standard -AWWA C-900. 3. Class-150 (OR-18). 4. Markings -Manufacturer's name, nominal size, class pressure rating, PVC 1120 , NSF logo, identification code. 5. Specia lties-Electrical tracing wire, 14 gauge solid copper insulated wire. 6. Size-Shall conform to outside diameter of DtP. C:IOoatmanls and Sattings\Richard Cart8f\Loc:a1 SaHings\T9mporary lnlemel Fl les\OLK26102560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES lld.doeC:\Ooalmenll and SeHings\Richard Catter\LOQ!I Sellings\T~rary Internet Files\OLK26102560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES lld.doc 02560-2 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 [1 0 0 0 0 0 0 D u J n 0 D D D 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 n B. Fittings 1. Type -All fittings shall be restrained mechanical joint except where specifically shown or detailed otherwise. 2. Reference Standard-AWWAIANSI C153/A 21.53 3. Pressure Rating-250 psi 4. Gasket Reference Standard-AWWA C-111 c. Testing 1. Force main to follow waterline leakage testing procedures. 2.04 Concrete for Thrust Blocks and Encasing of Pipe. Concrete for thrust blocks and for encasing the sewer pipeline shall have 28 day compressive strength of not Jess than 3000 psi. 2.05 Manholes. A. Concrete Rings/Cones B. c. D. E. 1. 2. 3. Type-Precast Reference Standard -ASTM C478 Size-Four-foot or five-foot inside diameter Manhole Bases 1. Shall be precast or cast-in-place, depending upon local jurisdiction standards, with integrally cast-in water stops. Tee tops of base shall be at least 12 inches above top of pipe. 2. Reference Concrete Standard -ASTM C150 Type II modified or Type V. Manhole Steps 1. 2. 3. Joints 1. 2. Material-Aluminum, ASTM C478 Size/Type-Yz" round stock x 10" wide aluminum with slip-proof tread. Mounting -Grouted in place on concrete ring with ASTM C150 Type II modified Portland Cement mortar and sand grout for water tight joint. Type-Rub'r Nek preformed gasket as manufactured by K.T. Snyder Co., Inc., Houston, Texas or equal. Cement Mortar Material Reference Standard -One part Portland Cement, Type II, modified with three parts of sand. Cement mortar to be used with concrete grade rings only. Grade Adjustment Rings 1. Type-Precast ASTM C150 Type II modified concrete 2. Size -Not less than 6" wide x heights to allow for one-inch adjustments. C :IOocllmenls and SelUngs\Richalll Cenar\Local Seh,ngs\Temporary lnlemet Files\OL.K26102560 -SANITARY SEWERLINES std.docC \Documents and Sel~ngs\Richalll Canar\Local Saltlngs\Temporary lntemat Files\OLK26\02560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES std.doc 02560-3 2.06 F. Frame and Cover 1. Material Reference-Grey Iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 2. Cover-Stamped with "SEWER", machined bea ri ng surface with ring 3. Type -Heavy, combined weight of ring and cover greater than pounds . 4 . Manufacturer Reference-Neenah, R-1706 Sewer Service Line Materials. A. Wyes-Required for all new sewer line construction. 1. Material -ASTM D3034 PVC 2. Strength -for use with SDR-35 3. Joint -Slip-on rubber gasket B. Saddles (Required for tapping existing mains). 1. Material -ASTM D3034 PVC 375 2. Joint -Rubber seal to main with stainless steel compression bands . Sl ip- on service joint with rubber gasket. 3.00 METHODS AND PROCEDURES 3.01 Cleaning and Inspection . Clean all pipe, fittings and related materials thoroughly of all foreign material and inspect for cracks, flaws or other defects prior to i nstallation . Mark all defective, damaged or unsound materials with bright marking crayon or paint and remove from job site. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any construct ion debris from entering the sewer lines during construction . If this debris should enter the pipe line system , the Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to clean the system . Under no circumstances will the Contracto r flush the debris into an existing sanitary sewer system. 3.02 3.03 Placement of Pipe . A. Laser Beam . All sanitary sewer pipe must be installed with a laser. If bend ing of the beam due to air temperature variations becomes apparent with "in pipe" units, a fan sha ll be provided to circu late ai r in the pipe . Air ve focity shall not be so excessive as to cause pulsating or vibrating of the beam. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the beam cannot be accurately controlled, this me thod of setting line and grade shall be abandoned. Pipe Embedment. A. Placing embedment material-Refer to Section 02221 for placement methods. B. Embedment Classes -Refer to Section 02221 and Construction Drawings for embedment materials for each class listed below: 1. Pipe shall be embedded accordi ng to app licable details on the Construction Drawings. C:\Oocumenls and SeUings\Richanl C&r1erllocal Se«ings\Temporaty ltt.l emot F·lllls\OLK26\02560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES sld.doeC'\Oocurnents and Setun gs\Richanl Carter\l oeal Set~ngs\Temporary lnlemel Files\OLK26\D2560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES std.doe 02560-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 [) _j 0 J 0 u [j n D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 n 3.04 3.05 Pipe Installation. A. Installation of Ductile Iron Pipe Lines. Not applicable. B. Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. 1. Pipe Handling. Pipe should be carefully lowered into the trench to avoid pipe falling into trench. 2. Pipe Laying. Pipe shall be laid true to line and grade, in an uphill direction, with bell ends facing in the direction of laying. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. 3. Jointing the Pipe. The outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be thoroughly wiped clean. Set the rubber ring in the bell with the marked edge facing toward the end of the bell. Lubricate the spigot ed using a thin film of the manufacturer-supplied lubricant. Push the pipe spigot into the bell. Position the completed joint so that the mark on the pipe end is in line with the end of the bell. 4. Pipe Cutting. The cutting of pipe for manholes or for fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Bevel the end of the pipe with a beveling tool after the pipe is field cut. Place a clearly visible position mark at the correct distance from the end of the field-cut pipe. C. Installation of Slipline Pipe. Not applicable. Sewer Manhole Installation. A. B. General. Manholes shall be furnished and installed to depths and dimensions shown on the Construction Drawings and/or staked in the field. Manholes shall be constructed of precast concrete rings in accordance with details shown on the Construction Drawings. Connections to Manholes. Connection of manhole with pipe shall be made with flexible connector detail. See details on Construction Drawings. In addition, extra care shall be taken by grouting or other means of sealing to assure positive watertight manholes around the inlet or outlet pipes. C. Manhole Floor and Inverts. Manhole bases shall be constructed to conform to the details shown on the Drawings. The invert channels shall be smooth and semi- circular in shape, conforming to the inside of the incoming and outgoing sewer pipelines. Changes in direction of flow shall be made with a smooth curve of as large a radius as the size of the manhole will permit. Changes in size and grade of the channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Where large differences in invert elevations exist, sloped flow channels shall be formed so the wastewater does not undergo a vertical drop. The invert channels may be formed directly in the concrete of the manhole base. The floor of the manhole outside the channel shall be smooth and shall slope toward the channels. C·\Documanls and Seltings\Richard Cartltlll.ocal Selllngs\Tempon~ry lnlemel Filas\OLK26102560 -SANITARY SEWERLINES sld.docC:\Ooc:umenls and Selliogs\Ric:hard Carlerllocal Selbngs\TemponlfY lnlamel Files\OLK26102560-SANIT AAY SEWERLINES sld.doc 02560-5 D. E. Finish Grade and Adjustment. To bring the manhole cover to the correct elevation, the top section of each manhole shall be constructed of pre-cast concrete grade adjustment rings. These rings shall be not less than six inches (6") wide and furnished in heights to allow for two inch (2") adjustments. Grade adjustment with rings shall be eight inches {8") maximum and two inches (2") minimum. All rings shall be grouted in place. Finish Grade and Adjustment HOPE Alternate . High-density polyethylene grade rings may also be used to bring manhole cover to correct elevation. Grade rings shall be molded from HOPE as defined in ASTM Specification 01248-84. Available thicknesses are 1.25", 1.50", 2.00" 4.00" and a sloped thickness .75" x 1.50". When this alternate is used, pavement slope should be matched suing one or more sloped rings. Manufacturer's reference-Ludtech, Inc. Manhole Stubs. All pipe stubs required form manholes are shown on the Drawings. Stubs shall extend approximately 24" from the outside face of the manhole and shall be capped or plugged with manufactured fittings to form a watertight installation. 3.06 Connection to Existing Sewer Facilities. Connections to existing sewer facilities where live flows exist shall be made only after prior consultation with and receipt of written permission from the Engineer. No bypass of sewage to the surface will be allowed in the completion of this connection . Connections shall be made as shown on the Drawings. All connections between pipes of different materials shall be made with approved manufactured connectors . 3.07 Protection of Water Supplies. Sewer lines shall be located a minimum of ten feet (10') horizontally from existing or proposed water mains. Where the sewer line crosses above the waterline, or is less than eighteen inches (18") vertically below the invert of the water line, or is less than ten feet (1 0') horizontally from the water main, the sewer line shall be made impervious by either of the methods listed below: A . The sewer pipe shall be reinforced with a concrete encasement. The encasement shall be at least six inches (6") thick on all sides of the sewer pipe and extend ten feet (10') on either side of the water main. Use three No.4 rebar the length of the encasement. B. Install one piece of C-900 PVC pipe centered over the waterline. C. Install a grout collar over the two sewer joints on either side of the water crossi ng. The grout collar shall be around the entire perimeter of the joint. If clearance is less than 12 inches vertically, the space between the water and sewer mains sha ll be filled by 3000 psi concrete. In all cases, bedding material shall be used to prevent any settling of the higher pipe. 3.08 Service Connections. Customer service connections shall be installed in accordance with the details set forth on the construction Drawings. After the service connection is i nstalled, th e end shall be ptugged watertight with a manufactured plug and marked with a stake except as shown otherwise on the Drawings. C'\Oocumenls and Sel!Wlga\Richard C8t1ai\Local SeHin;s.\Temporary Internet F~es\OLK26102560 -SAffiTARV SEW£RLINES lid docC:\Documenls and Settin;s.\Richard Carteo\l.oall SeltJngs\Temporary Internet Files\OLK26102560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES atd doc 02560-6 c 0 D 0 0 [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 J !I 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 D n 4.00 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 4.01 Alignment and Grade. Sewer pipelines wilt be checked by the Engineer to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred after the trench has been backfilled. The test will be as follows: A light will be flashed between manholes, or if the manholes have not as yet been constructed, between the locations of the manholes, by means of a flashlight. If the illuminated interior of the pipeline shows poor alignment, displaced pipe, earth or other debris in the pipe, or any other kind of defect, the defects determined by the Engineer shall be remedied by the Contractor at his own expense. Test will be repeated after completion of backfilling and any poor alignment, displaced pipe, or other defects determined by the Engineer, shall be corrected. 4.02 Leakage Test. Sewerlines shall be tested using a low pressure air test only; water tests will not be allowed. Only after the sanitary sewers, including appurtenances and sanitary laterals have been installed, backfilled and cleaned, shall the Contractor proceed with an air test on the installed facilities. A. Low Pressure Air Test Procedure. The section of sewerline to be tested should be flushed and cleaned prior to conducting the low pressure air test. This serves to clean out any debris, wet the pipe, and produce more consistent results. Isolate the section of sewerline to be tested by means of inflatable stoppers or other suitable test plugs. One of the plugs should have an inlet tap, or other provision for connecting a hose to a portable air control source. If the test section is below the groundwater level, determine the height of the ground water above the spring line of the pipe at each end of the test section and compute the average. For every foot of groundwater above the pipe spring line, increase the gauge test pressure by 0.43 pounds per square inch. Connect the air hose to the inlet tap and a portable air control source. The air equipment should consist of necessary valves and pressure gates to control the rate at which air flows into the test section and to enable monitoring of the air pressure within the test section. Also, the testing apparatus should be equipped with a pressure relief device to avoid the possibility of loading the test section with the full capacity of the compressor. Add air slowly to the test section until the pressure inside the pipe is raised to 5.0 psig greater than the average back-pressure of any groundwater that may be over the pipe. After a pressure of 5.0 psig is obtained, regulate the air supply so that the pressure is maintained between 4.5 and 5.0 psig (above the average ground water back pressure) for a period of two minutes. This allows the air temperature to stabilize in equilibrium with the temperature of the pipe walls. The pressure will normally drop slightly until temperature equilibrium is obtained. Determine the rate of air loss by the time/pressure drop method. After the two- minute air stabilization period, the air supply is disconnected and the test pressure allowed to decrease to 4.5 psig. The time required for the test pressure to drop from 4.5 psig to 4.0 psig is determined by means of a stopwatch and this time interval is then compared to the required time in the attached table to determine if the rate of air loss is within the allowable time limit. If the time is C·\Documenls and Senings\Richard Cartar\LDCBI Satlings\Tempo111ry lnlemel F~es\OLK26\D2560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES std.docC:IDocuments end Senings\Richard Cartar\LOCIII Sailings\ Temporary lnlamel Filas\OLK26'iC2560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES sld.doc 02560-7 equal to or greater than the times indicat ed in the tables, the pipeline shall be deemed acceptable. MINIMUM DURATION FOR AIR TEST PRESSURE DROP PiQe Size Time Inches mm. Minutes 4 100 2Yz 6 150 4 8 200 5 10 225 6Yz 12 305 7Yz 15 380 9Yz Upon completion of the test, open the bleeder valve to allow air to escape. Plugs should not be removed until all air pressure i n the test section has been released. During t hi s time, no one should be a llowed in the trench or manhole while the pipe is being decompressed. Air test shall also include service lines and appurtenances. 4 .03 Manhole Inspection . During the construction of the manholes, the Contractor shall, in accordance with good practice, ensure that no earth, sand, rocks or other foreign material exists on the joint surfaces during assembly of the section . The Engineer shall check each manhole to determine whether the manhole ful fitls the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. A. B .. Visual Examination. The Engineer sha ll visually check each manhole, both exterior and interior, for flaws, cracks, holes, or other inadequacies that might affect the operation or watertight integrity of the manhole. Should any inadequacies be found , the Contractor, at his own expense, shall make any repairs deemed necessary by the Engineer. Leakage Test. Al l manholes shall be tested for leakage and all tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. The leakage test shall be conducted prior to backfilling around the manhole and shall be carried out in the following manner: 1. Stubouts , manhole boots and pipe plugs shall be secured to prevent movement while the vacuum is drawn. 2. 3 . Installation and operation of vacuum equi pment and indicating devices shall be in accordance with equipment specifications for which performance information has been prov ided by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. A measured vacuum of 1 0" of mercury shall be established in the manhole. The time for the vacuum to drop to 9" of mercury shall be recorded. C :\OoaJments end S.UingsiRichaRI Carterllocal Settings\Tempon11y lnlemel F .. s\Ol.K26102560 -SANITARY SEWI!'RUNES skl.docC:\Oocurnenls and Sellings\RidlaRI Carlerllocal SeWngs\Te rnporary lnlemel F~esiOI.K2fi\02560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES 5ld doc 02560-8 0 0 0 [J u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 .I 0 u u 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D 0 0 D n 4. 5. 6. Acceptance standards for leakage shall be established from the elapsed time for a negative pressure change from 1 0" to 9" of mercury. The maximum allowable leakage rate for a 4' diameter manhole shall be in accordance with the following: MANHOLE DEPTH MINIMUM ELAPSED TIME FOR A PRESSURE CHANGE OF 1 INCH Hg ; 1 0 ft. or less 60 seconds > 10ft. but< 15ft. 75 seconds > 15ft. but< 25ft. 90 seconds For manholes 5' in diameter, add an additional 15 seconds and for manholes 6' in diameter, add an additional 30 seconds to the time requirements for 4-foot diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the test, necessary repairs shall be made and the vacuum test and repairs shall be repeated until the manhole passes the test or the manhole shall be tested in accordance with the standard exfiltration test and rated accordingly. If a manhole joint mastic is completely pulled out during the vacuum test, the manhole shall be disassembled and the mastic replaced. 4.04 Deflection Test for Non-Rigid Pipe. The maximum allowable pipe deflection for a completely backfilled, non-rigid sewer pipe shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the nominal internal pipe diameter. Deflections in non-rigid pipe shall be checked by measurement or by pulling a mandrel with the minimum allowable diameter through the pipe. The minimum allowable diameter shall be equal to the minimum interior diameter of the pipe, as specified in the applicable portions of the ASTM Standard Specifications or the pipe manufacturer's recommendations, minus five percent of the minimal interior diameter of the pipe. Those sections of non-rigid pipe with deflections greater than the maximum allowable five percent shall not be acceptable and the Contractor will remove and replace these sections at his own expense. Deflection tests will be run if in the opinion of the Engineer testing is warranted. The program for testing shall be mutually determined by the Engineer and the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools and equipment necessary to make the tests and to perform any work incidental thereto. 4.05 Pressure Testing of Force Main. Make pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pipe. Furnish all necessary equipment and material, make all taps in the pipe as required, and conduct the tests. The tests shall be conducted between valved sections of the pipeline, or as approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will monitor the tests. C·\Oocuments and SeUings\Rictlanl Canao\Local SeUings\Temporary lnlemel Flles\OlK2611l2560 -SANITARY SEWERLINES sld.doeC'\Documenla and Sallings\RJchanl Car1er\Local Salllngs\Temporary lnlemal Flles\OLK2611l2560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES ald.doc 02560-9 Furnish the following equipment and material for the tests: Amount 2 2 1 1 Description Approved graduated contai ners Pressure gauges Hydraulic force pump approved by the Engineer Additional %-inch pres sure tap for Engineer's test gauge Suitable hose and suction pipe as required Conduct the tests after the trench has been partially backfilled with the joints left exposed for inspection, or when completely backfilled, as permitted by the Engineer. Where any section of pipe is provided with concrete reaction blocking , do not make the pressu re test until at least 5 days have elapsed after the concrete thrust blocking is installed . If high-early cement is used for the concrete thrust blocking, the time may be cut to 2 days. Conduct pressure test in the following manner, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer: after the trench has been backfilled or partially backfilled as hereinbefore specified, fill the pipe with water, expelling all air during the filling . The test pressure shall be 1 Y:z times normal working pressure at the point of rawest elevation of the test gauge. A. Duration B. c. 1. The duration of each pressure test shall be 2 hours, unless otherwise directed by t he Engineer. Procedure 1. Slowly fill the pipe with water and all ow to stand for 24 hours. Expel all air from the pipe. Allow and maintain the specified test pressure by con tinuous pumping if necessary for the entire test period . The test pressure shall be calculated for the point of lowest elevation, or as specified by the Engineer. The pump suction shall be in a barrel or similar device, or metered so that the amount of water required to maintain the test pressure may be measured accurately. 2. Before the line is pressurized, the Engineer shall verify that all necessary ma in line valves are open or closed with regard to the section of line being tested . In addition , the Eng ineer shall verify that all hydrant valves are open. Leakage 1. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water necessary to hold the specified test pressure for the duration of the test period . No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage Is greater than t he number of gallons per hour as determined by the following formula : C\Oocumenls and Sebings\Richard Cerleo\Local Settlngs\Temporal)' Internet nea\01.1<26102560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES sld.docC10oa.omenta and Se!Ungs\Richard Cart8111.DCIII Settings\ Temporary lntamet Files\OLK26102560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES ald .doc 02560-10 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 [1 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 [} J n 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D n 4.06 L= ND.JP 7400 In the above formula: L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour N = Number of joints in the length of pipe tested D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches P = Average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. D. The pressure testing of water service lines shall follow the same procedure as outlined in the section. In all cases, however, the corporation stop, service line and curb stop shall be visually inspected under full test pressure and any leaks fixed. E. Correction of Excessive Leakage 1. Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that allowed, locate and repair the defective joints or pipe until the leakage of a subsequent test is within the specified allowance. Televising Main. All sewer connection lines eight inches {8") or larger shall be televised. The tape shall have a running footage meter showing the exact footage from the entry manhole. Tapes shall be provided with a log showing the location of all defects and service lines. 5.00 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT See Bid Schedule End of Section C:\Oocumenls and Settinga\Ricllard Car1erllocal Settings\Temporary lnlamel Files\OLK26102560 • SANITARY SEWERLINES lld.docC:\Oocomenls and Semngs\Richard Carter\Local Sellings\Temporary lnlemel Filea\OLK26102560 ·SANITARY SEWERLINES lld.doc 02560-11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 02570 SHALLOW UTILITIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Scope. Work under this section shall include furnishing all materials, labor and tools necessary to perform all installation, cleaning and testing of all electrical, telephone, gas and TV cable utilities and appurtenances specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere. Section 02221 -Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction Section 02222-Embedment and Base Course Aggregate 1.03 Protection of Work. All materials shall be carefully handled, stored and protected in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials. At no time shall such materials be dropped or dumped into trench. Precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign matter from entering the pipe and fittings prior to and during installation. Place no debris, tools, clothing or other materials in the pipe during installation. 1.04. Coordination of Work. Contractor to coordinate all work to be performed by utility company. 2.00 MATERIALS This item covers the types of materials that will be allowed for the construction and installation of utility lines. All materials used shall be new, of the best quality available and conform with applicable standards as indicated herein. 2.01 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. Not permitted. 2.02 Materials Typically Supplied and Installed by Utility Company A. Gas line. B. Electrical cable, transformers and secondary junction boxes. C. Telephone cable. D. TV cable. 2.03 Materials Typically Supplied by Contractor. A. PVC conduit-Schedule 40. specs\02570.std 2-01 02570-1 3.00 METHODS AND PROCEDURES 3.01 General. All work shall be done i n strict accordance with utility company requirements and with these technical specifications. Where conflicts occur, the utility company requirements shall govern. 4.00 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT See Bid Schedule specs\02570.std 2-01 End of Section 02570-2 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q J J Ll 0 0 j fl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 1 SECTION 02612 HOT BITUMINOUS PAVING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Scope. Work to be performed under this section shall include all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous items necessary to furnish and install one or more courses of bituminous mixture constructed on a prepared surface in accordance with the Specifications or as shown on the Drawings. The finished product shall be in close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Drawings or as established in the field. 1.02 Reference Standards. All work is to be performed in accordance with the "Colorado Department of Transportation -Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction", latest revision Section 400 and as modified herein. The reference Specifications are not reproduced in their entirety. 1.03 Submittals. A. Mix Design. Provide complete mix design by independent testing laboratory, including certifications of all material compliance. The job-mix formula for each mixture shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size, a single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate, and a single temperature for the mixture at the discharge point of the plant. Submitted mix design shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer in the State of Colorado. B. Tack Coat. Certification of material. 1.04 Coordination. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor under this section to coordinate this work with all other trades involved in the project. No paving work shall be started until the work of others has progressed to a point that a definable area can be paved; patching, blending, butting, etc. of work under this section will not be allowed except as required as part of the normal paving operation. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 Composition of Mixture. Reference Section 403.02 (further reference 401.02 through 401.06) Section 702, Section 703, and Section 704, with revisions and additions as follows: A. Aggregate. The proposed job-mix gradation shall be in accordance with Table 703-03 Grading SX. The weight of lime, if used, shall be included in the total weight of the material passing the No. 200 sieve. The restricted zone boundaries given in the Asphalt Institute's Superpave Series No.2 (SP-2) Manual, Appendix Bare to be used as guidelines in mix design development. However, the job-mix gradation is not required to pass above or below the restricted zone boundaries. For Gradings S, SX, and SG, a percentage of the aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have at least two mechanically induced fractured faces when tested in accordance with Colorado Procedure 45. This percentage will be specified in C: \Oocument:s and Settings\Richard Carter\Local Setting~\Temp o rary Internet Files\0Ll<26\02612 -HSP .S TANDARO~d.~-r: 4-04 02612-1 2.02 B. c. D. E. Table 403-1 . The angularity of the fine aggregate shall be a minimum of 45.0% when determined according to CP L-5113, Method A. Aggregate samples representing each aggregate stockpile shall be non-plastic if the percent of aggregate passing the Number 4 sieve is greater than or equal to 10 percent by weight of the individual aggregate sample. Plasticity will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T 90 . The material shall not contain clay balls, vegetable matter, or other deleterious substances. The aggregate for Grading S, SX, and SG shall have a percentage of wear of 45 or less when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96. Bituminous Material (binder). Asphalt cement to be Performance Grade (PG) 58- 22. Design Gyrations. N (design) equafs 75. Contractor to provide to the Engineer, a job mix composition meeting this section. Submittal shall include testing results suffiCient to show compliance. Testing shall be under the certification of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. The mix design shall have been completed within the preceding 12 months. Contractor may use an anti-stripping additive from the current COOT approved list of additives. The Contractor shall prepare a quality control plan outlining the steps to be taken to minimize segregation of HBP. This plan shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to beginning the paving operations. When the Engineer determines that segregation is unacceptable, the paving shall stop and the cause of segregation corrected before paving operations will be allowed to resume. The Hot Bituminous Pavement shall not contain reclaimed material. Prime Coat. Reference Section 702 .02. A. Prime coat shall be MC-70 (ASTM 02026) 2.03 Tack Coat. Reference Section 702.03. A. Tack coat to be SS-1h (ASTM 0977) or CSS-1h (AASHTO M208). 2.04 Pavement Marking. Reference Section 708 .05 A. Glass beads requ i red. 2.05 Tables. The design mix for hot bituminous pavement shall conform to the following (Table 403-1 ): C!\Documento and s~ttings\Richard Cart~r\l.ocal Setti119•\T~mporary Int~rnet Flles\OIJ(26\02612 • HBP StAIIOARO.doc 4~ 02612-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 _) CJ J [) u [1 0 J n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 l ,. TABLE403-1 Test Value For Grading Property Method S() SG() SX() Patching Air Voids, percent at: N (initial) (for information only] CPL 5115 N (desiQn) 3.5 -4 .5 3 .5-4.5 3.5-4.5 3.5-4.5 Lab Compaction (Revolutions): N (Initial) (for Information only) CPL 5115 0 D 75 0 N (desiQn) Stability, minimum CPL 5106 28 Aggregate Retained on the 4.75 mm (No.4} Sieve with at least 2 Mechanically Induced CP45 D D 70 0 fractured faces. % minimum Accelerated Moisture Susceptibility Tensile CPL 5109 Strength Ratio (Lollman), minimum Method B 80 80 80 80 Minimum Dry Split Tensile Strength, kPa (psi) CPL 5109 205 (30) 205 (30} 205 (30} 205 (30) Method B Grade or Asphalt Cement, Top Layer PG_ PG_ PG 58·22 PG_ Grade of Asphalt Cement, Layers below Top PG_ PG_ PG 58·22 PG_ Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) % See Table See Table See Table See Table minimum CP48 403·2 403·2 403-2 403-2 I Voids Filled with Asphalt (VFA), % AI MS·2 D D 65-80 D i I Dust to Asphalt Rallo 0 .6 -1 .2 0.6 -1.2 0.6 -1.2 0.6-1.2 Fine Gradation CPSO 0.8 -1.6 0 .8-1 .6 0.8-1.6 0.8-1.6 Coarse Gradation Note: AI MS-2 = Asphalt Institute Manual Series 2 Note: The current version of CPL 5115 is available from the Region Materials Engineer. Note: Mixes with gradations having less than 40% passing the 4.75 mm (No.4) sieve shall be approached with caution because of constructability problems. Note: Gradations for mixes with a nominal maximum aggregate size of one-inch or larger are considered a coarse gradation if they pass below the maximum density line at the #4 screen. Gradations for mixes with a nominal maximum aggregate size of% inch or smaller are considered a coarse gradation if they pass below the maximum density line at the #8 screen. C: \ Do .;ument' •nd St:t ti ng.:s\Ri chard Carter\ Local Set. ti ngs\ Tempera ry Int.ez:net Files \OLK2 E \02 612 -HBP STAN CARD, doc 4 .()4 02612-3 TABLE 403-2 Minimum Voids In the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) Nominal -·oeslgn Air Voids - Maximum Size•, mm (Inches) 3.0% 4.0% 5.0% 25.0 (1) 11 12 13 19 .0 (o/.) 12 13 14 12.5 (%) 13 14 15 * The Nominal Maximum Size is defined as one sieve larger than the first sieve to retain more than 10%. -Interpolate specified VMA values for design air voids between those listed. ••• Extrapolate specified VMA values for production air voids beyond those listed. 3 .00 METHODS AND PROCEDURES Reference Section 403.03 (furthe r reference 401 .07 through 401.20) and Section 407.04 through 407.08. A. Maxi mum compacted pavement depth per pass to be 3". B . Prim e not requi red unless indicated on Drawings. Prepared base course or subgrade surfaces receiving pavement courses shall be primed at Contractor's expense if the surface has deteriorated, due to traffic, weather or time lapse between surface preparation and ptacement of bituminous materials, such that in the opinion of the Engineer, use of p ri me coat is required. C. Tack coat required between lifts, on a ll abutting old pavement surfaces and for overlays on existing pavements u nless waived by Engineer. Application rate shall be 0.05 to 0.1 0 gallons per square yard diluted. Dilution shall be one part tack emulsion to one part water. All cut asphalt surfaces that are to butt new pavement sections shall be tacked with a liberal application of tack coat prior to paving. 3.01 Compaction. The plant mix bituminous pavement shall be compacted by rolling. The number, weight and type of rollers furnished shall be that which is sufficient to obtain the required density while the mixtu re is i n a workable condition . Compaction shall begin immediately after the mixture is placed and be continuous until the required density is obtained. When the mixture surface temperature fafls below 185 degrees F, no further compaction effort will be permitted unless approved. C: \DocuftiOnto and Settingo\Ric:hard Carter\ Local Settingo\T.,..porary Internet F1les\OLK26\02'12 -HBP STANOARO.doc 4..()4 02612-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 J 0 0 J n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 All roller marks shall be removed with the finish rolling. Use of vibratory rollers with the vibrator on will not be permitted during surface course final rolling and will not be permitted on any rolling on bridge decks covered with waterproofing membrane. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92 percent to 96 percent of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to AASHTO T209. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. Along forms, curbs, headers, walls and all other places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or is in any way defective, shall be immediately removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture, and compacted to conform with the surrounding area. 3.02 Surface Tolerances. Section 401.20. No skin patching will be allowed. 3.03 Pavement Marking. Reference COOT Section 627 and as contained in the Contract Documents. 4.00 FIELD QUALITY CONTROUASSURANCE 4.01 Inspection and Testing. Contractor is solely responsible for Quality Control. They must take whatever means they deem necessary to assure the quality of the product. Owner will provide Quality Assurance testing. Contractor to cooperate fully with all persons engaged in testing. 4.02 Densitv Testing and Control. A. See Section 3.01, Compaction, above. B. Field Testing. Testing for density during compaction operations to be done using nuclear density methods. C. D. Frequency of Testing. Minimum of one (1) test every 10,000 square feet or as directed by Engineer. Retesting. In the event of failure to meet compaction criteria, Contractor shall re- compact and/or replace defective work at direction of Engineer. All retesting to be paid for by Contractor, and to be performed by testing firm approved by the Engineer. 5.00 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT See Bid Schedule End of Section C : \Document: and S•ttings\~iChAr<i Carter\l.ocai Settingo\Tempo rary Internet Filu\CLK26\02612 • HBP STANDARD.dX 4-04 02612-5 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 02626 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTIER, SIDEWALK, CURBWALK AND DRIVEWAY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 Scope. This Work shall include furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and miscellaneous items necessary for the construction of concrete curb, gutter, sidewalk, handicap ramps, driveway or any combination thereof, all in accordance with these Specifications and in close conformity with the lines, grades, and typical sections as shown on the Construction Drawings or established in the field. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere. Section 02222-Embedment and Base Course Aggregate 2.00 MATERIALS The materials shall conform to the requirements specified in the following: Section 02222-Embedment and Base Course Aggregate 2.01 Joint Filler. Pre-molded, preformed conforming to AASHTO M213 to the full depth of tile section. 2.02 Structural Concrete. 28-day compressive strength of 3,750 psi. See Section 03300 for complete Specification. 2.03 Fibermesh. Fibermesh additive at the rate of 1112 pounds/cubic yard shall be used with all concrete. Use shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.00 METHODS AND PROCEDURES 3.01 Excavation. Excavation shall be made to the required depth and width to permit the installation and bracing of the forms. The foundations shall be shaped and compacted to a firm even surface conforming to the section shown on the Construction Drawings. Material determined to be unsuitable or non-compact by the Engineer will be removed and replaced. 3.02 Forms. Forms shall be wood or metal and shall extend for the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warp and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the concrete without springing. Bracing and staking of forms shall be such that the forms remain in alignment both horizontally and vertically until removal. Satisfactory slip forms may be used when approved. Use of curbing machine will be permitted providing line and grade tolerances can be met. Steel plates that can be shaped to the desired radius shall be used on all short radii. Open joints shall be formed with a steel separator plate conforming to the section being installed. Oil and clean all forms prior to placement of concrete. 3.03 Mixing and Placing. The foundations shall be thoroughly moistened immediately prior to the placing of the concrete. Compaction of the concrete shall have thorough consolidation 02626-1 specsl02626.standan:t achieved by tamping, spading, vibrating or other acceptable methods. Forms shall be left in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to prevent deformation due to removaJ. Upon re moval of the forms , the curb face shall be immediately finished to a uniform surface. In the case of matching existing concrete finishes, an approved method shall be used. 3.04 Finishing. The surface shall be floated with a wood or magnesium float and given a broom finish. No plastering of the surface will be permitted. All outside edges of s labs and joints shall be rounded to a Y4-inch radius. Broom marks to be perpendicul ar to traffic or pedestrian flow for installation of sidewalk or concrete flatwork. Broom marks to be parallel to traffic flow for installation of curb and gutter. 3.05 Joints. Expansion joints shall be made using Yz" pre-molded expansion joint. Construction joints, using Yz" pre-molded joint filler, shall be placed at the end of a day's run or du ring a day's work if there is more than a 30 minute delay in concrete delivery. Construction joints shall be formed around all appurtenances such as manholes , utility poles, adjacent structures, etc., extending into or abutting the Work. Pre-molded expansion joint filler Y4" thick shall be installed in these joints. Expansion joint filler shall be installed between concrete sidewalks and any fixed structure. Dummy joints (contraction joints) shall be made by a forming tool to a depth of Y4 of the section with a width of Ya" to W'. Open joints shall be made with a separator plate, Ya" to Y4" in width. Dummy joints in lieu of open joints will be permitted with use of curbing machine. Joint spacing shall be located as follows: A. B. C. Expansion joints: Every 100' on center; at end of corner radius; at driveway sections; as shown on Construction Drawings. Construction joints: As required d uring constructio n ; at appurtenances a nd structu res through or abutting Work. Dummy or open joints: Every 1 0' on center for curb and gutter and curbwalk; equal to width of sidewalk for sidewalk; as s hown on Construction Drawings. 3.06 Curing . Immediately upon compl etion of the finishing , concrete shall be moistened and kept m oist for a minimum of 72 hours. In lieu of wetting, use of a membrane-curing compound, at the direction of the Engineer, will be permitted . 3.07 Backfilling. After the concrete has set sufficiently, the areas behind the curb shall be backfilled to the required elevations and shall be thoroughly compacted in accordance with Section 02200-Earthwork. 4 .00 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 4 .01 Tolerances. All vertical surfaces shall not vary more than W' in 10' in the horizon tal direction . Surface deviation shall not exceed%" when measured with a 16' straight edge. 4 .02 Concrete Strength. The Geo-technical Engineer may take field samples for purposes of testing concrete strength . All substandard strength concrete shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. 02626-2 specs\02626 .slaodard [J 0 n 0 n 0 [! f] rJ [} J 0 0 0 [] 0 0 r 1 w II [ P.IIIPUIIIS 9C:9C:Q\s:Jads 0 ~>9G9G0 0 0 0 0 c 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 UO!l!)8S JO PU3 ·a1npa4os P!8 aas 0 1N3VIIA 'v'd ON'v' 1N3W3~nSV3V\I oo·s 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 J 0 1. GENERAL SECTION 02861 DELINEATORS AND REFLECTORS 1.1. Scope. Work to be performed under this section shall include all labor, materials, equipment, tools and accessories required to furnish and install delineators and reflectors in accordance with Section 612 of the Colorado Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2005. End of Section 02861 1 of 1 C:IDoc:urnonlo oncl Solllngo1Ridlonl Cortoi\I.Oc:OISoblgt\Tomponuy 1-Fin\OLK2G'D2861· DohnHI<n oncl R.-.- G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J SECTION 03001 CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fonnwork, reinforcement, accessories, cast-in-place concrete, finishing and curling. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and erect concrete fonnwork in accordance with ACI 301, unless specified otherwise in this Section. B. Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance with ACI 301, unless specified otherwise in this Section or the structural General Notes on the structural drawings. C. Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, unless specified otherwise in this Section. D. Coordinate with Chemical Stain Manufacturer for all Architectural Concrete flatwork. Refer to Section 09900. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: PS I, C Grade Douglas Fir species; grade; sound, undamaged sheets with clean true edges. B. Lumber: Hem-Fir or Douglas Fir species; grade. C. Prefabricated Steel Type: 16-gauge, matched tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete. D. Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated materials, inside OJIMtl OM-GRM SECTION 03001 CONCRETE surface treated with release agent, of size required. E. Form Tics: Snap-off metal type of cone type. Page 2 F . Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will no t stain concrete or impair natural bonding characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. G. Formed Construction Joints for Slab-on-Grade: extruded plastic, tongue and groove type profile, knockout holes to receive doweling. H. 03001.07 Slab Edge Joint Filler: ASTM 01751, premolded asphal t ic board, 1/2 inch thick . 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, deformed billet steel bars , plain finish. Yield grade as indicated on Structural general notes. B . Welded Steel Wire Fabric : ASTM A 185, plain type, in flat sheets , plain finish . C. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for support of reinforcing. D . Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315 . 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1-11 Portland type . B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates : ASTM C33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. D. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C494. E . Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion manufactured by Sika Chemical Co. or Euclid Chemical Company. F. Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed compound consisting of non-meta ll ic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. G. Water Reducing Agent: ASTM C494. 0)001 OM.(;RM 0 0 0 0 f1 [} [J rl f} 0 [j 0 [J 0 J [J tJ [1 r 1 0 l 0 ] 0 D 0 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] SECTION 03001 CONCRETE 2.04 COMPOUNDS, HARDENERS AND SEALERS Page 3 A. Curing Compound: Exterior: Clear Styrene Butadiene Curing and Sealing compound. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX 03001.01 Concrete Exterior Flatwork: Strength: 4500 Cement Content: 6.5 Water/cement Ratio: 0.5 Slump: 2 to4 Admixtures: WRA Max. Aggr. Size: 0.75 Air: 6 to 8 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK ERECTION Interior Flatwork 4000 5.5 0.5 2 to4 WRA 0.75 Footings 3000 2 to4 WRA 0.75 A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. C. Apply form release agent to formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, prior to placing for accessories and reinforcement. D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are effected by agent. E. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter. 3.02 INSERTS, EMBEDDED COMPONENTS AND OPENINGS A. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. fi)IHII IIM-GRM Foundation Wall and Grade Beams 2 to 4 WRA 4000 0.75 SECTION 0300 I CONCRETE B . Install concrete accessories straight, level and plumb. C. Place joint filler at perimeter of slab. 3 .03 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Place reinforcement, supported and secured against displacement. Page4 B. Ensure reinforcing is clean, free of loose scale, dirt or other foreign coatings. 3 .04 PLACING CONCRETE A . Separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with 112 inch thick joint filler, extended form bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface. B. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control and construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. Sec structural general notes for joint spacing. C. Screed slabs-on-grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 114 inch in 10 feet. 3 .05 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Remove formwork progress ively in a manner wh ich wiJI not damage concrete. 3 .06 SLAB FINISHING A . F inish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and/or as required by Section 09900 for Architectural Concrete. B . Light Broom finish on e xterior slabs a nd all inte rior slabs designated for Architectural Concrete. C. Slope exterior slabs I /8 inch in I foot for proper drainage. 3 .08 CURING A. Apply s ealer on floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's OJOCII OM.GRM 0 n n 0 [1 0 0 [J 0 IJ 0 0 0 [J u [J 0 u 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 SECTION 03001 CONCRETE instructions. B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying. Page 5 C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. D. Coordinate curing methods with Section 03395. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and testing will be performed by firm appointed in accordance with Section 01001. B. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cubic yards of each c1ass of concrete placed each day. C. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, and be cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. D. One slump test will be taken for each truck. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details and elevations, as directed by Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION O},~JIIlM.(jRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~] D 0 D Q 0 ~1 u 0 0 0 J J ] SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC -Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.3 MIX TESTS A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780. B. Testing ofGrout Mix: In accordance with ASTM CIOI9. I .4 QUALITY CONTROL A. All work shall conform to Section 01410 Waste Recycling. PART 2 ·PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 04100.01 Mortar A. Portland Cement: ASTM CI50, Type I, gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM Cl44, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, using gray cement, normal strength. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N, using the Property Method. B. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C270, TypeS, using the Property Method. C. Pointing Mortar for Masonry: ASTM C270, Type N, using the Property Method; with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight. '1 .. Hncnn'.&tp.ral ~OM m li.nlcmml Mna Statlud CCJR ltmmoacaun·Srn''Sf'C'CifK"aiiODJ l·~~lm UU.Okt.l.d11c SECTION 04100 Page2 0 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 0 D. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime, and two pa rts graded n (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add a luminum tris tcaratc, ca lcium stearate, or a mmoni um l stearate equal to 2 percent of Portland cement by weight. .... 2.3 MORTAR MIXING A . Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quan titi es needed for immediate usc in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not usc anti-freeze compounds lo lower the freezing point of mortar. 2.4 GROUT MIXES 04 1 00 .02 G rout A . Bond Beams, Lintels , Engineered Masonry: 3000 psi strength a l 28 days; 7-8 inches slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. 2.5 GROUT MIXING A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Do not usc anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing poi nt of grout. PART 3-EXECUTION 3 . J INSTALLATION A . Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C780. Install grout in accordance with ACI301. B . Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. Do not displace reinforcement. END OF SECTION .inct\n~&t\.'OCI6M U...tcw..w M na Shrl . en.t COR" ltC!IUnil.aft\ScW'Srcaf-*--1-!fJ...ONW IM Ut.l.('ji\Uuc' n n [1 rJ 0 [} r ' J l J 0 0 c u [) [J lJ rJ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 0 0 J 0 J 0 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 ·GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, baseplates, plates, anchor bolts, and grouting under baseplates. B. Section 03001: Placement of anchors for casting into concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, connections, and welded connections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC ·Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. Perform design of connections not fully detailed on structural drawing under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado. PART 2 ·PRODUCTS 05120.01 Structural Steel 05120.03 Tubular Steel 05120.04 Tubular Steel Column 05120.07 Steel Angle 05120.08 Steel Lintel 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: Refer to Structural General Notes B. Structural Tubing: ASTM ASOO, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. F. Welding Materials: A WS D 1.1; type required for materials being welded. 051~CJS DM-GRM SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Page2 G. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of7,000 at 28 days. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type J. red oxide. 2.02 F ABRlCATION A. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds . Grind exposed welds smooth. 2.03 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 2 . B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. C. Paint all exposed and visible structural steel member as per Section 09900 . PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that field conditions arc acceptable and arc ready to receive work. 3.2 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain framing in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. B . Field weld components indicated on Drawings and/or shop drawings. C. Do not field cut or alter struc tural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. D . After erection , prime welds, ab rasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. E. Grout under baseplates. OS 1205 IIM.QIIM n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 {] fJ [} [) 0 J r-} L 0 u I J ] 0 0 ~ Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be pcrfonned under provisions of Section 01001. END OF SECTION 0512115 IIM.(;RM Page 3 l ] 0 0 0 0 0 u D 0 0 ~ 0 0 n a 0 B 0 SECTION 053IO STEEL DECKING PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel deck and accessories; framing for openings up to and including 18 inches; bearing plates and angles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, support locations, projections, openings and reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DECK 05310.01 Metal Decking 05310.02 Metal Roof Deck A. Manufacturers: I. Vulcraft Roof Deck Style F. 2. Vulcraft Conform Style .6. 3. Or equals. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade B Structural Quality. C. Bearing Plates, Angles: ASTM A36 steel, unfinished. D. Welding Materials: AWS Dl.l. E. Touch-Up Primer: Red oxide type. F. Flute Closures: Closed cell profiled to fit tight to the decking. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Non-cellular Decking: Sheet steel, configured per structural notes. I. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inches. 11'3 Ill DM· GRM SECTION 05310 STEEL DECKING 2. Side Joints: Lapped. 3. Flute Sides: Plain vertical face . B. Fabricate pre-coated steel w ith coating side down . Page2 C. Metal Closure Strips, We t Conc rete Stops, Cant Strips, Cover Plates, and Related Accessories: 22-gau ge sheet steel. D. Roof Sump Pan: 14 -gauge sheet steel. E. Weld Washers : Mild steel, uncoated . PART 3 EXECUTION 3 .1 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal decking in accordance with Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Form Decks, Roof Decks. B. Bear decking on steel supports with 1-1 /2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level. C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with fusion welds through weld washers J2 inches oc maximum, pa ralJel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute. D. Weld in accordance with A WS D 1.1. E. Weld male/female s ide laps at 18 inches oc maximum . F. Reinforce steel deck openings from 6 to 18 inches in size with 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angles. Place angles perpendicu lar to nutes~ extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fus ion weld and/or mechanically attach to deck a t each flute. G . Install 6 inch ( 150 mm) minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as decki ng , where deck changes direction, 12 inches oc maximum. H . Install wet concrete stops at deck edge upturned to top surface of slab . I. Install sheet s teel cl osures and angle flashings to c lose openings between deck a nd walJs, columns , and openings. J. Install single row of foam flute closures above walls and partitions perpend icular to deck flutes . K. Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Attach at eacb deck fl ute. OHICIUM·GRM r· t 1 n 0 n {_I r; D II {j 0 [} [J [I ,. l t ! u f"' ~...I .J rl u u r1 ....... n 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 [J [] ~ J 0 J SECTION 0531 0 STEEL DECKING L. Place metal cant strips in position and attach. Page 3 M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, weld blooms, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up prime paint. N. Paint all exposed decking as per Section 09900. END OF SECTION OSliO OM· GRM 1 0 a 0 0 0 0 J( 0 D rl ~1 a 0 0 0 0 J 0 SECTION 05500 METAL F ABRJCA TIONS PART I GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 1.3 A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted. B. Steel stair frame of structural sections, with stair treads and landings. C. Balusters and hand-railing. D. Miscellaneous steel connector, bolts, attachment and trim. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design to stair assembly to support live load of 100 lb/sq ft with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 11240 of span. B. Design railing, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 250 lbs at any point or 25 pounds per foot without damage or permanent set. SUBMIITALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. B. Indicate welded connections using standard A WS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State ofColorado. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. 05500.06 Pipe Railing 05500.07 Pipe Handrail 05500.08 Pipe Guardrail I. Material 1-1/2" steel pipe railing. Refer to drawings for design. ASTM A53, Grade B, schedule 40 I'll diameter. B. 05500.09 Grating, rJ'ik-:n~hi\:!CIOft.fJ.S lbllkn'Enl Mna Shtlland COI'f Kmovatlod~.sp.Q(.,..io ... l·2ft...O't'(J,~OO liM..C.kM.d...: SECTION 05500 Page2 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.2 I . Manufacturer: Ohio Gratings; Inc . 5297 S. Sout hway S .W. Canton, Ohio 216-477-6760 2. Product: Aluminum dovetail ADT series -19 ADT 4 serrated surface, Galvaniz ed finish . C . 05400.03 Bolts Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 galvanized to ASTM AI 53 for galvanized members . D. Not used E. F. G. H. I . Welding Materials: AWS DJ.l. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC I 5, Type I , red oxide. 05500.37 ). 05586.0 1 W' S teel Picket: Refer to drawings for design . ASTM A53 , Grade B, schedule 40, ~square. Polished Aluminum Diamond Pl a te 1. Manufacturer All Metals Welding and Fabrication Co. Grand Junction, Colorado (970) 243 -6310 2 . Product Name: 3003 Tread Brite Polishe d Alum inum Gauge: .058 05586.02 Po lished Aluminum Bar Strip 1. Size: 1/8" thick x I '' Wide FABRICATION-GENERAL A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds . C . G ri nd exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush , and hairline . Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts, con sistent w ith design o f component. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication. F . Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings and railings to e ach other and to b uilding structure. ,Nincnn'dr-I&!~W..DS U.dnnmt ~1 "' SNI _. Cwt Mcnuta~1m:5rrc5rcafatauna 1-::!f..n-NfS$01'1 U._1.("tltN.da.- 0 0 D 0 0 0 n 10 0 0 [] t'l u u ~J ,..., LJ 0 j l' 0 0 0 J Q 0 J' D 0 0 [J 0 J 3 J J J J 0 SECTION 05500 Page 3 METAL FABRICATIONS G. Coordinate with structural drawings for stair opening and connections for stair support. 2.3 F ABRICA TJON -HAND-RAILING A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site. B. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. C. Accurately form components to suit stairs and landings, to each other and to building structure. 2.4 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Shop prime items with one coat. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Finish coat: see Section 09900 Paint.. ALL EXPOSED STEEL TO BE PAINTED. Color to be selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. VerifY that field conditions arc acceptable and arc ready to receive Work. B. Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep Work in alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads and provide temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components as indicated. Perform field welding in accordance with A WS D 1.1. D. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Paint all exterior exposed surfaces, color to be selected by Architect. END OF SECTION '\til~fal'~1106.0! lWIInnl'nC Mn. St.:ll--.1 Ctn lem.I'YIIiw'Spn:-'.Srcaf.c.-ictn I·U..Ot'l.,511l Ut.I.C,RM."'ac n ] a 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 1 0 u J ["11 _l D J [J SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART l-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural floor, wall, and roof framing; built-up structural members; prefabricated trusses; wall and roof sheathing; floor sheathing; preservative treatment. B. Roof curbs and cants; blocking in wall and roof openings; grounds; concealed wood blocking. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS Wood/Nailer (2 x 4) 2 x 6 Wood Blocking Preservative-treated lumber B. See documents and general notes for framing sizes. C. Non-structural Light Framing and Blocking; Douglas Fir species; #2 grade; 19 percent maximum moisture content. D. Pressure treated: All wood in contact with concrete or cementious material. OI"IKIIlM·GRM SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page2 2.2 2.3 2.4 PLYWOOD MA TERJALS Refer to Structural General Notes 061 00 .39B 3/4" P lywood A. Wall Sheathing: APA Structural I. Refer to structural Notes for additional information. B. Roof, Floor and Miscellaneous Sheathing: APA Structural I , Grade C ·D .. ACCESSORIES A . Fasteners (Nai ls, Screws, Bolts): Electro galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere. Brass plate screws or bolts as required for installation of redwood . B. Plate Connectors: Galvanized steel, die punched to achieve fastener configuration. C. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to wood, masonry or concrete. Bolt fasteners for anchorage to steel. D . Sill Flashing: 6 mil thick; clear polyethylene sheet. WOOD TREATMENT A . Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment Type): AWPA T reatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.30 percent retainage. PART 3 ·EXECUTION 3.1 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS 3 .2 A. Erect wood members in accordance with UBC code. B. Place members level and plumb. Place horizonta l members crown side up. C. Prov ide and coordinate blocking as shown on plans and a s required for installation and support of flash ings, specialties and equipment. D. Provide and install6-mit vapor over wood nailers prior to installat ion of wood decking. Lap all joints 4 inches minimum. S HEATHING A. Se c ure floor sheathing perpendicular to floor framing with end j oints staggered. Secure sheet edges over finn bearing. Attach sheathing with glue and screws. B. Secure wall sheathing perpendicular to wall studs, with ends staggered, over firm bearing. 4lii ii100M .<il!l\4 0 D n D ·o 0 () 0 n o· u n D [t u 0 0 ~ l .. J fl 0 0 J 0 ] 0 0 D 0 ~ D 0 Q J 0 0 fl J 0 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.3 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT Page 3 A. Site apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Treat site-sawn ends. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on untreated wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings. C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. 3.4 WOOD DECKING A. Cover nailers with 6-mil vapor barrier with 4-inch lap at joints prior to installation of decking. B. Secure floor decking perpendicular to nailers. No exposed fasteners. C. Fill and sand smooth all surface imperfections and holes for finish paint END OF SECTION 061000M.GRM a 0 J u ~ 3 0 u 0 0 1 a J 0 ] J TI 0 ;-l SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART I GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Finish carpentry items, other than shop manufactured casework; hardware and attachment accessones. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with AWl Quality Standards. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Custom Grade in accordance with A WI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent, #2 Pine species, with flat grain of quality capable of transparent finish. B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM-L-736; Custom Grade in accordance with A WI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent, White Oak species, with plain sawn grain of quality capable of transparent finish.] 2.2 FINISH MATERIALS A. Casework or Counter tops with High pressure Laminate Finish: A WI Custom Grade. I. Detail in accordance with drawings. 2. 06424.01 Plastic Laminate color I -Countertops: Wilsonart Laminate, 4639-60 Montery Storm. 3. 06424.02 Plastic Laminate color 2 -Casewook: Wilsonart Laminate, 4638-60 Montery Sun. Material : 1116" thick his pressure laminated plastic, per NEMA Class 1 and Fed. Spec. L-P- 508f, Style D, Type I, Class a. Suede texture, solid color. Solid colors as manufactured by Formica Corporation. 4 . The core material shall be particle board, 3/4" minimum thickness, such as supercore Flakeboard, as manufactured by the Formica Corporation, or an approved close-grained hard wood plywood, not less than 5 ply, 3/4" cross-laminated and graded not less than B·D. Accepted equal such as Weyerhaeuser, Timblend, or U.S. Plywood Novaply, or approved close grained hardwood plywood. B. 06200.02 Wood Trim 1. Edge trim at low wall cap 1-4.06: Western Wood Molding and Millwork Producers, WM 131 06200.06 C . Wood Shelving: 3/4" medium density particle board not less than 5/8" thickness to provide 3/4" finished pane thickness. Exposed surface to comply with NEMALD-3 Type 4, high pressure white melamine laminate. Provide adjustable steel shelf supports. 06200.11 D. Wood Railing: 1. Manufacturer: Boise Moulding and Lumber or Western Wood Molding and Millwork 2 . Product: I W' dia. Rail, Oak. 3. Provide sub-rails and fasteners to coordinate with wall bracket Refer to Section 05500 IE, 06200.26 Melamine Shelving 3/4" medium density particle board not Jess than 5/8" thickness to provide 3/4" finished pane thickness. Exposed surfaces to comply with NEMA LD-3 Type 4, high pressure white Melamine laminate. 2.3 ACCESSORJES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application. B. Bolts, Nuts , Washers , Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application . C. Contact Adhesives: Water base type. D. Wall Adhesive: Cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving durable bond. E. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. 2.4 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Rests : Type to suit application. 2 .5 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS n D o. lJ r""~ '- 0 0 0 [1 ·o D [~ [~ 0 0 0 IT LJ n 0 0 0 D 0 3 n [l D n n :J / u B 0 a J Q n A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring UL fire rating. B. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to A WI standards. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies in contact with cementitious materials. before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with A WI Custom quality standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Install trim with nails. D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 SITE TREA TMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Treat s ite-sawn ends. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting materials . C. Prese rvative treat items noted on Drawings as 'PT'. Fire retardant treat items noted on Drawings as 'FR-S']. D. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR FINISH A. Sand work smooth and set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations . END OF SECTION 0 0 0 D G 0 0 lJ n D f) 0 u 0 J 1J IT 0 II D D 0 ~ u 3 0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 'l 1.,.) u J a 0 n SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water base asphalt dampproofing compatible with polystyrene concrete form units. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before application and continuously until dampproofing has cured. B. Provide ventilation when dampproofing in an enclosed space. PART 2-PRODUCTS 07160.01 Dampproofing 2.1 MATERIALS A. Water base Emulsion: Type C, ASTM D-449 1. Manufacturers: a. Hydrocide b. Thoro B. Miscellaneous Materials: 07160 BM· GRM 1. General: Provide primers, fillers, sealers, joint tapes, adhesives and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer of the primary dampproofing materials, for the application shown. SECTION 07160 Page2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A . Verify that surfaces are solid, free of frozen or wet matter, loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion of dampproofing . B. Do not apply dampproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces. APPLICATION A . Apply Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B . Prime surfaces and allow to dry. C. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation to top of footings . D. Seal protrusions through dampproofing with mastic and flexible flashings . Seal watertight. PROTECTION A . Protect finished dampproofing from damage during backfill operations by adhering protection board or rigid insu lation w ith mastic over treated surfaces. B. Scribe boards around penetrations and projections. END OF SECTION 071tl0 OM· GRM 0 D 0 ~ 0 0 u [) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D n 0 D D D D D 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 D D 0 0 SECTION 07190 VAPOR AND AIR BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet and sealant materials to continue vapor or air barrier from wall to roof construction. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Products of this Section to achieve continuity of building enclosure air and vapor barrier, in conjunction with materials in Sections 07210. B. Sheet and sealing materials to seal gaps between building enclosure components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS 07190.01 Vapor Barrier A. Sheet Barrier Translucent polyethylene film for above grade application; 6 mil. CAUTION: COORDINATE PROPER VAPOR BARRIER USE AND INSTALATION LOCATIONS WlTH SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION. ALL INSULATION EXPOSED TO A RETURN AIR PLENUM SHALL HAVE FSK FACING. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify substrate materials are dry and clean. Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion. B. Coordinate with Work of other affected Sections. C. Clean and prime substrate surfaces in accordance with manufacturer1s instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION SECTION 07190 Page2 VAPOR AND AIR BARRIERS A. Secure shee t barrier to wall vapor and air barrier with adhesive or tape. B. Lap sheet barrier to roof vapor and air barrier and seal with adhesive. C. Install sheet barrier between window and door frames and adjacent wall vapor and air barrier and seal with sealant or adhesive. D. Install sheet barrier on wann sid e of all exterior wall insulation. END OF SECTION 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 D D J 0 J 0 0 J n D D D D 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 D SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART I-GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board thermal insulation at perimeter foundation wall. B. Thermal Batt Insulation C. Roof Insulation D. Fire Sating Insulation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System performance to provide continuity of thermal and vapor barrier at building enclosure clements in conjunction with vapor and air barrier materials in Section 07190. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SUBMIITALS A. Submit roof insulation product data to JPS Roofing Representative for approval and compatibility with protective membrane roofing system. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. 07210.04 Rigid Insulation At Foundation Manufacturer: I. DOW Chemical Company: 2" Extruded Polystyrene. Styrofoam square edge insulation 07210.04A Rigid Insulation At Wall Cavity Interior Concealed Rigid Insulation-Styrofoam Tough R, Polyisocyanuratc 2" thickness. R-13. B. 072 I 0.05 Batt Thermal Insulation in non exposed return air plenum space to utilize vapor barrier per Section 07190. Manufacturers: J. Certainteed: Thermal Batt Insulation unfaccd, R-19 at Walls, R-38 at underside of roof deck at wood truss area, R-30 at underside of roof deck at steel joist area. 072100M-CiRM SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION Page 2 2.2 2.3 2. Owen Corning: Thermal Batt Insulation unfaced, R-19 at Walls, R-38 at underside of roof deck at wood truss area, R-30 at underside of roof deck at steel joist area. C. 07210.08 Tapered Roof Insulation 07210.07 Roof Insulation Manufacturer: I. Dow: Hytherm AP tapered and no n-tapered roof insulation -5" minimum thickness D . 07210.09: Acoustic Batt Insulat ion, 2" minimum th ickness at ceilings, refer to wall type thickness fo r wall installat ion thickness. Manufacturers: I. Owen Corning: Sound Attenuation Fire Batt /MW E. 07210.14 Fire Safing Insulation Manufacturer: I . Owen Corning: Safing lnsulation/MW F. 07210.038 F oam Cavity Insulation Foamed In Pl ace CMU Insulation: Thcrmco Foam Insulation -R-20 Thermal Corporation of America 888-385-3626 ADHESIVES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application ACCESSORIES A. Vapor and Air Barrier: As specified in Section 07190 or required within. B. ~: Polyester self-adhering type. C. Insulation Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant screw-type as recommended by insulation manufacturer. For deck type, to .comply with fire and insurance uplift rating requirements, provide system tested for an approved 1-90 wind uplift rating and ICBO high-wind rat ing. D. Clips: I . Galvanized steel safing clips. 2 . Weld on 12-gaugc wire clips . 3 . Studs and head pins. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION DnlOUM ·CiRM D 0 0 D n D 0 c 0 0 D D 0 u D 0 0 0 n 0 0 D 0 D D D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D SECTION 0721 0 BUILDING INSULATION Page3 3.2 A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards arc dry and ready to receive insulation. INSTALLATION -BATT INSULATION A. Install insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior walls spaces without gaps or voids. C. Fit insulation tight in spaces. Leave no gaps or voids. Do not install insulation on top of or within 3" of recessed light fixtures. D. Install friction fit insulation tight to framing members, completely filling prepared spaces. E. In construction spaces too small for Batt insulation or inaccessible for its installation, fill spaces with pressurized container foamed-in-place insulation. F. Place vapor barrier on warm side of insulation by securing in place. Extend vapor and air barrier tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal in place. G. Retain insulation in place with spindle fasteners or clips and washers as recommended by manufacturer. H. Coordinate vapor and air barrier seal with Section 07190. I. Fire-Sating Insulation: Install fire-sating insulation to completely fill spaces between floor slab edges and spandrel construction on safing clips spaced no more than 24" on centers. Install and support sating insulation permanently in position to comply with tested fire assembly and applicable Building Code requirements. Seal joints between insulation and adjacent construction with sealant. Install sating insulation at all penetrations of fire-rated floors and walls, including those at pipes, ducts, conduits and wiring. Conform to tested fire assembly and applicable Building Code requirements. END OF SECTION D?liO(IM.ORM 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 D 0 SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping materials and accessories. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fireproofing Materials: ASTM Ell9 to achieve a fire rating equivalent to the assembly in which it is placed. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 2.3 07220.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Manufacturers: I. Hev 1-Duty I Nelson Model Nelson FSP. 2. United States Gypsum Co. Model Fire Code Compound. B. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. ACCESSORIES A. Dam Material: As required by manufacturer 07270 OM· GRM SECTION 07270 F IRESTOPPING PART 3 EXECUTION 3 .1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A . Verify openings arc ready to receive the work of this section. Page2 B. Clean substrate surfaces of matter which may effect bond of firestopping material. 3.2 C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. APPLICATION A. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating C . Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, duct work, conduit and other items, requiring fircstoppi ng . D. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. END OF SECTION 07270BM ·GRM D 0 0 0 D n D c IJ [J [I 0 0 u u 0 D 0 II 0 D D 0 0 D D D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 07510 BITUMINOUS BUILT-UP ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes repair of bituminous built~up roofing, aggregate surfacing, with base flashing for repairs and alterations to existing construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK A Wood sheathing: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. B. Insulation: Section 07220, ROOF AND DECK INSULATION. C. Base sheet for insulated roof assemblies: Section 07220, ROOF AND DECK INSULATION. D. Metal base flashing, pipe flashing, counter flashing, //gravel stop, fascia, coping, gutter and downspout, splash pan, reglet, insulated expansion joint cover, scupper//: Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. 1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application ofBuilt~up Roofing." "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" 1.4 WARRANTY Roofing system is subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction" Article in Section 01001, GENERAL CONDITIONS, except that warranty period is extended to five years. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Applicator Qualifications: Installer experienced in installation of systems similar in complexity to that required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated: I. Work shall be performed by installer approved in writing by roofing material manufacturer. 2. Work shall comply with printed instructions of the roofing materials manufacturer. B. Product/Material Qualifications: I. Provide manufacturer's label on each container or certification with each load of bulk bitumen, indicating Flash Point (FP), Finished Blowing Temperature (FBT), Softening Point (SP), Equiviscous Temperature (EVT). 2. Provide manufacturer's certification that fi e ld applied bituminous coatings and mastics, and field applied roof coatings comply wi th limits for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) per the National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings pursuant to Section 183(e) ofthe Clean Air Act with limits as follows : a. Bituminous Coatings and Mastics: 500 gil (4.2#/gal.). b . RoofCoatings: 250 gil (2.1#/gal.). 3. Obtain products from single manufacturer or from sources recommended by manufacturer for use with roofing system . C. Comply with the recommendations of the NRCA ''Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" applicable to built-up roofing for storage, handling and installation. D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashing, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that arc listed in FMG "Approval Guide" for Class I or noncombustible construction, as applicable . Identify materials with FMG mark ings . ).6 SUBMITTALS A. Submi t in accordance with Section 013 40 . SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS . B. Product Data: I. Asphalt materials, each type. 2 . Coal-tar materials, each type. 3. Roofing cement, each type. 4 . Fastening requirements. C . Certificates: I . Indicate mate ri als and method of application of roofing system meet requirements of FMG . 2 . Statements of qualification for manufacture·rs and installers . 3. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report certifying completed roofing complies with manufacturer's warranty requirements. D. Warranty: As specified in Part I of this Section: 1. Warranty sample form with specific langu age to address Contract provisions. E. Contract Close-out Submittals: 1. Maintenance Manuals. 2 . Warranty signed by installer and manufacturer. 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J n 0 0 0 0 D D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND MARKING A. Deliver roofing materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers marked with the name and brand or trademark of the manufacturer or seller. B. Keep roofing materials dry and store in a dry, weather-tight facility or under canvas covers. Do not use polyethylene or plastic covers to protect materials. Store above ground or deck level on wood pallets. Cover ground under pallet stored materials with plastic. 1. Store rolled materials (felts, base sheets, and paper) on end. Do not store hems on top of rolled materials. 2. Aggregates shall be maintained surface dry as defined by ASTM D1863. C. Protect from damage due to handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Environmental Controls: Refer to Section 01568, Environmental Protection. C. Protection of interior spaces: Refer to Section 0 I 0 I 0, General Requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING SYSTEM A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations ofNRCA "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing" for compatibility with existing roof system. B. Glass sheet, asphalt bitumen, mineral surfaced. I. Substrate: Plywood 2. Components: Quantity. a. Base Sheet: b. Base Sheet: 1 Ply c. Ply Sheet: 2 Plies d. Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet: 1 Ply e. Asphalt On Base Sheet 10-17.5 kg/10 sq. meters (20-35lbs/100 sq. ft.) f. Asphalt Between Each Ply 10-17.5 kg/10 sq. meters (20-35 lbs/100 sq. ft.) 3. Provide asphalt quantities within the indicated ranges, unless recommended otherwise in the roofing materials manufacturer's printed data. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Primer: ASTM D41. B . Base Sheet: ASTM D4601, Type 11, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. C. Venting Base Sheet: ASTM D4897, Type IJ, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. D. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type Ill or IV for roof membrane. Usc Type I for pour coat unless specified otherwise. E . Ply Sheet/Backer Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type VI, heavy-duty ply sheet. F . Cap Sheet: ASTM D3909, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber cap sheet, with white coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface. G. Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I II Type 11//. H . Flashing Sheet: ASTM D6 I 63, Type I or II, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable fo r application method specified. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Aggregate: I. ASTM D 1863, except the usc of crushed stone is prohibited . 2. Slag or gravel. Use slag on slopes over 1: 10 (one inch per foot). B . RoofWalkway : I . Prefabricated asphalt plank consisting of a homogeneous core of asphalt, plasticizer and inert fillers, bonded by heat and pressure between two saturated and coated sheets of felt: a. Topside of plank surfaced with ceramic granules. b. S ize: Minimum 13 mm (112-inch) thick, manufactures standard size, but not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in least dimension and 600 mm (24 inches) in length. 2.4 FASTENERS A . Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667. B . Nails for Securing built-up Flashing and Base Sheets to Wood Nailers and Deck: I . Zinc coated steel roofing nails with minimum head d iameter of I 0 mm (3/8-inch) through metal discs at least 25 mm (one inch) across. 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 n 0 0 J u 0 0 r 1 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 2. One-piece nails with an integral flat cap at least 24 mm (15/16-inch) across. C. Fasteners for Securing Dry Felt Edge Strips to Wood Nailer and Decks: 1. Zinc coated steel roofing nails, 16-mm (5/8-inch) minimum head diameter. 2. Staples, Flat top Crown, zinc coated may be used. D. Nails for Plywood: 1. Use annular thread type at least 19 mm (3/4-inch) penetration of plywood. 2. 16 mm (5/8-inch) minimum head diameter. 3. Nails with flat cap at least 24 mm (15/16-inch) across. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion: I. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions, including moisture, have been corrected. 2. Do not install roofing materials over wet insulation. 3. Do not install roofing materials unless roof openings, wood nailers, edge venting, insulation board, flashing, curbs, and roof joints are constructed. 4. Do not install roof materials unless deck and/or insulation provides designed drainage to working drains. B. Uninsulated Concrete Decks, except Insulating Concrete: I. Test deck for moisture prior to application of roofing materials. 2. Test by pouring one pint of hot bitumen at 204 degrees C (400 degrees F.) or EVT on deck at start of each day's Work and at start of each new roof area or plane. Do not proceed if test sample foams or can be easily (cleanly) stripped after cooling. C. Insulating Concrete: I. Allow deck to dry before installing materials. D. Do not apply roof system if roofed deck will be used as a work platform. E. Existing Intake Louvers: I. Use large fans during placement to direct airflow away from existing intake louvers. 2. If required to install roof near intake louvers after work hours, it shall be done so without additional cost to the Government. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Sweep substrate to broom clean condition. Remove all dust, dirt and debris. B. Remove surface irregularities that may damage materials or cause insca ll ation defects . C. Cover wood sheathing, gypsum, gypsum plank an d cement wood fibe r plank wit h a layer of asphalt building paper. D. Coordinate operations with roof insulation and she et metal work to permit continuous roofing operations. 3.31NSTALLATION A . Comply with roofing system manufacturer's writte n instructions and applicable recommendations of NRCA "Quality Control Guidelines for the Applicati on of Built-up Roofing." B. Cooperate with inspection and test agencies required to perform services in connection with built-up roofing system installation. C. General: 1. Provide un iform and positive adhesion between all installed materials, including adhesion to insulation or substmte , and between each ply of felt. 2. Substrate Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to penetrate joints or enter building. Where mopping is applied directly to a substrate, tape joints. When applying steep asphalt, hold mopping back 50mm (2 inches) from each side of joint. D. Asphalt Products Schedule: 1. Use asphalt only with asphalt-saturated or as pha lt -impregnated felts . 2. Use Type I asphalt for pour coats up to 1: 10 (one inc h per foot) slope. 3. Coats on slopes oven 1:10 (one inch per foot). 4 . Use asphalt roof cement with asphalt products. E. Bitumen Schedule: 1. Per square, unless otherwise specified . 2 . Between substrate and plies of organic felt: a. Asphalt 7 to 11 Kg (15 to 2 5 pounds). 3. Between substrate and plies of glass fiber felts asphalt, 9 to 14 kg (20 to 30 pounds). 4. Glaze Coats: a. Asphalt 7 to 11 Kg (15 to 25 pounds). 5. Pour coats : D 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J 1 J 0 D 0 0 D n 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 D 0 D l D 0 D D D 0 0 a. Asphalt 25 to 30 Kg (55 to 65 pounds). F. Heating Bitumen: 1. Heat the asphalt to the equiviscous temperature (EVT) plus or minus 4 C (25 degrees F) at the time of application. a. Do not heat asphalt greater than 38 C (100 degrees F) above the EVT. b. When the EVT is not furnished do not heat asphalt above 246 C (475 degrees F) for Type I and 275 C (525 degrees) F for Type II and IV, with an application not less than 218 C (425 degrees F) and 246 C (475 degrees F) respectively. 2. Do not heat bitumen above the flash point temperature. 3. Provide heating kettles with a thermometer kept in operating condition. Attend, during heating, to insure the bitumen is heated within the temperatures specified. 4. Do not mix different types ofbitumen in kettle. G. Terminations: I. Where cants occur at vertical surfaces, cut off plies of membrane 50mm (2 inches) above top of cant strip, (except at prefabricated curbs, scuttles and other roof accessories having integral cants) extend membrane over cant and up vertical surface to top of curb or blocking. 2. Where wood blocking occurs at roof edge, under gravel stops or penetrations to receive base flashing, nail a continuous strip of 400 mm ( 16-inch) wide, loose applied organic felt envelope over the blocking before the first ply sheet is applied. a. Install strip on top of venting base sheet. b. After membrane is installed, tum the dry felt back over the roofing and secure in place with hot bitumen before gravel stops or metal flanges extending onto the membrane are installed. 3. Where fascia/cant occurs at roof edges, extend membrane beyond outside face and cut off after base flashing is installed. II Do not cut off venting base sheet outside cant face, extend down over outer cant face to allow for venting.// H. Base Sheet: I. One ply of base sheet dry to deck, except mop between laps. Lap and attach as specified to deck. 2. For base sheet applied to wood deck of insulated assemblies: Refer to Section 07220. I. Venting Base Sheet: 1. At vertical surfaces: Extend venting base sheet up vertical surface over cants to top of base flashing or curb. 2. At roof edge under gravel stops install venting base sheet over blocking: Extend base sheet not less than 50 mm (2-inches) beyond outer edge and tum down to allow venting at the edge. 3. At roof edge over fascia-cant: Extend base sheet over top of cant and tum down over outer face of cant to allow venting at the edge. J. Roof Ply Installation: 1. Install, asphalt, glass fiber felt construction. Base sheet is not considered a ply. 2. Extend the first ply 100 mm (4-inehes) beyond the insulation and t he second ply 75 mm (3-inches) beyond the first. Lap ends 75 mm (3-inches) with joints broken 450 mm (18-inches) in each ply. K. Laps for felts and base sheet: l. Base sheet, lapped 50 mm (2-inches). //2. Two plies of felt with 450 mm (18-inches) and 900 mm (36-ineh) starting widths, lapped 480 mm (19-inches). // 2. Three plies of felt with 300 mm (12-inches) 600 mm (24-inches) and 900 mm (36- inch) starting widths, lapped 624 mm (24 -l/2 inches). //2. Four plies of felt with 230, 460, 690 and 900 mm (9, 18, 27 and 36-inch) starting widths, lapped 700 mm (27-1/2 inches).// 3. End joints of felt and base sheet, lapped 50 mm (2-inches). Stagger end joints in relation to joints in adjacent and proceeding plies. L. Flashing: SPEC WRITER NOTE: Usc cold applied method for coal tar roofing 1. Prime vertical surfaces of masonry and concrete with asph alt primer except where vented base sheet is required to provide edge venting. 2. Apply flashing on top of built-up roofing, up face of cant and ven'ical surfaces, at least 200 mm (8-inches) above the roof, full height beneath counter flashing or top of curb flashing: a . At fascia -cants, extend to top of cant and cut off. 3. Except at metal fascia cants, secure top edge of base flashing with nails on a line approximately one in ch below top edge, spaced not more than 200 mm (8-inches) on center. 0 0 u D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 n n 0 D 0 0 0 11 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D J 0 D 0 D D a. Cover all nail heads with roof cement. b. Cover the top of the base flashing with counter flashing as specified in Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. At the cants secure the top edge of the flashing with fascia compression clamp as specified in Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. 4. Install flashing using longest pieces practicable. Complete splices between flashing and main roof sheet before bonding to vertical surface. Seal splice not less than 76mm (3-inches) beyond fasteners that attach membrane to blocking. Apply bonding adhesive to both flashing and surface to which flashing is being adhered per manufacturer recommendations. Nail top of flashing 300mm ( 12-inches) on center under metal counter flashing or cap. a. Parapet Walls: Extend up parapet and tum over top edge. Apply with 100 percent adhesive. 5. Install flashing over cants to make system watertight. 6. Install flashing before final roofing coat and aggregate arc installed. M. Stripping: I. Set flanges of metal flashing in roof cement before the final bituminous coat and roof aggregate are installed and nail to blocking per Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. SPECS WRITER NOTE: Select for asphalt or coal-tar. 2. Before the final bituminous coat and aggregate are installed, cover that portion of the horizontal flanges of metal base flashing, gravel stops and other flanges, extending onto the roofing with flashing sheet. N. Aggregate Surfacing: I. After bituminous base flashing and stripping has been installed, uniformly coat the entire roof surface, except cants, with bitumen pour coat at the rate scheduled. 2. Use type III asphalt on slopes over 1:10 (one inch per foot). 3. While still hot, embed aggregate to cover the roofing sheet completely without bare spots, but not less than 20 Kglm2 ( 400 pounds/) of dry gravel or 15 Kg/m2 (300 pounds/ I 00 square feet) of dry slag per. Do not leave any exposed bitumen. 4. Do not embed aggregate under roof walkways. 5. In cold weather preheat aggregate prior to application. 6. Do not place aggregate material in piles or rows on bare or glaze coated felt. 7. If aggregate surfacing is delayed, promptly apply g laze coat of hot roofing asphalt at rate scheduled. 0 . RoofWalkways: I. Install roof walkways where shown. 2. Prefabricated asphalt plank: sweep away loose roof aggrega te from area to receive plank . Set planks in hot bitumen poured over the firmly embedded roof agg regate as specified for pou r coat. Maintain min imum 75-mm (3-inches) to maximum of 150 mm (6-inches) space between planks. 3.4 REPAIR AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING ROOF A. Areas to be altered or repaired, remove loose aggregate and aggregate not firmly embedded where new penetrations occur or repairs are required: I. Remove aggregat e 900 nun (3 feet) beyond areas to be cut. a. Clean, dry and s tore aggregate away from roof area until ready to reuse. b. Remove un s uitable and excess aggregate not used from Project. B. Cut and remove existing roof membrane for new work to be installed. Clean cut edges and install a temporary seal to cut surfaces. Usc roof cement and one layer of 7 Kg ( 15 pound) felt strip cut to extend 150 mm ( 6 inches) on each side of cut surface. Bed strip in roof cement and cover with roof cement to completely embed the felt. C. Bend up cap flashing or temporarily remove at built-up base flashing to be repaired. Brush and scrape away deteriorated and loose bitumen, felts or surface material of built- up base flashing. D. Repairs to existing membrane and base flashing: 1. Remove temporary patches prior to starting new work. 2 . Blisters and fish mouths: a. Cut blisters open and tum membrane back to fully adhered portion. Cut fish mouths so me mbrane can be turned back and subsequently laid flat. b. Heat membrane to facilitate bending and to dry surface of exposed blister areas. c. Mop turned back membrane in hot bitumen. Roll to insure full adhesion and embedment in substrate. d. Cover cut areas with two plies of felt . Extend first ply 100 mm (4-inchcs) beyond cut area edge . Extend second 100 mm (4 inches) beyond first ply . Mop down in hot bitumen as specified for new work. Resurface to match existing. 3 . Exposed Felts: a . Cut away exposed dete riorated edges of sheets. 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 [] [J D J 0 0 0 0 J [l 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D 0 0 0 D D 0 b. Glaze coat felt edges. c. Resurface to match existing. 4. Built-up Base Flashing: a. Restore felts and cap sheet removed, lapping I 00 mm ( 4-inches) over existing. b. Install new felts and cap sheet as specified for new work. 5. Horizontal Metal Flanges: a. Remove loose, buckled or torn stripping. b. Remove loose fasteners and install new fasteners. c. Restrip flanges as specified for new work. 6. Resurfacing: a. Over repaired membrane, embed aggregate as specified for new work. b. Cover all membrane areas. Do not leave any exposed membrane surface. E. Match existing roofing materials and construction. Use bitumen compatible with existing for roof repair and alteration. F. Perform alterations, maintenance and repairs to roof membrane immediately after membrane has been cut or damaged, with permanent new work as specified in this specification. Repair items damaged in surface preparation and aggregate removal. End of Section 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 SECTION 0755 1 ELASTOMERJC SHEET ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1 .I SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 1.3 A. Elastomeric Sheet Membrane Conventional Roofing System, mechanically attached. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide characteristics on membrane materials. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perfonn Work in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Class A Fire Hazard Classification, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) Roof assembly Classification wind uplift requirement of 190. B. Prior to beginning work, a representative of JPS shall meet with the General Contractor, Roofing Contractor, Owner's Representative and Architect to discuss applications and quality control procedures. Prior to completion of membrane installation, the JPS representative shall make periodic site reviews of membrane installation and a final inspection to assure that the roofing system was installed according to JPS-approved specifications and details. C. Roofing Contractor shall be approved or licensed by JPS Elastomerics Corp. and have not less than 5 years' experience, including flexible sheet roofing. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A . Do not install membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below 40° F. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide ten year warranty including coverage of materials and installation and resulting damage to building resulting from failure to resist penetration of moisture. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All materials provided by JPS shall be delivered with appropriate packaging labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, Jot numbers, and usage instructions. B. Materials shall be stored in their original undamaged packaging, and storage conditions shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturers' requirements. 1.7 PRECAUTIONS A. Adhesives, solvents, and caulks as indicated arc extremely flammable and/or toxic . Follow precautions indicated on can and carton label. t;.f ~f11\:!00fo.DJ IJ.aalttnnll ~ttt~~ Stwll..a C'~n MCM\teMt'.Sfwc',Sf'dr.fJilll•MI ~~~"-01107~, IUM.GKM..b: SECTION 07551 Page2 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING B. Surfaces to be bonded shall be dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces are usually considered to be smooth, solid masonry, wood, and metal, plus insulation board fastened to the specific manufacturer's recommendations for receiving adhered roofing membranes and accepted by JPS for adhered applications ofHi-Tuff/EP Membrane. C. Fasteners should be installed with a depth-sensing screw gun to prevent over-driving or under-driving. The ASAP and PIF adapter tool is to be used for the installation of Hy-Tuff ASAP and Hy-Tuff PlF fasteners. Insulations shall be loose laid. If the owner or specifier requires insulation fastening, a protection layer shall be required on top of the fasteners and plates to prevent impingement on the Membrane. Consult JPS for recommendations. D. All rooftop mechanical units are to have their condensation lines piped to drains, or off the roof. E. Grease shall not be allowed to accumulate on the roof. F . At the discretion of JPS, excessive patching as a result of dama ge to the Hi-T uff/EP membrane or caused by faulty installation may require total recover in those areas. 1.8 SUBMITTALS 0 0 0 0 0 [] 0 0 A . Submit tapered roof insulat ion and roof paver product data to JPS representative for approval prior to D installat ion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MEMBRANE MATERIALS 0755 1.01 Membmne Roofing A . Manufa cturer: Stevens Roofing Systems, JPS Elastomerics Corp. B . Memb!ane: Mechanically attached Hi-Tuff/EP 45-mil single-ply, wh ite. C . Seaming Materials: As recommended by membmne manufacturer. 2.2 MEMBRANE FASTENING 2.3 A . F asteners: Type and size recommended by manufacturer .. B Sca m Fastener: Hi-TufTES Seam Fastener. Two piece screw/plate. A CCESSORIES A . Membrane Bonding Adhesive: Hi-Tuff EP Bonding Adhesive. It is not acceptable to usc bonding adhesive in the scams. B . Membrane Sealant: Hi-Tuff All Purpose Sealant C . Seam Caulk: H i-Tuff EP Seam Caulk D . Fle xible Flashings: Same material as membrane. •'.Fabm~(a i\!Mfl.l! la.uk-mmc NI'M Shell ..t CU"t RM~WM~\Srfc\5ptri(~--l·!b-ONI7Jj I UM-GKJ.1.Wc 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 D D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 Q 0 SECTION 07551 Page 3 ELASTOMERJC SHEET ROOFING E. Wood Cant Strip: Specified in Section 06100. F. Roofing Nails: Galvanized or non-ferrous type. G. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. H. Scam Cleaner: Hi-Tuff/EP seam cleaner. I. Mechanical Fasteners: Insulation and membrane fasteners as recommended by membrane manufacturer. J. Termination Bar: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 3.3 A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work; deck is clean and smooth, free of snow or ice and is properly sloped. Any damp, wet or deteriorated materials must be removed. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, and protrusions through roof are solidly set; cant strips and reglets are in place. MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply membrane and mechanical attachment devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Work out air bubbles, wrinkles, and fishmouths. Overlap edges and ends and heat seal watertight. C. Install mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. D. Seal membrane to adjoining surfaces. E. Continue membrane up vertical surfaces minimum 8 inches unless otherwise noted. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints. F. Seal items penetrating membrane with counterflashing membrane material. Install membrane flashings. Seal watertight to membrane. FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORJES A. Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical clements. B. Coordinate installation of roof drains. C. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane. ¥J-ilnrnnldpafii\:!DM.M U..ukmnll MC'Iil Shdl1rd Con .Mmunhon\llipK'Spmfi.::IIIMinl l·:!b-0Tffi5'1 HM.{iltM.dlK" u n 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D 0 v~5nd NOI.L::>3S .:10 ON3 DNI.:IOOM .L33HS ::>ni3WO.LSY13 I ~~LO NOI.L::>3S D 0 0 D D D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: General sheet metal work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Flashing and counter-flashing 2. All other sheet metal flashing related to the above, shown on the drawings and not specified elsewhere. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Galvanized Sheet Metal Installation: Comply with Recommendations of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", latest edition, as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor National Association, Inc. 1.3 WARRANTY 1.4 All sheet metal work shall be warranted in writing, against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of installation. Address warranty to the Owner and deliver in duplicate upon completion of work. RELATED SECTIONS 07551 07800 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing Roof Accessories PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MATERIALS 07600.01 Flashing 07600.15 Metal Fascia Flashing 07610. 02 Sheet Metal Flashing 07610.03 Sheet Metal Trim 07600.21 Metal Sill Cap A. Sheet Metals: 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal hot-dip type, manufactured in accordance with ASTM A 525-65T, 1.25 oz. commercial weight zinc coated, regular spangle, as manufactured by Steelox, U.S. Steel, Republic Steel, Inland Steel 0 7600 BM-GRM SECTION 07600 Page2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL or equal. B. Solder: Composed of 50% pig lead and 50 % block tin conforming to AS TM Specification B-32-602T. C. Flux: Muriatic acid shilled with zinc, or approved brand soldering flux . Acid shall be thoroughly worked off after soldering is completed. D. Sealant: Tremco "Mono" one part acrylic or comparable product by DAP or Pecora . E. Fasteners: Size and type required, in accordance with SMACNA manual. 1. Fed Spec. FF-N-105, type best suited for intended use. 2. Nails : Galvanized , flathead, barbed, wire slating nails not less than 12 gauge by 1" long . 3. Screws and bolts: Galvanized round head 4. Expansion shields: Lead sleeves 5. Aluminum Construction: Aluminum fasteners 07600 BM· GRM n 0 0 (] r • I 1 I l.J D 0 0 0 l ._j 0 0 0 [J \ ! ._. u D D 0 D 0 0 0 D [] 0 0 D D 0 0 D 0 J 0 SECTION 07600 Page3 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all fasteners, anchor plates, splice plates and cant dams as required for installation of flashing systems and recommended by manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 A. Examine surfaces to receive flashing or sheet metal and do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. All surfaces shall be smooth, sound, clean and dry and all fabric flashing shall be in place before work is started. WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be executed by skilled mechanics, workmanship equal to the best standards of practice in modern sheet metal. Accurately form work to sizes, shapes, and dimensions indicated and detailed, with all lines and angles in true alignment, straight, sharp, and erected plumb and level, in proper plane, without bulges or waves. FIELD MEASUREMENTS Before fabricating sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. PREPARATION OF SURFACES Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. INSTALLATION A. Conceal expansion provision wherever possible. Conceal fasteners from view at ground level. B. Counterflashing for items provided under Divisions 15 and 16 will be provided by Contractor furnishing the item to be flashed. C. Nailing and Cleating: Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only with nails spaced approximately 4" apart and not less than 1/2" from edge. Provide cleats as required for attachment of appurtenant items. Make cleats not less than 2" wide by 3" long of same material and one gauge heavier than metal being installed. Secure one end of cleat with two nails and fold cleat back over nail heads. D. Expansion and Contraction: Provide sheet metal work with expansion joints not to exceed 32' center to center, or 8' from comers. Connect runs with 6" loose-locked 07600 BM-GRM SECTION 07600 Page4 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 3.6 slip joints sealed with elastic cement. All other seams to be 1" minimum flat-locked seams scaled with elast ic cement. Lap scams 3" in direction of flow. Comer joints shall be soldered after mechanical fastening. E. Soldering: Thoroughly clean and pre-tin joints prior to soldering. Solder s lowly with heavy, well-heated coppers of blunt design to thoroughly heat seam and completely sweat solder through full w idth of seam . T reat edges of sheet metal with flux immediately before soldering. Thoroughly wash a cid flux residue w ith a soda solution and rinse with clean water after soldering. F. Flashings: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, flashings shall be 24 gauge ga lvanized steel furnished and installed as required. 1. Flashing and counterflashing shall be provided throughout. 2 . Usc rolled edges forming a drip where roofs join vertical surfaces. 3. All flashings shall be counter-flashed. Where the design of construction is such that the base and counterflashing method is impracticable, flashings shall be made continuous from the roof surface up and into the vertical surface. Flash ings of this type shall be in two or more p ieces soldered together. Where possible, the j oints shall be made by flat or double lock scams. 4. All flashings whether so indicated or not, sha ll be turned up a m inimum of 4'' behind facing materials. S. Counterflashing shall be shop formed with 1/2" hemmed exposed edge to provide spring action against the base flashing. 6 . End joints shall be lapped 3" and caulked to provide watertight assembly -do not solder. 7. Comer joints shall b e soldered after mechanica l fas,ening. G. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Work: Sheet metal items not covered specifically elsewhere in this Section oflhe Specifications shall be as indicated on the drawings and as required to provide a water tight installation. H. Formed sheet metal for me tal-covered work shall accurately produce the deta il and design shown, and profiles, bends and intersections shall be sharp, even and true. J. Joints shall be locked or lapped, and soldered, as appl ica ble; reinforcemen t shall be provided as requ ired. PARAPET CAPS AND COPINGS A. Install all caps and copings as per manu facturer's recommendation. 3.7 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DAMAGE 07600 BM· GRM 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 D fJ [] 0 D 0 D 0 D u u [! 0 D 1 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 07600 Page5 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. Care shall be taken at all times to prevent damage to sheet metal work completed and in place by not walking or placing heavy materials on it. 3.8 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. As soon as soldering is completed, the work shall be clean of all injurious substances. B. At completion all damaged work shall be repaired, all debris removed and work left in perfect condition. END OF SECTION 07600 BM-GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D D D D D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Description A. Furnish and Install: 1. Gutters and downspouts 2. Snow guards 3. RoofVentilators RELATED WORK Section 07600 Sheet Metal Flashing DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Galvanized Sheet Metal Installation: Comply with Recommendations of 11 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,u latest edition, as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor National Association, inc. 2. Snow guard and metal roof manufacturer to coordinate installation of products to insure adequate attachment to structure and substrate. for all loads incurred by the assembly. WARRANTY A. All sheet metal work shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of installation. Address warranty to the Owner and deliver in duplicate upon completion of work. PART 2-PRODUCTS SECTION 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 2 2 .1 07800.07 Downspout 07800.07B Closed Face Downspout A. Description : 24 GA galvanized metal hot dip type. Refer to drawings for size. F inish, paint to match metal fascia and exposed steel. B. Sealant: Tremco ''Mono" one part acrylic or comparable product by DAP or Pecora. C. Fasteners: Size and type required , in accordance with SMACNA manua l. 1. Fed Spec. FF-N-105, type best suited for intended usc. 2. Screws and bolts: Galvanized round head. 3. Expansion shields: Lead sleeves 4. Aluminum construction: Aluminum fasteners 2 .2 07800.05 Gutter: 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal ho t-d ip type, manufactured in accordance wit h ASTM A 525-65T, I .25 oz. commercial weight zinc coated, regular spangle, as manufactu red by Stcelox , U.S. Steel , Republic Steel , Inland Steel or equal. 2 .3 07800.12 Eave Snow Guards: S-5 color guard manufactured by LM curbs 1-800- 248-1412 Accessories: C lamp: as recommended by manufacturer Color Strip: to be furnished with color card system, color to match existing roof. 2.4 07800.17 Roof Ventilator: Hooded Gravity Venti lator, 24"x24" manufactured JcncoFan, 6393 Powers Ave . Jacksonv ill e, FL 322 17 p. 904.731.4 71 1 2 .5 07800.18 Prefabricated Curb: RE: Mechanical. All RTU and Mcch Equipment roof curbs to be provided by equipment manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 A . Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed Shop Drawings. WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be executed by skmed mechanics, workmanship equal to the best n 0 0 0 D D 0 0 u D 0 D J 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 SECTION 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES Page3 3.3 3.4 3.5 standards of practice in modem sheet metal. Accurately form work to sizes, shapes, and dimensions indicated and detailed, with aJllines and angles in true alignment, straight, sharp, and erected plumb and level, in proper plane, without bulges or waves. FIELD MEASUREMENTS Before fabricating sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. PREPARATION OF SURFACES Protective Coating: Prime coat contacting dissimilar metals. INSTALLATION A. Conceal expansion provision wherever possible. Conceal fasteners from view at ground level. B. Counterflashing for items provided under Divisions 15 and 16 will be provided by Contractor furnishing the item to be flashed. C. Nailing and Cleating: Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only with nails spaced approximately 4" apart and not less than 112" from edge. Provide cleats as required for attachment of appurtenant items. Make cleats not Jess than 2" wide by 3" long of same material and one gauge heavier than metal being installed. Secure one end of cleat with two nails and fold cleat back over nail heads. D. Expansion and Contraction: Provide sheet metal work with expansion joints not to exceed 32' center to center, or 8' from comers. Connect runs with 6" loose-locked slip joints sealed with elastic cement. AJl other seams to be 1" minimum flat-locked seams sealed with elastic cement. Lap seams 3" in direction of flow. Comer joints shall be soldered after mechanical fastening. E. Soldering: Thoroughly clean and pre-tin joints prior to soldering. Solder slowly with heavy, weJI-heated coppers of blunt design to thoroughly heat seam and completely sweat solder through full width of seam. Treat edges of sheet metal with flux immediately before soldering. Thoroughly wash acid flux residue with a soda solution and rinse with clean water after soldering. F. Gutter and Downspout Support: Provide all sheet metal supports and straps suitable to resist snow and ice build-up as recommended by SMACNA. 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D D 0 0 D 0 0 0 NOI.LJ3S dO ON3 0 0 S3niOSS3:J:JV dOO"M t;o ;)~l!d 008LO NOIL:J3S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 ~ D 0 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all caulking and sealant shown on the drawings, specified herein, and not specified under other Sections. In general, seal all openings shown on the drawings and at other locations requiring caulking to seal visually and against infiltration from air and water, including but not limited to the following: I . Expansion joints 2. Flashing reglets and retainers 3. Exterior wall joints 4. Masonry control joints 5. Isolation joints, between structure and other clements 6. Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other service and equipment. 7. Joints between items of equipment and other construction. 8. Joints between door and window frames and adjacent materials, exterior and interior. 9. Bedding for all door thresholds. I 0. Open joints between dissimilar materials as required to close and conceal jointing of the work. II. Construction and expansion joints, joints between dissimilar materials; joints around windows, door frames, louvers, and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall; interior walls as detailed or specified. 12. Joints between sheet metal coping and masonry. 13. Other joints as detailed or required by standard construction practices. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: All work shall be by a qualified Contractor recognized as such, and in business for at least five years prior to this installation, employing skilled tradesmen for the work. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Obtain materials from only manufacturers who will, if required, send a qualified technical representative to Project site, for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the materials. C. Adhesives must meet or exceed the VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule #1168 by, AND all sealants used as a filler must meet or exceed Bay Area Air Resources Board Reg. 8, Rule 51. 079011 DM· GRM SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANT S Page 2 1.3 1.4 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Color S amples: Submit color chart fo r each type of caulking. B . Product Data: Submit product data for each ma terial intended fo r use and lo cation of applicntion. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver in original, unopened containers and store in an area not subject to extreme heat or cold. JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply exterior sealants during wet weather or when t he outside temperature is below 40 degrees F. Do not apply int erior sealants when the inside temperature is below 60 degrees F . 1.6 WARRANTY Sealant contractor shall furnish a 3-year warranty in writing to replace any or all joints which fa il during the warranty period at no cost to the Owner. Submit 2 copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as air-tight and water-tight joints; or fail in join adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not d early specified as an inherent quality of the material by submitted manufacturer's data. Warranty shall date from Acceptance of the Project by the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT BACKING MATERIAL 2.2 A. General: Size joint backing materi a l for minimu m 30% compression when inserted in the joint. Material shall be round rod or semi-circular type. B . Acceptable Manufacturers: I. Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam 2. Sonneborn, Sonofoam 3. Schlegel Manufacturing Company, Schlegelfoam 4. Denver Foam SEALANT MATERIAL 07900.03 Sealant 07900.08 Silicone Joint A . Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Silicone Sealants 0794XI OM · GRM 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tJ J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS Page3 2.3 a. GE Silicones, Silglare 11 b. GE Silicones, Sanitary 1700 at plumbing fixtures c. Sonneborn, Scholastic Omniplus 2. Polysulfide Sealants a. Pecora Corp., GC-5 Synthacalk b. Sonneborn, Scholastic Two Part Sealant 3. Acrylic Sealant a. Pecora Corp., AC-20 + Silicone b. Sonneborn, Sonolac B. Locations: I. Interior Sealants and Caulk and Under Thresholds: Acrylic 2. Exterior Sealants: Two-component polysulfide: Type I, Class B nonsag. 3. Primer: As recommended by the Caulking Manufacturer. 4. Exterior Expansion Joints and Control Joints: Equal to Tremco "Dymeric". 5. Waterproof Sealants: For joints in walls, slabs, etc. in shower rooms and toilet rooms, and other wet areas: Silicone sealant. 6. Other locations requiring sealant and not listed, consult with Architect. BOND BREAKER TAPE Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the Sealant Manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self adhesive tape wherever applicable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 INSPECTION Caulking Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting work of others prior to application of any work under this section. If any joint or space to receive this work is not according to detail and cannot be put into proper condition to receive the work by specified methods. Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing, or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory caulking and scaling resulting. PREPARATION A. Preparation of Surfaces: I. Clean all surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Mask edges, if required, to protect adjoining surfaces and produce a straight finish line. 3. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. 4. Do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces which have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellant or other treatment of coating unless a laboratory test for durability (bond-cohesion), in 0791Xl JIM· GI!.M SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS Page4 3.3 compliance with Paragraph 4.3.9 of FS IT -S-00227 has successfully demonstrated that sealant bond is not impaired by the coating or treatment. If laboratory test has not been performed, or shows bond interference, remove coating or treatment joint surfaces before installing sealant. 5. Etch concrete masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless sealant manufacturer's printed instruction indicates that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid, neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation. B. Priming: J. If required, prime all surfaces which are to be caulked with manufacturer's recommended or standard primer, after the surfaces have been prepared as specified. Before use, check all primers for discoloration and dirt pick-up on adjacent surfaces. If staining occurs, after exposure, take adequate measures to prevent the primer from being applied over the face of adjacent porous materials by masking or other suitable measures. C . Joint Backing: 07900.09 Backer Rod 1. All joints which arc to be caulked shall be of depth necessary to provide for the specified allowable thickness of sealant and also the required backing where and as specified. Backing shall be to extent and type as specified and needed to provide for the allowable depth of the sealant. 2. Back-up materials for sealants shall be non-staining, compatible with the sealant and primer, shall be of a resilient nature and as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant. Size and shape of the backing shall be as required by the width of the joint and/or specified . Do not use materials impregnated with oil, solvents or bituminous materials. 3. Compress backing material a minimum of30% when inserted in the joint. Backing material for the upper portion of joints shall be a round rod or semi- circular in cross-section with the arc in contact with the sealant. 4 . Install bond breaker tape where shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly . APPLICATION A. Thresholds: 1. Set in full bed of silicone sealant. B. Joints: 1. Apply sealants in continuous beads, without open joints, voids or air pockets, using a ratchet hand gun or mechanical powered gun. 2 . Confine sealants to joint areas with masking tapes or other precautions. Apply compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that excess compound will not extrude from joints. 3. Remove excess compound or sealant promptly as work progresses, and clean adjoining surfaces. 4 . In rough surfaces or joints of uneven widths, install sealant well back into joint. 079110 OM-GRM D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 J 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS Page 5 (Recess equal to width of joint, or 3/8" minimum at masonry). 5. Anti-tack agent shall be used where necessary to protect freshly-applied sealant from public traffic and dirt. 6. Joints shall be slightly recessed as to facilitate a painter's line. All joints throughout construction shall be hand-tooled and finished. 7. All work shall be done according to manufacturer's printed instructions and specifications. C. Workmanship: 1. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints arc between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cover, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. D. Joint Sizes: Install sealants to depths as shown, or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations: I. For normal moving joints scaled with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50% of joint width but nor more than 1/2" deep or less than 1/4" deep. 2. For joints scaled with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75 % to 125% of joint width. E. Spillage: I. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Usc masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either the primer/sealer or the sealant/ caulking compound. 2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the work progresses. Clean the adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate the evidence of spillage. Do not damage the adjoining surfaces or finishes. F. Compression Seal 07900 OM-GRM I. Joint Design a. General I) The materials specified arc intended to establish approved manufacturers and a type of cover desired. Specific model numbers as they relate to joint widths and movements encountered shall be verified by the Contractor/Supplier based on actual joint widths and temperature conditions encountered at the time of installation. Adjustments which respond to the actual conditions shall be made and reviewed with the Architect prior to installation. b. Joint Design I) The Contractor shall visit the site and determine actual conditions. 2) The Contractor shall propose actual material sizes, based on the actual conditions and projected movements. 3) Submit data and criteria to Architect for review, including materials, SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS Page6 anticipated joint widths at time of installation, and other pertinent criteria. 4) Joint filler material should not be installed prior to building enclosure and climatization. 2. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Face of seal shall be recessed so that finish surface (sealant or seal) is recessed 112" from face of masonry. The seal shall be bonded in place with Acme Primalube Adhesive. The manufacturer shall furnish certified test reports of all material shipped. Where field splices are required they shall be done in a manner approved by the manufacturer. The joint interfaces shall be th orough ly blown clean with compressed air, and if necessa ry for proper install ation th e sides of the joint seal shall be cleaned using toluene solvent. END OF SECTION 071100 OM · GRM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D f] J 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rolled steel doors and frames. SUBMIITALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, and cutout dimensions for glazing. B. Product Data: Provide frame configuration, anchor types, location of hardware cutouts, reinforcement, and finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the following requirements: I. SDI-100-Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. SDJ-1 05 -Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 3. DHI-Door Hardware Institute-The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. 4. Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: ASTM El52. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES A. 08110.01 Steel Door 08110.03 Insulated Steel Door 1. Manufacturers a. Steelcraft CBW-16F b. Amweld Building Products, 7708 Series B. 08110.04 Hollow Metal Frame -Knock Down Frame OHIIO DM.ORM I. Amweld Building Products, Series 800 Adjustable Frames -Standard Frame Locations as shown on door schedule. 2. Amweld Building Products, Series 1800 UL Adjustable Frames -Fire Rated Wall locations as shown on door schedule 3. 08110.04B Insulated Hollow Metal Frame: Amweld Building Products, Series 3000 Thermal Break Frames -All Exterior locations as shown on door schedule. SECTION 08110 Page2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES D . Core: Expanded Polystyrene-no CFC Blowing Agents. Vertical steel stiffeners. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Bumpers: Resilient rubber. B. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames as welded unit type, with hardware rei nforcement plates welded in place. B. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches (1200 mm). C. Close top edge of exterior door with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight . D. Provide additional reinforcing in frame at frames adjacent to glass block. 2.4 FINISH A. Primer: Ba ked on fo r Doors and Frames . B. Finish: Refer to Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105. Install doors in accordance with DHJ. B. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor pl acement. C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing . 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edge, comer to comer. END OF SECTION 0141100M-G RM 0 0 0 0 f] fJ n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire rated and non-rated wood doors and panels. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI/NWMA I.S.l -Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors (includes Standards IS.l.l through I.S.l. 7). 2. A WI -Quality Standards Section 1300 and 1400, Custom Grade. 3. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152. 4. Installed Doors : Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR TYPES 2.2 2.3 2.4 A. 08210.01 Wood Door Manufacturers: 1. VT Industries Architectural Doors: Plain Sliced White Birch, Color, Timber Tl 02. Verify final color to match existing Grand River Medical Center, Rifle CO. B. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction; wood veneer, White Birch faces; fire rated as indicated. DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Fire Rated): A WI Section 1300, Type as indicated on Schedule. FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Facing Quality: A WI architectural. B. Veneer: Birch species wood, plain sliced. ACCESSORIES A. Glass Stops: Rolled metal type conforming to UL requirements. 2.5 FABRICATION OM210 DM· GRM SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS Page2 A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWl Quality Standards and to UL requirements. B. Provide doors with 1/2 inch thick edge strips of wood species to match face veneer. C. Pre-machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with A WI requirements . D. Provide shaped metal astragals to UL requirements for double fire doors to rating required. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance w ith A WI, ANSJ/NWMA standards and manufacturer's instructions. 3 .2 INSTALLATION TOlERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edge, comer to comer. END OF SECTION 0112 10 OM· GRM 0 0 0 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 D u 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 SECTION 08300 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish only: 1. Access doors into pipe and utility spaces. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Furnishing Access Doors as specified in this Section for Mechanical Equipment: Division 15 Mechanical. B. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in this Section for Electrical Equipment: Division 16 Electrical C. Installation of Access Doors: Appropriate Sections. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS 08305.01 Access Door A. ]. 2. 3. Located in Gypsum Drywall: J.L. Industries: Model WB 18 x 18 Milcor: 32.03-014 Williams Brothers Corp. WB-GP Premium General Purpose Access Door B. Fire-Rated Access 1. J.L. Industries: FD 16 x 16 2. Milcor: 32.08-016 3. Williams Brothers Corp. WBFR Premium Fire Rated Access Door 16 X 16 C. Sizes: As ind icated on Dra wings or as required to properly service mechanical or electrical equipment. D. Locking Devices: Key·operat ed c am locks. E. Fi n ish: I . Toilet Rooms, Locker Rooms and Food Service Areas: Prime for Paint 2. All Others: Pri me for Paint 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical or Electrical Access: Access doors required for access to mechanical or electrical equ ipment shall be provided under Div ision 15 or Division 16 and installed by the trade responsible for the material in which door is located . B. Ge neral Ac cess: Furnish access door indicated on Drawings for general access to be installed by trade responsible for material in which door is located. C. F urnishing Access Doors as specified in this Secti on for Electrical Equipment: Division 16 Electrica l. END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 J [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 J SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 1.3 1.4 A. Aluminum doors, frames SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System performance to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by temperature cycling. B. Design and size members to withstand dead loads caused by pressure and suction of wind. C. Drain water entering the framing system, to exterior. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system and component dimensions; components within assembly; framed openings requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners; glass and infills; door hardware requirements; and affected related work. WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. 08410.04 Store Front Entry Door I. Doors: Kawneer Wide Style Door 500 Series w/6" Crossrail. a. Finish: factory fluropolymer paint conforming to AAMA605.2- 08410.02 Aluminum Storefront 08410.03 Aluminum Storefront Entrance 2. Exterior Entrance a. Fmming: Kawneer Trifab II 451 Stick System. b. Finish: factory fluropolymer paint conforming to AAMA605.2- 3. Interior Entrance Framing: Kawncer Trifab 11450 Stick System. a. Finish: factory fluropolymer paint conforming to AAMA605.2 - SECTION 0841 0 Page2 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2.4 2.5 2.6 B. Steel Sections: Structural shapes to suit mullion sections. C. Primer: Zinc chromate for shop application and field touch-up. D. Fasteners: as recommended by manufacturer. HARDWARE A. Hardware: As specifi e d in Section 08710. FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames a llowing for m inimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners, flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from v iew. D. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware . FINISHES A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Fluropolymer paint -to be selected by Architect. B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Fluropolymer paint -to be selected by Architect. C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanize to 2.0 oz/sq ft. D . Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel s urfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 SECTION 08410 Page3 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. INSTALLATION A. Install doors, frames, glazing, hardware and flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. E. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800. F. Install perimeter silicone type sealant, backing materials, and installation requirements in accordance with Section 07900. TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per ft maximum or 0.25 inches per 30 ft., whichever is less. END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing for Sections referencing this Section for Products and installation. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity ofbuilding enclosure vapor and air barrier. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Glass Types Specified: Provide physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, and special installation requirements. B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating glass units coloration and design. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Safety glass and Glazing shall comply with Colorado House Bill no. I 1 10 and requirements of ANSI Z-97 .1 -1966. B. Reference Standards: Conform to current editions of the following Codes, Standards and Specifications relating to work of this section: O~HOO DMoGkM I. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z-97 .I -1975 Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. 2. Federal Specifications (Fed. Specs.) DD-G-4510 Glass, Plate, Sheet, Figures (Float, Flat for Glazing, Corrugated, Mirrors, and Other Uses) DDOG=l403B(l) Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figures, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Full Tempered) 3. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual-Latest Edition Glazing Scaling Systems Manual -Latest Edition SECTION 08800 GLAZING Page2 4 . Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA) 66-7-72 Specifications per scaled glass insulating units. 5 . Unifonn Building code -Latest Edition C . Grading and Labeling: Grade and label each light, setting forth quality and grade of glass and manufacturer's name and brand designation. Leave labels intact until completion of work or until directed to remove. D. Each light with special perfonnance characteristics such as fu ll y tempered shall bear the manufacturer's identification showing the special characteristic and thickness by etching or other pennanent identification that shall be visible after the glass is glazed. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide ten year warranty including coverage for scaled glass units from seal failure, inter- pane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 08800.0 I Glazing 2.1 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS 08800.04 08800.12 08800.10 08800.27 08800.02 Type A: 1/4" Clear Tempered Safety Glass Refer to schedule Type B:lnsulating Glass Clear Tempered I" thick. 2 sheets of 114" thick tempered glass with 1/2" a ir space. Outer sheet -solar cool gray tint ed. Inner glass clear . Argon gas fill. Type C : Insulating Glass Clear Float 1" thick 2 sheets of 1/4" thick, float g lass with 1/2" air space. Outer sheet-solar cool gray tinted. Inner glass clear. Argon gas fill. Type E: F ire Rated Glass: Fireglass 20 manufactured by TCP (Technical Glass Products) Refer to schedule and Door requirements Type F : W' Clear G lass Refer to schedu le. A. Manufacturers: Olll!OOOM -GRM l. PPG Industries 2 . ASG Industries 0 0 0 0 [J 0 0 0 0 [] 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 SECTION 08800 GLAZING 3. Interpane 2.2 FROSTED PLASTIC GLAZING 08800.28 Frosted plastic glazing (heavy frost): Lumasite, Frost-SOS 08000.29 Frosted plastic glazing ( light frost): Lumasite, Parchment-SOS A. Manufacturer: American Acrylic Corporation 1800-627-9025 Refer to interior elevations. 2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES Page 3 A. Elastic Glazing Compound: Comply with Federal Specification IT -P-781 a, Type I or IT -G- 4 I Oe. Glazing compound shall be pain table variety. B. Setting Blocks, Shims, and Glazing Clips: Size and type as recommended by glass manufacturer. II"I«MlBM.(iRM SECTION 08800 GLAZING Page4 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS AND TAPES A. General 1. Provide bl ack ex posed glazing materials, unless another color is indicated, or unless another color is selected by Arc hitect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Provide hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the require d application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only sealants and tapes which are known (proven} to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel surfaces. B. 1-Part Non Acid Curing Medium Modulus Silicone (Usc for exterior hollow metal} 1. TypeS, GradeS, Class 25, Uses NT, G , A, and as appli cable to uses indicated, 0; and complying with tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 psi at 100% elongation when tested per ASTM D412 a fter 14 days at 77° F and 50% relative humidity. 2 . Products: Provide one of the following or an approved equal : a . Dow Coming 795; Dow Coming Corporation b. S ilp ruf; Geneml Electric Corporation c . Gcsil; General Electric Corpomtion d. Spectrum 2; Tremco, Inc. C. 1 Part Acrylic Glazing Sealant (Usc for interior glazing of hollow metal or woodwork.) 1. Water-based, acrylic emulsion sealant; nonsag, mildew resistant, paintable; comply with ASTM C834. D . Preformed Butyl Rubber Glazing Tape 1. Extruded tape (coiled on release paper} of solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene formulat ion with I 00% solids, complying with AAMA A804.1, non-staining and non-migrating in contact with porous surfaces, with or without continuous spacer rod as required for proper glazing installation. 2 .5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide materials compatible w ith surfaces and sealants contacted in installation. B . Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness, witb proven compatibility with sealants used. C . Edge Blocks: Neprenc, EPDM or silicone with proven compatibility with sealants used, of size, shape and hardness as recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. Provide edge blocks to limit lateral movement of glass. DIIKOODM-GRM 0 0 0 0 1J 0 0 0 0 ll \J 0 0 0 ~l n LJ [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 0 ] 0 0 SECTION 08800 GLAZING Page 5 D. Cleaners, Primers, Sealants: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. E. Mirror Mastic: Type recommended by mirror manufacturer for spot-application system, with less then 25% coverage and 0.125" to 0.5'' thickness of setting bed, with mirror supported only at lower edge. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 01040 for examination of substrate and job conditions. B. Verify that framing and glazing channel surface, backing and removable stop design arc acceptable, that weep system is functioning and for effective scaling of joinery. 3.2 lNST ALLA TION A. Performance 1. Watertight and air tight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. General IIIIIIOIIDM.GRM 1. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the building. 2. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances. The glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening within the tolerance and necessary dimensions established. 3. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements arc shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. 4. Comply with Glazing Manual and other applicable publications by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials. 5. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. 6. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly SECTION 08800 GLAZING Page6 as possible. Set with pattern, draw and bow o riented in the same d irection as other pieces. 7. Cut and install colored (tinted) and heat abso rbing glass as recommended in TSR No. 130, Installation Recommendations Tinted and Reflective Glass, by PPG Industries o r similar reports by other manufa cturers. 8. Install insulating glass units to comply w ith recommendat ions by SIGMA and TSR No. 230, Ins tallation Rec ommendations Window by PPG Industr ies, Inc ., except as oth erwise specifically indicated or recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers . 3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean the glazing channel or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which arc not firmly bonded to the substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants arc used. B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.4 GLAZING A. Gcneml 1. Install setting blocks of prope r size at quarter points of sill rabbet but not less than 6" from comer of glass to edge of setting block. Set blocks in thin course of the heel-based compound, ifany. 2. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 3. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation; and eliminate stains and discoloration. B. Tape and Sealant Glazing I . Cut glaz ing tape to length and set against permanent stop 3/16" below sight line. Butt tape at comers an d daub joint with butyl sealant. 2 . Place setting blocks and rest glass pane on blocks and push against tape to attain full contact with glass perimeter. 3. Pl ace glazing tape on glass and install removable stop. 4 . Apply cap bead of medium modulus silicone sealant along exterior and interior void to uniform line and with "wash" away from glass . Tool or wipe sca tant with solvent for smooth appearance. C. Gasket Glazing l. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the 0811(10 11M-GRM 0 n n 0 0 [] IJ {] [J 0 [J LJ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 08800 GLAZING Page 7 sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to dynamic movement. 2. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gasket as recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners. Seal corner and butt joints with sealant as recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Adhesive Installation of Mirrors I. Apply one additional coat of moisture-resistant paint, oftype recommended by mirror manufacturer, to back of mirror, and allow to dry. Apply mirror mastic to cover not more than 25% ofback of mirror. Set mirror in support on setting blocks or continuous gasket, and press against substrate to ensure bond of adhesive. Leave open ventilation space, 0.125" or more in thickness between mirror and substrate, over 75% of mirror area (wherever there is no adhesive). Do not seal off ventilation space at edges of mirror. 3.5 CURE, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Cure glazing sealant and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any type to surface of glass. C. Remove non-permanent markers and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded. or damaged in other ways during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Washing of glass is specified in Section 0 1 710. END OF SECTION OIIHOOJIM-GR.M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 ] SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 1.4 A. Metal stud wall framing B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Acoustic insulation. D. Gypsum board with taped and sanded joint treatment. E. Textured surfacing. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 07210.09 Acoustic Batt Insulation A. Acoustic Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: 55 STC in accordance with ANSI/ ASTM E90. Refer to Section 07210 Building Insulation for product descriptions B. Confonn to applicable code for fire rated assemblies. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perfonn Work in accordance with GA201 -Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings and GA216-Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM FRAMING 09260.05 09260.05B 09260.06 09260.068 09260.09 3-5/8" Metal Stud 3-5/8" CSJ 18 Metal Stud 3-5/8" Metal Stud Track 3-5/8" CRJ 18 Track 6" Metal Stud SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260.09B 09260.10 09260 .10B 09260.12 9260.39 09260 .39A 09260.51 6" CS 18J Metal Stud 6'' Metal Stud Track 6'' CS 18J Track 7/8., Metal Furring Channel 2-1 /2" Steel C-H Stud 2-1/2" Steel J Runner Slip Track A. Manufacturers 1. National Gypsum Co./Gold Bond -Drywall Steel Studs 2. United States Gypsum Co. -Drywall Steel Studs Page 2 B. Studs and Tracks: ANSIIASTM C645, galvanized sheet steel, 26 gauge, or 18- gauge as shown on drawings, C shape unless otherwise shown. C . Ceiling Framing System 1. 09260 .19 1-1/2'' cold rolled channel 2. 09260.46 7/8" RC-1 metal furring channel WALLBOARD 5/8" Type .. x" Gypsum Wall Board 5/8" Gypsum Wall Board 09260.23 09260.24 09260.30 09260.30B 'h'' Gypsum Wall Board Yl'' Gypsum Wall Board Type .. X" A. Manufacturers Fire Rated 1. National Gypsum Co./Gold Bond-Fire Shield 9 Wall Board 2 . United States Gypsum Co. -Fire Code C Core. Non-F ire Rated 1. National Gypsum. 2 . United States Gypsum Co. B. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645. C. Fasteners: ANSI/ASTM C646 hardened screws. SHAFT LINER 09260.49 1" Gypsum Shaft Liner A. Manufacturers: 1. Nation Gypsum Co./Gold Bond -Fire Shield & Shaft Liner. 0 0 0 0 n n 0 0 0 [] rJ 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 ) SECTION 09260 Page3 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 2. United States Gypsum Co. -Gypsum Liner Panels. MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM WALL BOARD 2.2 09260.26 5/8" Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Wall Board A. Manufacturers 1. National Gypsum Co./Gold Bond-MR Board (FSW-9) 2. United States Gypsum Co.-Water-resistant with Fire Code C Core. B. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645. C. Fasteners: ANSIIASTM C646 hardened screws. ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, prefonncd mineral wool, friction fit type without integral vapor barrier membrane. B. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for usc in conjunction with gypsum board. C. L Trim Molding 09260.56 Metal Drywatl L Trim: Fry Reglet -DRML-625 D. Comer Trim 09260.35D Metal Drywall Comer Trim: Fry Reglet-DMBC-75. E. Comer Beads 09260.31 Comer Bead: Metal. F. Edge Trim 09260.32 Casing Bead: U-shape exposed reveal bead. G. Not Used H. Not Used I. Joint Materials: ANSIIASTM C475, reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. J. Adhesive: ANSJ/ASTM C557. K. Textured Surfacing: Splatter Finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION-METAL STUDS SECTION 09260 Page4 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 A. Install studd ing in accordance with manufacturer's instruct ions. B. Metal stud spacing : 16 inches C. Partition Heights: Refer to drawings. INSTALLATION ~ WALL FURRJNG A. Erect wall furring channels for direct attachment to walls . Erect vertically. Secure to alternate channel flanges. B. Space furring maximum 24 inches oc , not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling li nes . C. Install insulation between furring attached to concrete walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indic ated. INSTALLATION· CEILING FRAMING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. Install ceiling fram ing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work . C. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which inte rrupt main carrying channels or furring channels , with lateral channel bracing. D. Laterally brace entire suspension system. E. Construct light fixture boxes of gypsum boa rd above light fixtures in all ceiling systems with UL assembly requirements . INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES A. Install resilient channels at maximum 12 inches oc . B. Install acoust ical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. INSTALLATION-GYPSUM BOARD, SOFFIT BOARD A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacture r's in structio ns. B. Fasten gypsum board to furring or framing with screws. C. Place control joints consisten t with lines of building spaces as directed. 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 J 0 u 0 [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 J SECTION 09260 Page 5 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS D. Place comer beads at external comers. Usc longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.6 JOINT TREATMENT 3.7 A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 111 6 inch. C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile or FRP panels. TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10ft in any direction. END OF SECTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 fl ~J 0 0 SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical panels. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 max1mum. B. Installed System: Confonn to UL rating for ceiling and floor assembly as shown on drawings. C. Confonn to applicable code for fire rated assembly. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM 09511.02 Suspended Ceiling Grid A. Manufacturers: (2 x 4 Grid) Non-Rated Ceilings: I. Chicago Metallic Corp. -1200 Snap Grid 2 x 4 2. USG Interiors, Inc. -DX System 2 x 4. B. Grid: ASTM C635, fire rated to one hour assembly, exposed T configuration; components die cut and interlocking. C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, hold down clips and edge moldings required for suspended grid system. D. Grid Finish: White color. E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel, size and type to suit application. 2.2 ACOUSTIC UNITS 09511.05 Acoustical Panel II'ISII BM.(;RM SECTION 09511 Page 2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILINGS 2.3 A. Manufacturers: 1. Celotex-Hytone Designed Series, BQCL-224. B. Acoustic Panels: Confonning to the following: I. S ize: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. ACCESSORIES A. 09511 .11 Suspended Ceiling Edge Trim: Annstrong Axiom Classic Perimeter Trim, 12" Trim Channel. Factory Finished White. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 3.3 A . Verify that layout of hangers w i ll not in terfere with other work. INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and coordinate with Architect for fi nal1ay out. B. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. Where components prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the system to span the extra distance . C . Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. D. Center system on room axis leaving equal border un its . E. Install edge molding at intersect ion o f ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. lNST ALLATION -ACOUSTIC UNITS A. I nstall acoustic units level, free from damage. twist, warp or dents. B . Lay acoust ic insulat ion above acoust ic units for distance indicated. C . Install hold down clips to ret ai n panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door. D. Construct light fix t ure boxes of gypsum board above light fi x tures in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 1195 11 bM-GRM 0 c 0 D 0 0 0 [] Q fJ [l [ u _I f J J rJ (_ u r1 0 0 0 1 0 J 0 0 0 ] 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 09511 Page3 SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILINGS 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION 11'1511 DM.ORM 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 [1 0 u J 0 0 0 J 0 0 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient base. B. Resilient floor tile. C. Rubber floor tile PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE MATERIALS 09650 .01 Resilient Base A. Manufacturers: 1. Roppe B. Base: Rubber, 4 inch high; 118 inch; top set coved. C. Base Accessories: Premolded end stops and external comers, of same material, size, and color as base. D. Color to be Fig P125. 2.2 TILE MATERIALS 09650.02 Resilient Tile Floor A. Manufacturer: I. Armstrong Flooring -Imperial texture, Standard Excelon. B. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV, Composition 1, 12 x 12 inch. C. Color: VCT #1-Mint Cream 51876 VCT #2-Smokey Brown 51868 VCT #3-Black 51910 VCT#4-Lemon Yellow 51910 2 .3 ACCESSORIES 09650BM·GRM SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING Page2 A . Sub-floor Filler: Type recommended by fl oor material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, type recommended by floor material manufacturer. 9650.06 Resilient Transition Molding 09680 .04 Threshold Transition Strip A . Edge Strips, Adapters and Reducers: Johnsonite Moldings or Roppe Corporation. B. Scaler and Wax: Types recommended by floor material manufacturer. 9650.03 Raised Rubber Floor Tile A. Product: Johnsooite, textured rubber floor tile, Fawn:80. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAM INATION AND PREPARATION 3.2 A. Verify that su bstrate surfaces arc smooth and flat witb maximum variation of 3/16 inch in 10ft. B. Fill low spots and other defects with sub-floor fi ll er. C. Vacuum clean substrate. INSTALLATION -TILE MATERIAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . B. Spread adhesive and set flooring in place. Press w ith heavy roller to attain full adhesion. C. Install tile flooring with joints and scams parallel to building lines. Allow minimum 1/2 full size til e width at room or area perimeter. D. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Install edge strips where flooring terminates. E. Scribe flooring to appurtenances to produce tight joints. F. Install fe a ture strips, edge strips or transi tions where need ed. Fit joints tightly. 3.3 INSTALLATION-BASE MATERIAL A. Adhere ba se tight to walt and floor surfaces. 09650 BM-GRM 0 0 0 D [1 0 D 0 0 [] 0 0 ·D 0 c 0 [1 0 [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 rJ 0 J 0 0 0 SECTION 09650 Page 3 RESILIENT FLOORING 3.4 3.5 B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Miter internal comers. At external comers, usc prcmolded units. INSTALLATION -TRANSITION STRIPS AND EDGES A. Provide and install transition strips and edges as recommended by flooring manufacturer at all locating of dissimilar floor surfaces or materials. CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 09650 BM· GRM 'J 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 '] 0 0 0 D u ] J 0 0 0 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.3 A. Carpeting. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Carpet Materials: Confonn to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 20 sq yds of carpeting of each color selected. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL I. A. Carpet systems shall meet or exceed the Carpet & Rug Institutes' Green Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPETING MATERIALS 09680.01 Carpet 2.2 A. Manufacturers: 1. C&A Sonar: 74005 Henri. Cushion Roll Goods: Provide Anti- Microbic guard. ACCESSORIES 09680.04 Threshold Transition Strip Manufacturer: Roppe (Vinyl Molding) -colors to be selected by Architect A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, strippable type, recommended by carpet Q<I61!0BM-GRM SECTION 09680 CARPET Page 2 manufacturer. C. Carpet Gripper: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application , with attachment devices. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 3.2 A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 ft and are ready to receive work. B. Fill low spots and other defects with sub-floor filler. C. Vacuum floor surfaces. INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Double cut carpet to allow intended scam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and un-frayed. C. Join seams by method recommended by manufacturer. Form scams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. D. Cut and fit carpet around interrupt ions. E. Where diss imi lar wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet back from walls to allow re-stretching. Fit carpe t tight t o ve rtical in terruptions. F. Install gripper edging strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION 11%110 BM-GRM 0 0 [1 0 0 tJ n 0 [} 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 [l lJ D 0 0 a 0 1 Q 0 D a [j 0 j a t1 0 ~ J J SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 1.3 1.4 A. Surface preparation and finishing. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Finish Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store and apply materials in environmental conditions required by manufacturer's instructions. SUMMARY Section Includes: A. Painting work as shown on the drawings and scheduled, and as follows: I. Surface preparation, priming and finish coats of paint specified are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other sections. 2. Painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. Coordinate with Division 15 and 16 Installers for color coding, if any. 4. Painting of mechanical grilles, registers, louvers (except aluminum), an exposed duct work and panel covers and frames for electrical work and systems. 5. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including 09900 OM· GRM SECTION 09900 PAINTING Page2 1.5 1.6 primers, emulsions, enamels. stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 6 . Painting all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in .. schedules," except where the natural finish of the material is specifically not ed as a surface not to be painted. B. Where items or surfaces arc not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar ma t erials or areas . If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes. QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. B. Coordination ofWork: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints arc to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats arc used. MAINTENANCE A . Maintenance Materials: Leave on premises, where directed by Owner's Representative, not less than one gallon of each color and type used. Containers to be tightly sealed and c learly labeled for identification. PART2 ·PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 09900.0 l Paint A. Manufacturers: 1. Devoe Paint 2. B enjamin Moore 3. Sherwin Williams 4 . Kwal Howells 09900.03 Concrete Sealer O'I'I!~I DM ·GRM D 0 0 D 0 D n 0 0 0 -~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 D a 1 0 0 a 0 SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. Manufacturers: 1. Thoroshield Page 3 B. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings, of good flow and brushing properties, capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials required to achieve the finishes specified. 2.2 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish and color schedule. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive Work. B. Measure moisture content of porous surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content is less than 12 percent. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect Work of this Section. D. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate, rinse well and allow to dry. G. Un-coated Ferrous Surfaces: Remove scale by wire brushing or sandblasting; wash clean with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution. Prime paint after repairs. H. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust, feather edges; clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. I. Interior Wood ltems Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe surface clean; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. !l'I'IIMtllM· CRM ·- SECTION 09900 PAINTING J. Apply surface texture at drywall areas as shown on schedule. 3 .2 APPLICATION A . Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Page4 B. Sand transparent finishes lightly between coats to achieve required finish. C . Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. D. Back prime interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to receive paint finish with primer paint. 3.3 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A . Color code items in accordance with requiremen ts indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names and numbering. B. Paint shop primed equipment. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels and paint separately. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D . Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers , brackets, collars and supports, except where items are pre-finished. E . Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convectors, and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight lin e . F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas, exce pt pre-finished surfaces. G . Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim , and fittings removed prior to finishing . 3.4 CLEANING A. As work proceeds. promptly remove spilled, splashed, or spattered finishes. 3.5 SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING O'l'IOOnM·GR M n D 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J Q [J 0 0 0 D 0 0 D L1 0 ~ n • J G 0 0 J 0 0 u 0 J n ~1 J ]. ] ] SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Handrails and Guardrails 3.6 SCHEDULE -INTERIOR SURF ACES A. Wood-Painted 1. One coat alkyd primer sealer. 2. Two coats latex, semi-gloss. B. (I) Wood-Transparent a. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). b. One coat sealer. c. One coat polyurethane satin. C. Concrete, Concrete Masonry and Pre-Cast Concrete 1. One coat block filler as required. 2. One coat primer sealer. n Exterior Concrete Masonry (All exposed exterior surfaces) a. Not Used E. Plaster, Gypsum Board Dry Areas 1. One coat acrylic primer prior to texturing. 2. Spray texture-light spatter 3. Two coats acrylic latex semi-gloss. F. Gypsum Board Wet Areas 1. One coat glaze pigmented sealer prior to texturing. 2. Light orange-peel texture with roller. 3. Two coats alkyd semi-gloss enamel. G. Steel -Unprimed 1. One coat zinc chromate primer 2. Two coats alkyd enamel semi-gloss H. Steel-Primed 1. Touch up with original primer 2. Two coats alkyd enamel semi-gloss O'I'IOODM·ORM Page 5 SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1. Steel-Galvanized 1. One coat zinc chromate primer 2 . Two coats alkyd enamel semi-gloss 3 .7 SCHEDULE-COLORS A . Field Paint Color -SW 61 05 Divine White B. Accent Paint Color-Benjamin Moore ADS. Springfield Tan C. Door Frames -Kwal Howell s 8856N. Badlands D. Wood Door Stain-Factory Finished. E. Exposed Steel : To be selected by Architect. END OF SECTION 09900 DM -Ci RM Page6 c 0 n • D 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 [j Q u u 0 ·-D ll l n 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J j "~ ~I J J J SECTION 09950 WALLCOVERINGS PART I • GENERAL 1.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division· I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Wallcoverings required as follows: a. Fiber reinforced panels at wet locations. b. Acoustic wall panels. B. Related sections: I. Painting: Section 09900 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for type FRP and acoustical panel specified including technical information, installation instructions for each type of substrate and maintenance instructions, data of physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance and flame resistance characteristics, and manufacturer's recommendation for maximum permissible moisture content of substrates. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type, pattern and color of FRP 8" x I 0" or larger showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classification: Provide materials that arc Class I rated, as determined by ASTM E84. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's special delivery, storage or handling requirements. 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Maintain a constant minimum temperature of not less than 60° F. at areas of II'I'ISUIIM.ORM SECTION 09950 Pa ge 2 W ALLCOVERJNGS installation for at least 10 days before, and 10 days after the application of materials. B . Illuminate areas of installation using pcnnanent building lighting system. Temporary lighting alone will no t be acceptable. C . Follow manufacturer's recommendation for storage and quality assurance. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WAL LCOVERINGS 09950.10 FRP Panel A. Manufacturers : 1. Marlitc Symmctrix with Sani-coat . Cl45-G44 Silver 4"x4 " B . Colors , Patterns: White. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A . Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive , primer and scaler, manufactured express ly for usc with the selecte d panel. B. Prov ide all comer and edge molding by selected manufac turer for workman-like finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.0 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 0 1040 for examination of subs trate and job conditions. 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate in accord ance with the ma nufacturer's recommendations. 1. Test substrate with electronic moisture meter to verify that surfaces to be covered do not exceed mo isture content pcnnitted by manufacturer. 3.2 JNST A LLA TION A. Install as per manufacturer's recommendation . END OF SECTION II'I'ISODM-<i RM 0 D 0 ~ D [} 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 8 u u 0 0 0 1 l 0 0 G D 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 8 J 0 a· ] 0 J SECTION 10001 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Marker boards, tack-boards and directories. B. Comer Guards C. Miscellaneous Specialties 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Surface Materials: Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform chalkboard porcelain surfacing in accordance with Porcelain Enamel Institute -Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 TACKBOARD 10001.04 Tackboard A. Manufacturers: 1. Claridge Products-S44X8COR, Series 4 Trim, Type CO, Cork .25", #1105 Desert Sand. 10001.07 Comer Guard A. Manufacturers: 1. Balco Inc. -Type CGS-2 Snowflake 2.11 10400.13 Emergency Key Box A. Manufacturer: Knox Company, 800-552-5669. B. Product 4400 Knox Vault #4409. 10001 OM· GRM SECTION 10001 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIA LTIES Page2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A . Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking arc ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on Dmwings and instructed by the manufacturer. INSTALLATION -CHALKBOARDS AND T ACKBOARDS A. Install and clean chalkboards and tackboards in accordance with manu fact urer's instructions. B . Establish bottom of perimeter frame at 36 inches above finished floor . C . Secure units level and plumb. 3.3 INSTALLATION -CORNER GUARDS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . B. Provide comer guard ~t comers adjacent to high traffic areas subj ect to impact damage. END OF SECTION 101101 DM·GRM 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 [] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D D 0 D D D 0 D D D 0 0 0 D D D D SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART I-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and Install: 1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. 2. Fire Extinguishers. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry B. Drywall Openings: Section 09260 Gypsum Board Partitions and walls. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1 0522.0 I Fire Extinguisher A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. J.L. Industries -Cosmic I OE, 10 lbs Class A, B & C Fires 2. Larsen1s Manufacturing Co.-MPIO, 10 lbs, Class A, B & C Fires 2.2 CABINETS 10522.02 Fire Extinguisher Cabinet A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. J.L. Industries-Panorama 1037P42 ADAG Option 2. Larsents Manufacturing Co. -Gemini ALG2409-R2 10322 BM-GRM SECTION 10522 Page2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART 3-EXECUTION 3 .1 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets: Install cabinets according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide necessary wood blocking. B. Extinguishers : Install in cabinets. END OF SECTION 10'22 llM-GRM D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D D 0 D D D 0 0 D 0 D D D 0 0 0 0 SECTION I 0800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 1.2 A. Toilet and washroom accessories. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A 117 .I. and Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Not Used B. 1 0800.05 Grab Bar Manufacturers: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc.-UG3 Type G, 1-1/2" Dia., stainless steel, snap on cover. 2. Bobrick-B-68137, continuous bar, 36" x 54" with snap flange, satin stainless steel, 1-1/2" diameter. 3. Bradley Corp.-812-0593654, continuous bar, concealed mounting, 1- 1/2" diameter, satin chrome. C. 10800.09 Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle ~IJtiQII UM-GkM Paper Towel Dispenser Manufacturers: 1. Bradley Corp. -Model 250-15 Stainless Steel Waste Receptacle Manufacturers: SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES l. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc. -U41 0 #4 Satin Finish 2. Bobrick-B-3644 Stainless Steel 3 . Bradley Corp. -344 Stainless Steel D . 10800.21 Mop/Broom Holder Manufacturer 1. Bradley Corp. -Model 9954 E. 10800 .12 San itary Napkin Dispenser Manufacturers: I. Bobrick-B-3500 Stainless Steel F. I 0800.13 Sanitary Napkin Disposal Manufacturers: 1. Bobrick-B-270, Stainless Steel 2. Bradley Corp.-4781 -15 , Stainless Steel G. I 0800.11 Toilet Paper Ho lder Manufacturers: I. Bradley Corp. Model 5241 H. 10800.06 Metal Framed Lavatory Mirro r Manufacturer: I. Bradley Corp. Model 780 s izes show on dra wings. I. 10800.02 Wall Mounted Soap Disp enser To be prov ided and installed by Owner J. 10800.19 Robeffowel Hook Manufacturer: I • Bradley Corp. Model 9 119 K. I 0800.14 Toilet Seat Cover tissue d ispenser l OKOODM-GRM 0 Page2 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 l D 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 SECTION 10800 Page 3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 2.2 Manufacturer 1. Bradley Corp. Model 5831 L. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. M. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, tamper-proof type. FABRICATION A. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Weld and grind joints smooth. B. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. C. Back paint components to prevent electrolysis. D. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. E. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. B. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. END OF SECTION IU"IIO DM-GRM 0 0 D D 0 D D D D D D 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D SECTION 12300 MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART I -GENERAL I. I DESCRIPTION 1.2 1.3 A. Provide all coordination, preparation and mounting blocking for the complete installation of factory fabricated pre-finished cabinet work General Contractor to coordinate and schedule all preparation for installation of cabinets and accessories. General Contractor to provide rubber base as specified in Section 09650 and shall provide protection of work as required in Article 3.4c and 3.4d. RELATED WORK A. Section 06200 Finish Carpentry B. Building service outlets for connection of all electrical and plumbing lines, within the confined floor or wall areas of case work: Divisions 15 and J 6 C. General millwork and wood trim items: Section 06200 Finish Carpentry D. Rubber base, to match room base: Section 09650 Resilient Flooring to be installed by General Contractor. SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions. Show materials, dimensions, sinks, fittings hardware and other accessories. I. Locate sink center lines for guidance of other trades. 2. Show connections of cases to each other and to adjacent work whether or not all materials arc furnished by factory fabricator. 3. Submit catalog data cross referenced to the shop drawings for easy use. B. Samples: Submit samples of counter top covering and facing material for approval and color selection. C. Colors (Plastic Laminate): Architect shall have the option of selecting any color made by the plastic laminate manufacturer being used. The cabinet manufacturer shall offer at least one of the following manufacturers for selection purposes: I. Formica 2. Wilson Art 3. Nevamar 12)00 IIM-GRI.I SECTION 12300 Page2 MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 1.4 JOB DIMENSIONS A. Verify dimensions of all cabinet locations in building before fabrication. B. Fabricate cabinet counter tops for scribe fit. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 12300.02 Wood Casework Cabinet A. The following definitions apply to plastic faced casework units: 1. Exposed portions of casework include all surfaces visible when doors and drawers arc closed. Bottoms of cases more than 4'.0" above floor shall be considered as exposed. all visible members in open cases or beh ind glass doors also shall be considered as exposed portions. 2 . Semi-exposed portions of casework include those members behind opaque doors, such as shelves, divisions, interior faces of ends, case back, drawer sides, backs and bottoms and the back fa ce of doors . Tops of cases 6'-6" or more above floor shall be considered as semi-exposed. 3. Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, web frames, dust panels and other surfaces not usually visible after installation. B. Core Material: 1. Medium density particle board or manufacturer's standard material approved before bidding, not less than 5/8" thickness to provide 3/4" finished panel thickness. Fabricate panels with plastic laminate face on both sides or balancing sheet on concealed faces. C. Plastic Faces: 1. Colors, patterns, finishes to be selected from manufacturer's full line inc luding "special", "decorator" or "custom" lines. Refer to Section 06200 for laminate manufactures and colors. 2. Exposed Surfaces: Comply with NEMA LD-3, Type 4, high pressure melamine laminate .0 18" thickness, general purpose type. 3. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: comply with the above except .020" thick, cabinet liner type for backs of doors and inside face of exposed ends. 4. All other Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Low pressure laminate, 0.0 15" thick. 5. Case Backs and Drawer bottoms: Manufacturer's standard pre-finished tempered hardboard. 6. Concealed Surfaces: Comply with above except .020" thick, backer type. D. Miscellaneous: 113110 OM-GitM D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 D u 0 u 0 D 0 ] D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 12300 Page3 MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND ACCESSORJES 2.2 2.3 1. Exposed Edges: Self-edged black laminate, .050" thick or flush "T" mold of manufacturer's standard type as approved. 2. Concealed Framing, Connectors: Manufacturer's standard. 3 . Glass: FS DD-G-451, Tempered. CABINET HARDWARE A. Provide manufacturer's standard, satin finish hardware units, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hinges: Institutional type, 5 knuckle. Provide one pair for doors less than 4ft . high and 1-1/2 pair for doors over 4 ft . C. Pulls: Metal wire epoxy finished pull, 96 mm. Provide 2 pulls for drawers over 24" wide. D. Magnetic Catch: BHMA B03162, double type. Provide 2 catches on doors over 4 ft. high. E. Chain Bolt: Stanley 1055, use at inactive leaf of locked pairs of doors. F. Drawer Guides: K & V No. 1305 Series or equal by Grant or Accuride, of correct size for drawer depth. Use full extension type for file drawers and where indicated. Provide I pair guides for each drawer. G. Locks: Half-mortise type, Disc tumbler and dead bolt, round cylinder only exposed, brass with plated finish. Use at all cabinet doors and drawers except sink base cabinets. H . Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA B84072 by B84082, wrought steel, mortise mounted. I. Pendiflex File Rail : Provide Pcndiflcx type file mils at all locations of file drawers shown on drawings. J. 12300.05 Grommet in Countertop 12300.05B 6" Waste Receptacle Grommet: High Density, Black Plastic grommet. F ABRJCA TION A. Fabricate plastic faced casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. B. Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practical to minimize field cutting and jointing. Mortise and tenon, glue and screw joints for maximum strength using precision jigs and clamps to insure square comers and plumb vertical surfaces. 2.4 COUNTER TOPS 1231!0 OM-GRM SECTION 12300 Page4 MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 12300.06 Counter Top A . Except as otherwise indicated, provide separate plastic laminate counter tops (installed on casework furnished in this section as indicated) to comply with the requirements for casework for plastic laminate finish. B. Particle Board: Minimum density (37 to 50 lbs./cu. ft.) wood chip and phenolic resin binders, compressed board, 3/4" thickness unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD3; type, thickness, color, pattern and finish as indicated, usc NEMA Type 2, .050" thickness, colors, patterns, finishes , refer to section 06200. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A . The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the work under this section is to be performed, and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Condition plastic faced casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A . Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims. Where plastic faced casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at comers. B. Trim and Molding: Install in single un-jointed lengths fore-openings and for runs Jess than maximum length of material available. For longer runs , use only one piece less than maximum length available in any straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members. C. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or b ind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. D. Counter tops: Anchor securely to base units as indicated. Scribe back splash to wall. E . Verify proper blocking and backing for all wall cabinet units before installation. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION I:JQO lr!wf.alof 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 ] 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 SECTION 12300 Page 5 MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. B. Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer's recommendations. Replace other damaged parts or units. C. Protection: Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed plastic faced case work from damage by work of other trades until acceptance of the work by the Owner. Advise Contractor of the required temperature/humidity conditions which must be maintained during the remainder of the construction period. tl31MIIlM.ORM SECTION 12300 Page6 MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES D. Cover casework with 4-mil polyethylene film, for protect ion against soiling and deterioration during remainder of construction period . END OF SECTION 123110 OM-GR M 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D J 0 0 1 SECTION 13900 FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes complete fire suppression system including sprinkler system. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sprinkler System: Confonn to the following criteria: 1. Coverage for the tenant spaces. The core spaces shall be included in the hydraulic calcs, but not sprinkled. 2. Design system hydraulically to NFPA 13. 3. System pcrfonnance to achieve light hazard occupancy requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed pipe layout, supports, components, accessories, sizes, and hydraulic calculations. B. Product Data: Submit data for pipe materials used, valves, manufacturer's catalog sheet for equipment indicating rough-in size, finish, accessories. C. Samples: Submit two sprinklers of each type specified. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify system has been tested and meets or exceeds code requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinkler heads. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit description of components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, and parts lists. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perfonn Work in accordance with: 1. Sprinkler Systems: NFPA 13. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Design fire suppression system under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Colorado. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 13900-I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND TUBE A . Manufacturers: 1. Ansullncorporated 2. Automatic Sprinkler Corp. 3. Kike Protection Systems 4 . Grinnell Corp. S. Reliable Sprinkler Corp. 6. WSA Inc . 7. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM AS3/A53M, Grade B, ASTM Al35, or ASME B36.10M, Schedule 10 or 40 black. L Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded; ASME B16.25, butt weld ends; ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B 16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B 16.1, flanges and fittings; ASME B 16.4, threaded fittings . 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded type; ASTM A47/A47M. 4 . Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing, "C" shaped elastomeric scaling gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 /A53M, Grade B, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795 Schedule 5 black. 1. Steel Fittings: Cold drawn steel, mechanically attached, w ith butylene or EPDM 0- ring. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM Al35 Grade A, ULC threadable thin wall , black. 1. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B 16.1, flanges and fittings; 2. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3 threaded type. 2.2 GATE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and trim, rising stem, hand wheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre-grooved for mounting tamper switch, hand wheel, OS& Y, solid bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged or grooved ends. 2.3 BUTTERFLY VAL YES A. Bronze body, s tainless steel disc , resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper switch. B . Iron body, iron or bronze disc, EPDM scat, wafer, Jug, or grooved ends , extended neck, ha nd wheel and gear drive , integral indicating device, and external tamper switch. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Common Work Res ults for Fire Suppression 13900 -2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [} 0 D 0 u 0 0 0 0 0 ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J D 0 l 2.4 CHECK VAL YES A . Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and scat, flanged ends with automatic ball check. C . 4 inches and Over: Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient seal and threaded , wafer or flanged ends. 2.5 DRAIN VAL YES A. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap. B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.6 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Central. 2. Globe. 3. Viking. 4. Substitutions: Permitted. B . Furnish materials in accordance with of standards. C. Suspended Ceiling Type: Recessed pendant type with enameled finish, and matching escutcheon. D . Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with brass finish. E. Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type enameled finish with matching escutcheon. F. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head. 2.7 SPRINKLER PlPING SPECIALTIES A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with electrically or hydraulically operated alarms, with pressure retard chamber and variable pressure trim. B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm gong, red enameled. C . Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch with two contacts. 2 .8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A . Type: Flush mounted wall type with chrome plated finish. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 13900 -3 B . Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matchi ng material and finish . C. Drain : 3/4 inch automatic drip, to outside. D. Label: "Sprinkler-Fire Department." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance NFP A 13. B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe. C. Re move scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly. D. Install sleeves where penetrati ng footings , floors , or walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetration to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation of footings , floors , or walls. E. Install pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work . Offset around ductwork. F. Insta ll piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. G. Install gate valves for shut-off or isolat ing service. H . Install drain valves at mai n shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. I. Install heads to coordinate with reflected ceiling plan. Center in two directions in ceiling tiles. J . Protection: 1. Apply temporary tape or paper cover to sprinkler heads to protect from painting. 2. Protect concealed sprinkler head cover plates from painting. K. Interface sprinkler system with building fire and smoke alarm system. L. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adj a cent S iamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. M. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. N. Hydrostatically test entire system. Sc he dule t est to be witnessed by Fire Marshall, authority having jurisdiction, Owner's insurance u nderwriter, Architect/Engineer, and school district personn el. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 13900 -4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 D 1 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 J 0 0 SECTION 15051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 A. Section Includes: 1. Submittals and substitutions 2. Identification for HV AC Piping and Equipment. 3. Sleeves. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Formed steel channel. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for piping and equipment identification list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for pipe identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. B. Product Data for Pipe and Equipment Identification: Submit for mechanical identification manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Product Data: Submit for mechanical approval the manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. Submit information showing capacities, dimensions and installation and operating procedures. Submittal information shall be bound in clearly identified 3-ring binders that are indexed and tabbed for the project. Number of submittals shall be as required in the General Conditions section 1300 or a minimum of five (5) copies. D. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: Submit for approval three (3) copies of operation and maintenance manuals for the owners use. Manuals shall include manufacturer's installation and operation procedures for each piece of equipment. Manuals shall also include a copy of the Testing and Balancing report. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets. Contractor shall provide scheduled training to the owner for all equipment provided and installed. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: Substitution of specified equipment will be atlowed through a prior approval process initiated by the contractor. Contractor shall submit intended substitution at least five days prior to bid for approval from Engineer. Submittal shall include capacities, dimensions and operating instructions for each piece of equipment. Substitution shall occur at no cost to the owner. Contractor is responsible for coordination of approved substitution and shall Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Common Work Results for HVAC 15051 -I incur all costs associated with the substitution including structural modificat io ns. space layout and redesign costs. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF SITE, ORA WINGS, SPECIFICATIONS A . Examine carefully the site and conditions of the site. Provide all necessary eq uipment and labor to install a complete working system within the site conditions. B. Examine the drawings and specifications and 5 days prior to bidding report any errors, omissions, inconsistencies, and conflicts to the engineer to be remedied in an addendum to the project prior to bid time. C . Drawings are diagrammatic and catalog numbers given are for reference only. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying the capacity of the equipment meets the drawing requirements and shall not dimension from the mechanical, plumbing, or piping drawings. D . The latest adopted versions of the International Building codes shall be used as required. This will also include the latest adopted versions of the Mechanical, Plumbing and Energy Conservation Codes. All methods and materials required by these codes shall be required by these specifications unless indicated otherwise. Other applicable local codes and ordinances shall be as required and it shall be the contractor's responsibility to be knowledgeable of these requirements. E. Where installation procedures or any part thereof arc required t o be in accordance with the recommendat ions o f the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation. Installat ion of the item will not be a llowed to proceed until the recommendations arc received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause fo r rejection of the material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 .1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color. B . P lastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color, minimum 1-J/2 inches diameter. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible , semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME AJ 3. J . D. Plasti c Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A J 3 .1. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Common Work Results for HVAC 15051 -2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 0 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 1 E. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.2 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C . Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood. E. Sealant: Acrylic 2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber scaling clements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2.4 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. 2.5 MOTORS, STARTERS, WIRING A . Furnish and set in place motors, controls and wiring necessary to operate mechanical equipment in accordance with the following schedule. Starters shall have Hand-Off-Auto, two N.O. contacts and two N.C. contacts. 480 volt starters shall have a 120 volt control transfonner sized for the auxiliary equipment provided. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise indicated. Fuses for the disconnect switches shall be provided under the electrical division . ITEM Equipment Mag Motor Starters Disconnect Switches Switches, Manual and Multispeed Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 RESPONSIBLE DIVISION FURNISHED SET 15 15 15 16 16(1) 16(1) IS 16 POWER- WIRED 16 16 16 16 CONTROL WIRED 15 Common Work Results for HVAC 15051 -3 Controls, Relays, Transfonners 15 15 16 15 T'Stats and Time Switches 15 15 16 15 Line Voltage T'Stats 15 15 16 16 T.C. Control Panels 15 15 16 15 Motor and Solenoid Valves Damper Motors 15 15(2) -15(2) Push Buttons and Pilot Lights 15 15(2) -15(2) HV AC Controls 15 15 16 15 Exhaust Fan Switches 15 16 16 15(2) Fire Protection Controls 16 16 16 16 Fire and Smoke Detectors 16(3) 16(3) 16 16(3) ( 1) Under Division 15 if furnished factory -wired as part of equipment or if furnished with combination starters. (2) If item is for li ne voltage, set in place and connect under Division 16. Where factory mounted on equipment or attached to piping or ducts and using line voltage furnish and set under Division 15, connect under Division 16. (3 ) For units factory mounted in or on mechanical equ ipment or ducts , fan stop connections shall be under Division 15 , all other connecti ons under Division 16. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Verify openings arc ready to receive sleeves. 3.2 INSTALLATION -PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A . Install plastic nameplates with adhesive. B. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Common Work Results for HV AC I5051 -4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 1 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 3.3 INSTALLATION-SLEEVES A . Exte rior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms . Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D . Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION Common Work Results for HVAC 15051-5 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 15081 HV AC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1. Ductwork insulation and jackets. 2. Internal ductwork insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product description, list of materials and thickness for each service or equipment scheduled and locations. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for each product type. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation and related products when ambient temperatures and conditions are not meeting manufacturers requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Flexible Glass Fiber: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. I . k (ksi) Value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F. 2. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, secured with pressure sensitive tape. B. Rigid Glass Fiber: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. I . k (ksi) Value: 0.29 at 75 degrees F. 2. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, secured with pressure sensitive tape. C. Aluminum Jacket: 0.025 inch thick sheet, embossed finish, with longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. D. Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with poly vinyl acetate polymer impregnated surface and edge coat. I . k (ksi) Value : ASTM CJ071. 2. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 ftlmin. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 HV AC Insulation 15081 -I 3. Adhesive: Waterproof fire-retardant type . 4. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad or welded with press-on head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 3.3 A. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork arc tested and ready for installation. INSTALLATION A. Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct C onstruction Standards -Metal and Flexible. B. Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations . C . Duct Liner: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible for spacing. 3 . Scallincr surface penetrations with adhesive . 4. Duct dimensions indicated arc net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Insulation: 1. Supply Ducts (Cooling Systems): a . Glass Fiber Insulation: I" inch thick. 2. Outside Air Intake Ducts : a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 2" inch thick. 3 . Return and Relief Ducts in Mechanical Rooms: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1" inch thick. END OF SECTION Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 HV AC Insulation 15081-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J D 0 0 SECTION 15100 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Pipe and pipe fittings. 3. Valves. 4. Piping specialties. 5. Plumbing drainage specialties. 6. Plumbing supply specialties. 7. Plumbing pumps. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load carrying capacity. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each 3. 4. 5. service. Plumbing drainage specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes, capacities, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Plumbing supply specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes, capacities, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Pumps: Include capacities, pump curves, equipment performance, and electrical characteristics. B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design data, indicate pipe sizes, load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Dm . .a: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-I 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch ~ Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D . Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. F. W~ll Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. H . Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 1. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Copper Pipe Support: Copper~plat ed, carbon-steel adjustable, ring. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES A. Sanitary Sewer Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building and Sanitary Sewer Piping, above Grade: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight, with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum joints. 2. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, type DWV with cast bron ze or wrought copper fittings and Grade SOB solder joints. B. Water Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building: I. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, annealed without fittings . 2. Ductile Iron Pipe: A WW A CIS I with ducti le iron fittings rubber gasket joints and 3/4 inch diameter rods. C. Water Piping, above Grade: 1. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn, with cast brass or wrought copper fittings and Grade 95T A solder joints. 2.3 VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim , non-rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw, double wedge disc, soldered or threaded. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze tr im, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y. solid wedge, flanged or grooved ends. B. Ball Valves: Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 L1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 c. D. E. F. G. 1. 2. Up to 2 inches: Bronze or stainless steel one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon scats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. Over 2 inches: Cast steel flanged body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals and lever handle. Plug Valves: I. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon packing, flanged ends. Butterfly Valves: I. Up To 2 inches: Bronze body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck, infinite position lever handle with memory stop. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, chrome plated iron disc, resilient replaceable scat, wafer or lug ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle. Swing Check Valves: I. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, solder or threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Spring Loaded Check Valves: I. Iron body, bronze trim with threaded, wafer or flanged ends and stainless steel spring with renewable composition disc. Relief Valves: I. Bronze body, Teflon scat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled. 2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: I. Pipe Size 2 inches and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. 2. Pipe Size Over 2 inches: Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; preformed neoprene gaskets. 3. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing, C-shape elastomer composition scaling gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 4. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Strainers: 1. Size 2 inches and Under: Threaded brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with I /32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 3. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Battlement Mesa Development 06 -128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-3 c. D. E. Flexible Connectors: I . Corrugated bronze bose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 300 psig. Pressure Gages: I. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. a. Case: Steel. b. Bourdon Tube: Brass. c . Dial Size: 2 incb diameter. d. Mid-Scale Accuracy: two 1/2 percent. e . Scale: Psi. Thermometers: 1. Stem Type Thermometer: ASTM E I, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish . a. Size: 7 inch scale. b. Window: Clear glass. c . Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT, 3-1/2 inch long. d. Accuracy: 2 percent. c. Calibration: Degrees F . 2. D ial Type Thermometer: ASTM E 1, stainless steel case, bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer hermetically scaled lens, stainless steel stem. a. Size: 2 inch diameter dial. b. Lens: Clear glass. c. Accuracy: 1 percent. d. Calibration; Degrees F . 2.5 PLUMBING DRAINAGE SPECIAL TIES A. Floor Drains: 1. Floor Drain (FD-1): Lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. B . Cleanouls! I. Finished Floor: Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze round scored cover in service areas and round depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. 2. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2 .6 PLUMBING SUPPLY SPECIAL TIES A. Backflow Preventers: I. Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevcnters: ASSE 1013; bronze body w ith bronze internal parts and stainless s teel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strc1iner, and four test cocks. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-4 0 0 0 0 fJ 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B. 2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intennediate atmospheric vent. Water Hammer Arrestors: I. Stainless steel construction, bellows type To POI WH 201, pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. C. Hose Bibbs/Hydrants: 1. Interior Hose Bibs: Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated with vacuum breaker. 2. Wall Hydrant: Non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate lockable recessed box hose thread spout, removable key, and vacuum breaker. D. Diaphragm-type Compression Tanks: 1. Construction: Welded steel, ASME tested and stamped; rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible diaphragm scaled into tank, and steel legs or saddles. 2. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting and drain. 2.7 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Construction: Bronze casing, bronze impeller, alloy steel shaft with integral thrust collar and two oil-lubricated bronze-sleeve bearings and mechanical seal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside piping before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.3 INSTALLATION -INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete fonns. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-5 D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling. locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts arc omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and out recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.4 INS T ALLATION -PIPING SYSTEMS 3.5 A. Install d ielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B . install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C . Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. D . Install piping to ma intain headroom. Group piping to conserve space. Group p iping whenever praccical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction w ithout stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F . Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fi ttings. G . Sleeve pipe passing through partit ions, walls and floors . H. Install piping system allowing clearance for installation o f insulation and access to valves and fittings . I. Insta ll identificat ion on piping systems including underground piping. Refer to Section 15050. J . Protect piping sys tems from e ntry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. INSTALLATION -VAL YES A . Install valves with sterns upright or horizontal, not inverted . B . Install gate ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, p art of systems, or vertical risers. C . Install ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. D . Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when functioning to isolate equipment. E. Install spring loaded check va lves on djscharge of pumps. F. Install plug valves for throttling service. Install non-lubri cated plug valves only when shut- off or isolating valves arc also installed. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15 100-6 0 0 D 0 [J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 j G. Install3/4 inch ball drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. 3.6 INSTALLATION -PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation. B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation. C. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off verticaL D. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. E. Provide drain and hose connection with valve on strainer blow down connection. F. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5013. 3.7 INSTALLATION -PLUMBING SUPPLY PIPING A. Install water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9. B. c. D. E. F. G. H. I. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02300. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to obtain not less than 4 feet ft of cover. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Install piping from relief valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories sinks. Install flow controls in water circulating systems as indicated on Drawings. Disinfecting of Domestic Water Systems: 1. Prior to starting, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. 2. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). 3. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L. 4. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. 5. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-7 3.8 6. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. 7. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming wate r or 1.0 mg/L. 8 . Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from I 0 percent of outl ets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with A WW A C651. INSTALLATION -PLUMBING DRAINAGE PIPING A. Install bell and s pigot p ipe with bell end upstream. B. Extend clcanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanoul plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Install with clearance at cleanout for rodding o f drainage system. C . Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. E. E s tablish elevations of buried piping outside building to provide not less than 4 fe e t ft o f cover. F . Ins tall piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. G . Excavate and backfil l in accordance with Section 02300. H. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. I. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot min imum. Maintain gradients. J. Test drainage piping in accordance with local code requirements. 3.9 INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers with minimum 112 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D . Usc hangers with 1-1 /2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-8 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Q ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] ~ 0 J H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K . Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 3 .10 JNST ALLA TJON -PUMPS A . Install line size shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction. Install line size check valve, shut-otT valve, and balancing valve on pump discharge. B. Install pumps with shaft length allowing sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. 3.1 I DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). B . Inject disinfectant , free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas fonn, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. Bleed water from outlets to accomplish distribution. C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. D. Flush disinfectant from system. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, and analyze in accordance with A WW A C60 1. 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: PIPE MATERIAL ABS (All sizes) Aluminum (All sizes) Brass Cast Iron (All Sizes) Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot length of pipe CPVC, I inch and smaller - Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 ------ MAXIMUM HANGER ROD HANGER DIAMETER SPACING Inches Feet 4 3/8 10 112 5 5/8 10 5/8 3 1/2 - Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-9 CPVC, I -I /4 inches and larger Copper Tube, I-I /4 inches and smaller Copper Tube, 1-1 /2 inches and larger Fiberglass Glass Polybutylene Polypropylene PVC (All Sizes) Steel, 3 inches and smaller Steel, 4 inches and larger Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION 4 6 10 4 8 2.67 4 4 12 12 l/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 l/2 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 518 Plumbing Piping and Pumps 15100-to 0 0 D 0 0 0 [} 0 0 [] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 D D 0 J 0 D 0 0 0 SECTION 15190 GAS PIPING PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Pipe and pipe fittings. 3. Valves. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: I. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load carrying capacity. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each SCfVICe. B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design data, indicate pipe sizes, load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 54. B. List and label flexible connectors and hoses in accordance with UL 536. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 112 to 1-112 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Gas Piping I 5190-I 2.2 2.3 D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. F . Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. G . V crtical Support: Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring. PIPES AND TUBES A. Natural Gas Piping, above Grade: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Schedule 40 black. with maUeable iron or forged steel fittings, screwed or welded. 2. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K , annealed with wrought copper fittings and compression joints. VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, hand wheel , inside screw, double wedge disc . so ldered or threaded. 2 . Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, so lid wedge, flanged o r grooved ends. B. Globe Valves: J. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising s tem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or threaded ends, with back seating capacity. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel , OS&Y, plug type dis c, flanged ends, renewable seat an d disc. C. Ball Valves: I. Up to 2 inches: Bronze or stainless stee l one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring , lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 2 . Over 2 inches: Cast steel flanged body, chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and s tuffing box seals and lever handle. D . Plug Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze ta pered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lu br icated, Teflon packing, flanged ends. E. Swing Check Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, solder or threaded ends. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Gas P iping 15190-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [J [] 0 0 [I u 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 2.4 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and scat, flanged ends. F. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Iron body, bronze trim with threaded, wafer or flanged ends and stainless steel spring with renewable composition disc. PIPING SPECIAL TIES A. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: I. Pipe Size 2 inches and Under: Malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. 2. Pipe Size Over 2 inches: Forged steel flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; preformed neoprene gaskets. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Flexible Connectors: I. Corrugated bronze hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 300 psig. C. Pressure Gages: I. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. a. Case: Steel. b. Bourdon Tube: Brass. c. Dial Size: 2 inch diameter. d. Mid-Scale Accuracy: two percent. c. Scale: Psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside piping before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION -INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Gas Piping 15190-3 D. Where concrete slabs fonn finished ceiling. locate inserts flush with slab surface . E . Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bol t with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of stab. 3.3 INSTALLATION-PIPING SYSTEMS A . Install dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimi lar metals . B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Route p iping parallel to building structure and mainta in gradient. D. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space . Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G . Sleeve pipe passing th rough partitions, walls a nd floors. H . Install piping system allowing clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings . I. Install identification on p iping sys tems including underground piping. Refer to Section 15051. J . Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and iso lating parts of completed system. 3.4 INSTALLATION -VAL YES A . Install valves with sterns upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install gate or baU valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C . Install globe or ball valves for throttling or manual flow control services. 3.5 INSTALLATION -FUEL PIPING A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with ASME B31.2. B. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. C . Provide clearance for installation of insulat ion and access to valves and fittings . Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Gas Piping 15190-4 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 D 0 [J 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 ll 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 D 0 D. Test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. 3.6 INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with J-l /2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 3.7 SCHEDULES PIPE SIZE Inches 1/2 3/4 I 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 PIPE HANGER SPACING COPPER STEEL PIPE TUBING MAXIMUM MAXIMUM HANGER HANGER SPACING SPACING Feet Feet 5 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 9 8 10 END OF SECTION COPPER TUBING HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 STEEL PIPE HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 Gas Piping 15190-5 0 0 0 0 0 0 :1 0 0 0 a 0 n a ] 0 D 0 J SECTION 15730 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Packaged roof top air conditioning units. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate interface with adjacent work for roof mounted units. B. Product Data: Submit water, drain, electrical, rough-in connections, loads, capacities, and control schematics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit relevant instructions. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: I. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240. 2. Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum SEER prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ARI 340/360. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: I. Trane 2. Carrier Corp 3. Lennox International 4. York International 5. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Unit Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired unit, consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters. Battlement Mesa development 06-128 Decentralized Unitary HV AC Equipment 15730-I C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or remo vable access panels with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type . D. Insu lation: one inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber. E. Heat Exchangers: Aluminized steel, of welded construction. F. Supply Fan: Forward curved centri fugal type, resil iently mounted w jth Y·belt drive, adjustable variable p it ch motor puliey , and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor or direct drive. G. A ir Filters: 2 inch th ick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. H. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches high, ga lvanized steel channel frame whh gasket s and nail er strips. J. Gas Burner: Atmospheric type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut·off, intermittent spark or g low coil ignition, flame sensing device , automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot, and high l imit. Bonnet temperature sensor, independent of burner controls, energizes fan . J . Evaporator Coil : Copper tube aluminum fin coi l assembly with capillary tubes or therm ostatic expansion valves, galvanized drain pan and connection. K. Compressor: Hermetic or semi-hermetic compressor, 3600 rpm, resiliently mounted with posit ive lubrication , crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protec ti on, s uction and discharge service valves and gage ports , and filter drier. I. Outdoor thermostat energizes compressor above 35 degrees F ambient. 2. Step capacity control: Hot gas by-pass. L. Condenser Coil : Copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows, coil guard, direct drive prope ller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard , motor overload protection, wired to operate with compressor. Furnish refrigerant pressure switches to cycle condenser fans . M. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Maximum 3 .0 cfm per square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure differential. N. Dampers: Furnish outside, return, and relief dampers with damper operator and control package to automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper fails to closed position. Furnish gravity balanced relief dampers. 0. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil P. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for heat ing and above 57 degrees F ambient. Q. Low Voltage Thermostat: Controls burner operation, compressor and condenser fan, and supply fan with system selector switch (off.hcat-auto-cool) and fan control switch (auto-on). R. Electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat , with remote sensor: 1. Automa tic switching from heating to cooling. Battlement Mesa development 06-128 Decentralized Unitary HV AC Equipment 15730-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 fJ 0 0 0 0 [J 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ 0 D 'D 0 0 J U' 0 0 0 J ] 2. Preferential rate control. 3. Set·up for four separate temperatures for each day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days. 5. Short cycle protection. 6. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday. 7. Switch selection features including imperial or metric display, 12 or 24·hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor and fan on·auto. 8. Thermostat display includes: time of day, actual room temperature, programmed temperature, programmed time, duration oftimed override, day of week, system mode indication, stage (heating or cooling) operation. S. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount on equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not place units on roof before roof curbs are installed. B. Install roof mounted units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof curb level. C. Install control wiring between remote control locations and unit. D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. F. Install flexible connections at supply and return ductwork connections. Refer to Section 15800. Battlement Mesa development 06·128 END OF SECTION Decentralized Unitary HV AC Equipment 15730.3 a 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 1 0 D 0 0 1 0 SECTION 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Ductwork. 2. Ductwork accessories. 3. Fans. 4. Air Outlets. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit sizes, capacities, materials, controls and connections to other work. 2. Submit catalog performance ratings, construction, electric and duct connections, flashing and dimensions for fans and exhausters. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit relevant instructions. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for filter replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having 060 090 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/ A90M. I. Steel Ducts: ASTM Al008/A1008M. 2. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. 3. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. B. Ductwork Fabrication: I. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible and. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and scaling for operating pressures indicated. 2. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal scams in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 HV AC Air Distribution 15800-I Construction Standards), and. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and scaling for operating pressures indicated. 3. Construct T's, bends t and elbows with minimum radius 1-1 /2 times centerline duct width . Where not possible and where rectangular elbows arc used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforat ed metal with glass fiber insulation. 4 . Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence ups tre a m of equipment and 45 degrees convergen ce downstream. 5. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed o r electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. 6 . Provide standard 45-dcgree lateral wyc takeoffs. When space docs not allow 45-degrce l ateral wyc takeoff, use 90-dcgrec conical tee connections. C . Flex ible Ducts: I . Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire. a . Pressure Rating: I 0 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. b . Maximum V clocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. 2. Product Description: UL 181 , Class I , aluminum lam ina te and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helical-wound spring steel wire. a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm . c . Temperature Range : -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: I. Product Description: Two ply viny l film supported by he lical wou nd spri ng steel wire ; fi berglass insulation j polyethylene vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating : I 0 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative . b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c . Temperature Range: -1 0 degrees F to 160 degree s F. d. Thermal Resistance: 4 .2 squa re feet-hour-degree F per BTU. 2 . Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fib erglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film . a. Pressure Rating: I 0 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c . Temperature Range : -20 degrees F to 210 d egrees F. d . Thermal Resistance: 4 .2 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU . 2.2 DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Volume Control Dampers: I . Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Meta l and Flexible, and a s indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabricate splitter da mpers of material matching duct g age to 24 inches size in each direction, and two gages heav ier for larger sizes. Secure wi t h c ontinuous hinge or rod . Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod. 3 . Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 30 inc h . Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 HV AC Ai r Di stribution 15 800-2 D 0 0 0 0 l1 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 ] 0 0 l 0 0 J u 0 0 0 D J 0 J D 0 J 0 B . c. D. E. 4. Fabricate multi~blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 5 . Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. 6 . Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi~blade dampers. Where width exceeds 30 inches, furnish regulator at both ends. Turning Devices and Extractors: 1. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2. Multi~blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap. Flexible Duct Connections: I. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, approximately 3 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. Duct Access Doors: I . Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. 2 . Access doors smaller than 12 inches square secured with sash locks. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners arc not acceptable. Back-draft Dampers: 1. Gravity back~draft dampers size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, furnish of air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. 2. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back-draft dampers of galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades, with scaled edges, linked together, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. 2.3 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus 2 . Kreuger 3. Substitutions: Permitted. B . Ceiling Diffusers: Square stamped or spun, multi-core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectoring baffles where indicated; radial opposed blade damper and equalizing grid; baked enamel off~white finish. C. Registers/Grilles: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, two~way deflection, damper; with factory prime coat finish. 2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount in control panel on equipment. Battlement Mesa Development 06~128 HV AC Air Distribution 15800-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. B. Verify rated walls arc ready for fire damper installation. C. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories. D. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Metal Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible. B. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape. C. Usc crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. D . Install flexible connections immediately adjacent to fans and motorized equipment. Install flexible connections specified between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Prevent flexible connectors being in tension while running. E . Cut openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Cut pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to eliminate against air leakage. F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. Apply duct insulation specified in Section 15080. G. Connect diffusers boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. H. During construction install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. I. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations: I. Spaced every 50 feet of straight duct. 2 . Upstream of each e lbow. 3 . Upstream of each reheat coil. 4 . Before and after each d uct mounted coil. 5. Before and after each automatic control damper. 6 . Downstream of each VA V box. J. Access Door Sizes:lnstaU minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and. Review locations prior to fabrication . Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 HV AC Air Distribution 15800-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D J D -,; a D 0 lJ 0 Q 0 0 0 n 0. 0 D 0 0 n 0 0 0 0 a 0 J ] K. Support tenninal units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork. Install with minimum of 5 ft of 2 inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units. L. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION HV AC Air Distribution 15800-5 0 0 J Q 0 0 p a '0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D J 0 0 SECTION I 5950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems . 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Draft Reports: Submit for review prior to final acceptance of Project. B. Test Reports: Submit prior to final acceptance of Project and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. Assemble in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder, with table of contents page and tabs, and cover identification. Include reduced scale drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Report Forms: NEBB forms. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before starting work, verify systems are complete and operable. B. Report defects, deficiencies, or abnormal conditions in mechanical systems preventing system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus I 0 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust to within plus or minus I 0 percent of design. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 15950-I 3 .3 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE 3.4 A . Adjust air handling and dist ri bution systems to deliver design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities within previously s tated tolerances. B . Make air quantity measurements in ducts by traverse of entire cross sect ional area of duct. C . Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quant ities only to extent tbose adjustments do not create objectionable a ir motion or sound levels. Change volume using dampers mounted in ducts. E . Vary total system air quant ities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes to accompli sh system air flow. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. F. Measure static a ir pressure conditions on air supply u n its, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure ac ross fan. Allow for pressure drop equivalent to 50 percent loading of filters. G. Adjust automatic outside air, return air, a n d exhaust a ir dampers for design conditions. H. Measure t emperature conditions across outside air, retum ai r, and exhau st air dampers to check leakage. I. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and bal a nce at extreme conditions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Verify recorded data represents actually measured or observed conditions . B. Permanently mark settings of valves, d ampers, and other adjustment devices. S et and lock memory stops. END OF SECTION Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 15950-2 D D 0 u 0 0 0 .. u D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D D ) ] 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 ] 1.1 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SCOPE 1. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed by the Contractor without additional expense to Mesa County. 2. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation, shall be included in the Contractor's estimate, the same as if herein specified or shown. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. 3. With submission of bid, the Electrical Contractor shall give written notice to the Architect of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, or rules; and any necessary items or work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed the Contractor has induded the cost of all required Items in his proposal, and that he will be responsible for the approved satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation. 4. The work consists of the following: A. All Electrical Switchgear, Panelboards, disconnect switches, pull and junction boxes, etc. required and specified for modifications to the power distribution system. B. Branch feeders, branch wiring, receptacles, special outlets, switches, light fixtures, dimmers, contactors, starters, timers, etc., as shown on the plans or required for operation of the electrical system. C. A complete conduit and raceway system, including rigid, thin-wall, flexible, sealtite and plastic conduits properly grounded to the building grounding system and/or water service piping. D. Battery operated emergency egress lights and exit light fixtures . E. All power and control wiring including starters, switches, contactors, relays, fuses, etc., as shown on the plans or specified herein. F. Installation of CAT 5E telephone and computer junction boxes and conduit and the service backboards and/or terminal boards. G. Installation of security junction boxes and conduit and the service backboards and/or terminal boards. H. Cutting and patching of holes required for the installation in concrete, wood, steel or masonry. I. Repair of all damage done to the premises as a result of the installation and removal of all debris or surplus material left by those engaged in the work. J. Complete and thorough cleaning of all equipment furnished and installed, both inside and outside, and made ready for painting by others. K. Testing and adjusting of all equipment. Provisions and installation of all bases, supports, hangers and vibration isolators for the work outlined herein. L. Cooperation with other crafts in putting the installation in place at any time when space required is ready and the progress of the work so dictates. M. All new interior lighting fixtures and systems, and all outside building lighting, including wiring, timers, photocells, switches and circuit breakers. 5. Inasmuch as design for remodeling and/or rehabilitation requires that certain assumptions be made regarding existing conditions. and because some of these assumptions cannot be verified Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-1 without destroying otherwise adequate or serviceable portions of the building, the Engineer cannot assure the Owner or the Contractor that the professional consulting services herein encompass all contingencies. Field coordination during construction is imperative. 2.1 WORK NOT INCLUDED 3.1 1. The following work is not included in this Division unless specifically called for in individual Sections: 2. Motors and controls, u nless indicated otherwise, shall be furnished by others, but shall be installed and connected by the Electrical Contractor as indicated on the drawings. 3. Controls for motors on mechanical equipment will be furnished, i nstalled, and wired by others, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE, STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS 1. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company and fire insurance carrier's requirements. Contact proper authorities, obtain and pay for required permits, inspections and utility service connections. Do not include any utility company charges that can be billed directly to Mesa County. 2. In case of difference between the building codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, fire insurance carrier's requirements, and the contract documents, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any such d ifference. 3. Noncompliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requ irements of the applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, fire insurance carrier's requirements, and utility company regulations, he shall bear the cost arising in correcting any such deficiency. 4. Applicable codes and all standards shall include all state laws, local ordinances , utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: State Building Codes International Building Codes. Local Building Code. National Electrical Code. State Electrical Code. Local Municipal Electrical Code. Industry Standards, Codes, and Specifications AMCA -Air Moving and Conditioning Association. ASHRAE -American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASME -American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASTM-American Society for Testing and Materials. EIA -Electronic Industries Association. IEEE-Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. JPCEA-Insulated Power Cable Engineers' Association. NEC-National Electrical, Code (NFPA No. 70-1996). NBS-National Bureau of Standards. NEMA -National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association. USASI -United States of America Standards Institute. UL -Underwriters' Laboratories. Insurance Carriers FIA -Factory Insurance Association. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-2 0 0 0 D D D 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 D 0 D D 0 D D D D 0 D 4.1 5.1 ITEM FMED-Factory Mutual Engineering Division. 5. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of material and equipment. These Drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the work under this section with the architectural, structural, plumbing, heating and air conditioning, and the drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances and roughing-in locations. This Contractor shall cooperate with all other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. Do not rely on the scale of the drawings for rough-in measurements, nor use them as Shop Drawings. 6. All materials and equipment for which label service is available shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. 7. Guarantee: This Contractor shall guarantee his workmanship and material (incandescent lamps, fuses, and any existing equipment are exempt) for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance and leave his work in perfect order at completion. Should defects develop within the guarantee period, this Contractor shall, upon notice of same, remedy the defects and have all damages to other work or furnishings caused by the defects or the work of correcting same repaired and/or replaced at his expense, to the condition before such damage. FEES AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES 1. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspection services and certificates in conjunction with this work. 2. Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall obtain the approval of all recognized agencies concerned with the work, along with the approval of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, such certificates of inspection and approval from said bureau and/or agencies must be submitted to the Architect. MATERIALS 1. Refer to Division 1 sections for general requirements on products, materials and equipment. 2. All materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds, unless otherwise specified, and shall be installed by labor thoroughly skilled in the class of work anticipated by this Contract. 3. Provide products which are compatible with other products of the electrical work and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work. 4. All equipment and materials used in relation to control work for the project shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name and trade name. The equipment and material shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, and other mechanical equipment, motors, and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired as follows: RESPONSIBLE DIVISION FURNISHED SET POWER- WIRED CONTROL- WIRED Equipment 15 15 16 Combination Magnetic Motor Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-3 Starters, Magnetic Motor Starters and Contactors 15 16 16 15 Fused and Unfused Di sconnect Switches, Thermal Overload Switches and Heaters, Manual Motor Starters 16(1) 16(1) 16 Manual-Operating and Multt- Speed Switches 15 16 16 16 Controls, Relays, Transformers 15 15 16 15 Thermostats (low voltage) and Time Switches 15 15 16 15 Thermostats, (line voltage) 15 15 16 16 Temperature Control Panels 15 15 16 15 Motor and Solenoid Valves, Damper Motors, PE & EP Switches 15 15(2) -15(2) Push-button Sta tions and Pitot Lights 15 15(2) --15(2) Heating, Cooling, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Controls 15 15 16 15 Exhaust Fan Switches 15 16 16 15(2) Fire ProtecUon Controls 16 16 16 16 Fire and Smoke Detectors 16(3) 16(3) 16 16(3) Subscript Footnotes: A. Under Division 15 if furnished factory-wired as part of equipment or if furnished with combination starters. B. If item is for line voltage, set in place and connect under Division 16. Where factory mounted on equipment or attached to piping or ducts and using line voltage, furnish and set under D ivision 15 and connect under Division 16. C. For units mounted in or on mechanical equipment or ducts, fan shut-down connecti ons shall be under Divlsion 15, and all other connections under Division 16. 6.1 SUBMITTALS 1. Furnish the Architect with complete shop drawings and associated data in accordance with General Conditions, for all major elements of the Electri cal work for review, checking and approval. None of the following equ ipment shall be fabricated, delivered, erected or connected other than from drawings officially approved by the Architect. Coordinate with subcontractors for HVAC and Plumbing work. A. Switchboards and Panelboards. B. Lighting fixtures, poles, lighting controls , dimmers, lamps and ballasts. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Electrical General Provisio ns 16010-4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 D 0 D 0 D D 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 7.1 8.1 C. Conduit, wiring, and fittings. D. Disconnect switches, contactors, time clocks, photocells and motor starters. E. Toggle switches, receptacles, and face plates. F . Junction boxes, pull boxes, wireway, gutter, surface raceway and fittings. G . Fire alarm system new smoke detectors, heat detectors, strobes and combination hom/strobes, pull stations, and other system components. Provide required fire alarm system medications design drawings from a NICET certified installer. H . Telephone jacks, face plates, cabling, patch panels and other system components. I. Computer jacks, face plates, cabling, patch panels and other system components. J . Integrated Intercom, Phone and Class Tone system components and wiring. 2 . The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and present five (5) copies of shop drawings or brochures for all fixtures, equipment, and accessories to the Engineer for the Engineer's approval. 3. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and present five (5) copies of a schedule of manufacturers of all materials for which shop drawings or brochures are not presented . No equipment shall be ordered, purchased, or installed prior to approval of the shop drawings, brochures, and schedules. Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: dimensions which shall be confirmed and corre lated at the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction: coordination of his work wi th that of all other trades: and the satisfactory performance of his work. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS 1. In general, the contract drawings and specifications show and describe arrangements su itable for the specific items of equipment either named or described. In the event that Contractor submits for approval, and receives such approval, for a device or piece of equipment which requires connections or arrangements of these services differing from those indicated or described in the contract documents, Contractor shall give timely notice and shall make suitable alterations in the work to accommodate the substitute equipment, and shall be responsible for any and all additional costs incurred by virtue of the substitution of such equipment for the equipment named or described in the contract documents. 2 . The naming of a certain brand or make or manufacturer in the specifications is to establish a quality standard for the article desired. The Contractor is not restricted to the use o f the specific brand of the manufacturer named unless so indicated in the specifications. However, where a substitution is requested , a substitution will be permitted only with the written approval of the Architect. Request for such substitutions shall be submitted in triplicate to the Architect a t least five working days prior to the Bid Opening date. Requests, as such, shall be accompanied by Manufacturer's Data Sheets and other information in the opinion of the Architect that is necessary for review. No substitute material or equipment shall be ordered, fabricated , shipped or processed in any manner prior to the approval of the Architect. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for additional expenses as required in any way to meet changes from the original material or equipment specified. TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING 1. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all arrangements and costs for providing temporary electrical metering, main switches, and distribution panels at the site as required for construction purposes. The distribution panels shall be located at a centra l point designated by the Architect. The General Contractor shall indicate prior to installation whether three phase or single- phase service is required . 2. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a minimum of one OSHA approved pigtail socket with 150-watt lamp for every 500 square feet of floor space, evenly distributed throughout B attlement Mesa Development 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-5 the building. Temporary lighting should provide a minimum of 5 footcandles for safe and adequate working conditions throughout the project. 3 . The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install as a minimum power outlets to total one for every 2000 square feet or part thereof of floor area and these shall be 15-or 20-amp, single- phase receplacles for either 110 or 220 volts as directed by the General Contractor. Also provide power for temporary heating and ventilating of storage and construction buildings. 4 . Any light or power outlets required over the maximum quantity noted above shall be paid for by the Contractor requiring the same. The power consumption shall be paid for by the General Contractor. 5. Installation A. Install work in neat and orderly manner. B. Make structurally and electrically sound throughout. C. Maintain to give continuous service and to provide safe working conditions. D . Modify and extend service as work progress requires. E . Locate so that power is available at any desired point with no more than 100ft. (30.00 m) extension, and with no more than 5% voltage drop at full load. F. Provide circuit breaker protection for each outlet with ground fault interrupting capacity. G . Provide equipment grounding continuity for entire system. H . Completely remove temporary materials and equipment upon completion of construction. Repair damage caused by installation, and restore to specified condition. 9.1 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 1. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of material and equipment. These Drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the work under th is section w ith the architectural, structural, plumbing, heating and air conditioning, and the drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances and roughing-in locations: This Contractor shall cooperate w ith all other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. Do not rely on the scale of the drawings for rough-in measurements, nor use them as Shop Drawings. 2. The Drawings and Specifications a re complementary, each to the other, and the work requ ired by either shall be included in the Contract as if called for by both. 3. If directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. 4. Electrical symbols used on this project are shown in a Symbol List on the accompanying working drawings. This list shows standard symbols and all may not appear on the project drawings. However, wherever the symbol on project drawings occurs, the item shall be provided and installed. 5. Conductor and conduit sizes are shown on the drawings in an equipment schedule for equipment and in the one line diagram for electrical distribution. Unless otherwise noted all other circuits shall be 1/2" conduit with 2#12(CU. THHN) and #12 (CU THHN) GND, minimum. In any case, minimum sizes for wire and conduit shall comply with all applicable codes. 6. Major equipment of the system i s located on the floor plans and the interconnection conduit and wiring is included in the one-line diagrams. 7. The drawings are indicative of the work to be installed, but do not show all bends, fittings, boxes and specialties required to complete the installation. Battlement Mesa Deve lopmen t 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-6 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 D D B. All conduits, wires, outlet boxes, switches, receptacles , devices and fixtures shall be included in the work. 9. The Electrical Contractor shall note that all items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, the Contractor shall provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings and as required for complete systems. 10. Where it is stated that the contractor shall "provide" a device or piece of equipment, it shall mean that such devices or equipments are furnished and installed. 10.1 COORDINATION 1. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Install the wiring and equipment at such times and in such manner as will in no way retard progress or completion of the project. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar services running parallel w ith primary l ines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7'0" overhead clearance where possible. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access and arrange entire electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of electrical work (equipment). 2 . The layout of wiring on the small scale drawings shall not be considered absolute. The design shall be subject to such revisions as may be necessary to overcome building obstructions. No changes shall be made in outlet locations without the written consent of the Architect. 3. Examine the Architectural Drawings and details for the placement of all outlets to properly coordinate them with relation to cabinets, tables, benches, structural panels, trims, moldings, etc. Examine all other shop drawings, catalog cuts, etc., for special apparatus which may be roughed- in and to which connections must be made. Outlets, apparatus and connections thereto which are improperly located through failure to follow the above instructions, shall be subject to correction and/or relocation without extra charge to the Owner. 4. Coordination Drawings: For locations where several elements of electrical (or combined mechanical and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Prepare and submit coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication-coordination. 11 .1 SLEEVES, INSERTS, FASTENINGS, SUPPORTS, CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install metallic supports as required for the proper installation of raceway systems and all other equipment installed under this division of the contract conforming to the latest edition of the NEC. 2. Conduit shall be supported on approved types of wall brackets, ceiling trapezes, strap hangers or pipe supports . All fastenings , supports, clamps and anchors , etc., shall be of type made for the purpose . For hollow tile, or lath construction, toggle or machine bolt fastenings shall be used. For structural iron use machine screws and for solid masonry use metallic expansion shields and machine screws. For wood or materials of similar fibrous nature, lag screws or bolts shall be employed. Screws with wooden plugs or anchors will not be accepted on any of the work. Studs and fasteners implanted in solid masonry by power actuated devices will be acceptable if precautions are taken to prevent spalling. The use of insulated wire shall not be acceptable as an attaching means for conduit or other equipment. Battlement Mesa Developme nt 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010 -7 3. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all sheet metal outlets, junction and pull boxes with two galvanized locknuts and bushing, care being taken to see that the full number of threads project through , to permit the bushing to be drawn tight against the end of the conduit, after which the locknuts shall be made tight sufficiently to draw them into firm electrical contact with the outlet box. lnstaiJ a plastic bushing on end of conduits stubbed into ceiling spaces to protect cabling. 4. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all concrete pads, supports, piers, bases, foundati ons, and encasement required for the electrical equipment and conduit. The concrete pads for the electrical equipment shall be six inches larger all around than the base of the equipment unless specifically indicated otherwise. 5. Obtain written approval of the Architect before notching , boring, chipping, burning, drilling, welding to structural members. 6. Furnish and install all sleeves which are required to protect equipment or which may be necessary to facilitate its installation. Sleeves used in conjunction with fo rmed concrete shall be located where required and approved by the Architect. Provide "Fiameseal" or other approved fire stopping material at all penetrations through rated walls, floors and ceilings. 7 . Provide and install all inserts required for equipment. Inserts shall be cast iron or cast steel of slotted type to receive a machine bolt head or nut, after installation. Be responsible for the proper spacing of inserts and their alignment and preservation before and du ri ng construction. 8 . The subcontractor for this Section shall give the General Contractor com plete information as to the size, position and arrangement of conduits , cabinets, boxes, etc., requiring openings in floors, walls , etc., so openi ngs may be provided as construction progresses. Refer to General Conditions, Article "Openings, Channels, Cutting, Etc." Cutting and channeling shall be by Electrical Contractor; patching will be done by General Contractor. 9. All conduit and outlet installations and cutt1ng of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons or other normal concealing construction. If such unsightly conditions occur, Contractor will be required, at his own expense. to replace the damaged constructi on. 12.1 SCAFFOLDING 1. Furnish and erect all scaffolding , ladders, etc., required in the installation of wiring, equipment and fixtures. 13.1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1. As soon as electric power is available and connected to serve the equipment in the building, and everything is ready for final testing and placing in service, a complete operational test shall be made in the presence of the Architect. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments and equipment, and make all tests, adjustments, and trial operations required to place the s ystem in balanced and satisfactory operating condition , and he shall pay all professional engineering fees required in such testing . Data on all tests shall be submitted to the Architect. Furnish all necessary assistance and instructions to properly instruct the Owner's authorized personnel in the operation and care of the system . 2 . The voltage levels between the different phases shall be balanced to within 5% of each other. A recording meter shall be used to measure simultaneously the voltages from phase to phase, and phase to neutral, for a continuous period of not less than 24 hours. The printed results of this test shall be forwarded to the Architect for review. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for making any c ircuiting changes deemed necessary by the Architect in order to maintain the balanced voltage levels under normal operating conditions. Battleme nt Me sa Developm ent 06~128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-8 0 D D 0 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 J 0 0 0 0 3. Prior to testing the system, the feeders and branch circuits shall be continuous from main feeders to main panels, to subpanels, to outlets, with all breakers and fuses in place. The system shall be tested free from shorts and grounds. 4. No circuits shall be energized without the Owner's approval. 5. The right is reserved to inspect and test any portion of the equipment and/or materials during the progress of its erection. The Contractor shall further test all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before connecting any fixtures or equipment. 6. The Contractor shall test the entire system in the presence of the Architect or his engineer when the system is finally completed to insure that all portions are free from short circuits or ground faults. 7. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the Architect with certification of the inspection and approval of an active member of the International Association of Electrical Inspectors of all work completed and included in the section, if required. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Inspector when work reaches inspection stage. 8. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the local fire authority having jurisdiction in order that local inspection may be carried out at the proper stage for fire alarm system and installed components. 9. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for all permits, inspection fees, and installation fees as required to complete the work under this Section of the Contract. 10. This Contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the time the installation is accepted by the Owner. If, during this time, any defects should show up due to any defective materials, workmanship, negligence or want of proper care on the part of this Contractor, he shall furnish any new materials as necessary, repair said defects, and put the system in order at his own expense on receipt of notice of such defects from the Architect. This specification is not intended to imply that the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for negligence of the Owner. 11. Upon completion of the work, all component parts, both singularly and as a whole, shall be adjusted and left in satisfactory condition. All parts of the installation, including lighting fixtures, panelboards, etc., shall be cleaned, dusted or washed and adjusted to the satisfaction of the Architect. 14.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 1. Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all deviations from contract drawings and specifications. He shall neatly and correctly enter in colored ink or pencil any deviations on drawings affected, and shall keep drawings available for inspection. 2. At the completion of the job, and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide to the Architect two complete sets of electrical prints marked to show the work "as-built". The Contractor shall show modifications to locations for all major electrical devices, including panelboards and all major runs of conduit, the circuiting of each fixture, outlet, etc., shall be shown. Certify to the accuracy of each print, by signature and date thereon, and deliver same to Architect. Drawings shall be reproducibles. 15.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Contractor shall prepare, assemble and submit three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual for the electrical system as installed. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 Electrical General Provisions 16010-9 2. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be typed and bound in a hard cover, three ring binder or equivalent protection, and shall contain as a minimum the following: A. Shop drawings or catalog product literature of all material listed in paragraph 1.08 Submittals. B. Wiring diagrams and instructions for fire alarm system, contactors, motor starters and time clocks. C. Control drawings for any systems not furnished under other contracts. D. Maintenance instructions for all equipment furnished under this contract. E. Table of equipment listing motor starter sizes, overload sizes, and fuse sizes. 3 . Table of light fixtures listing manufacture and model number; lamp type, manufacture and model number; ballast type, manufacture and model number. 4 . A list of contacts with phone numbers for all systems for Owners' use, in the event the electrical system requires service work within the Warranty period. 5. Copy of Certificate of Acceptance from the Electrical Inspector, Fire Marshall and any other applicable authorities. 6 . Copy of Warranty Letter from Electrical Contractor and appropriate sub--contractors. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16010-10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Grounding and bonding components. B. Provide all ground conductors and components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) of the new switchgear and equipment from the existing service ground, and existing panels being re-fed, and other components reconnected to existing power systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999. B. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code: National Fire Protection Association: 2002. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms, maximum. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRODES A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com. 2. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. B. Wire: Stranded copper. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide grounding conductors in all new feeders and branch circuits. B. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance. Battlement Mesa Development 06-0128 END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D SECTION 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA 1 -Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. B. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Sor:oa '3~,.,;':"' l)~.JOO-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.thomasandbetts.com. B. Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners-General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-1 A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrica l system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment , or conduit. 2 . Do not drill or cut structural members. B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rig idity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panel boards with minimum of four anchors. D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation; www.bradycorp.com. B. Seton Identification Products; www.seton.com/aec. C. HellermannTyton; www.hellermanntyton.com. D. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.02 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch (3 mm) letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch (6 mm) letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Description: 4 inch (100 mm) wide plastic tape, detectable type colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws or adhesive. C. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches (75 mm) below finished grade. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A . W ire and cable for 600 volts and less. B . Wiring connectors and connections. 1 .02 REFERENCES A . NECA 1 -Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. B. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999. C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association: 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A . See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN Insulation in raceway. C. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. D. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt b ranch circuits longer than 75 feet (25m). E. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere. 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet (160m). F. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL". 2.02 WIRE MANUFACTURERS A. Cerro Wire & Cable Company: www.cerrowire.com. B. Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.industwire.com. C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. D . Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.03 BUILDING WIRE A . Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B . Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D . Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN. 2.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type SE. B. Conductor. Copper. Battlement Mes a Development 06-128 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-1 C . Insulation Voltage Rating : 600 volts. D. Insulation: Type XHHW. 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A . Split Bolt Connectors : B . Soldertess Pressure Connectors: C. Compression Connectors: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.02 I NSTALLATION A. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B . Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 1 . Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dime nsioned. 2 . Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. C. Use wiring methods indicated. D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time . E. Use suitable wi re pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG a nd larger. F. Support cables above accessible ceiling , using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. G. Use suitable cab le fittings and connectors . H . Nea tly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and pa nelboa rds. I. Clean conductor surfaces before Installing lugs and connectors. J . Make splices , taps , and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature ri se. K. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor spl ices and taps, 6 AWG and lar ger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of Insulation rating of conductor. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD AT S, except Section 4 . Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION BU ILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123-2 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16131 CONDUIT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07840 -Firestopping. B. Section 16060-Grounding and Bonding. C. Section 16070-Hangers and Supports. D. Section 16075-Electrical Identification. E. Section 16138 -Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated; 1994. B. ANSI C80.3-American National Standard Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated; 1994. C. NECA 1 -Standard Practices for Good Workmanship In Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. D. NECA 101 -Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2001. E. NEMA FB 1-Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001. F. NEMA RN 1 -Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1998. G. NEMA TC 3-PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999. H. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, and conduit bodies. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches (51 mm). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 CONDUIT 16131 - 1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by stori ng above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunflghl PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet (1.5 Meters) from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall non-metallic conduit. 2. Within Five Feet (1.5 Meters) from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or plastic coated conduit 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use plastic coated conduit or thinwall non-metallic conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). C. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2 .02 METAL CONDUIT A . Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg .com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com/wtchp.htm. 4 . Substitutions : See Section 01600-Product Requirements. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 . C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1: material to match condu it. 2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. OCALinc. 3. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com . 4 . Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. B . Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil (0.05 mm) thick. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A . Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Fiex Company: www.electrlflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose. 4 . Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 CONDUIT 16131 -2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com/wtchp.htm. B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type. 2.06 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Fiex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. B. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC; Schedule 80 PVC where required. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101. C. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16070. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L Route conduit under slab from point-to-point. Do not route conduit within slabs. M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 CONDUIT 16131-3 N. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). 0 . Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. a . Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and dean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting . Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. R. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations. S . Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size. T. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. U. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic. V. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. W . Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. X. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16060. Y. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16075. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07840. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION CONDUIT 16131 -4 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16138 BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A . Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07840-Firestopping. B. Section 16139-Cabinets and Enclosures. C. Section 16140-Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA 1-Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. B. NEMA FB 1-Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 . C. NEMA OS 1 -Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996. D. NEMA OS 2 -Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 1998. E. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997. F. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A . See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Undetwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Appleton Electric: www .appletonelec.com. B. Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology: www.arc-co.com. C. Steel City: www. www.tnbelectricalworld.com. D. Substitutions: Excepted if they meet criteria. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel . 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. Battlement Mesa Development 06-054 BOXES 16138 -1 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type . B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2 . C . Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. 2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A . Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16139. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B . Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps , wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. D . Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. 1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet (3m) if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. H. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and o\her elements, using materials and methods specifi ed in Section 07840. I. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. J. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminair es posi tioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. K. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats , and similar devices. L. Use flush mounting outlet box In finished areas. M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls. 0. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs . Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. P. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. a. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. R. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires . S. Support boxes independently of conduit. T. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. U . Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal B attlement Mes a Development 06-054 BOXES 16138-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 G 0 J 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 box in other locations. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. Battlement Mesa Development 06-054 END OF SECTION BOXES 16138-3 l ] .1 0 G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16139 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16070 -Hangers and Supports. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA 1-Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. B. NEMA ICS 4 -Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000. C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Fumish two of each key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper B-Line: www.bline.com. B. Qube Corporation: www.qubelnc.com. C. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com. D. Hoffman Enclosures. E. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.02 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enameL Battlement Mesa Development 06-124 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16139-1 D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.03 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. C. Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. 2.04 T ERMINAL BLOCKS A . Manufacturers: 1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation: www.ab.com. 2. Cooper Bussmann: www.bussman .com. 3. WECO Electrical Connectors Inc: www.weco.ca . 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. B. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. C . Power Terminals: Un it construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. D. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts . E. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Raceway: Plastic channel with hinged or snap-on cover. B . Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requ irements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install securely, in a n eat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to waU and structural supports at each comer under the provisions of Section 16070. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from en closure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. Battlement Mesa Deve lopment 06-124 END OF SECTION CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16139-2 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 1 0 u D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 J 0 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Device plates and decorative box covers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. SecUon 16138 -Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA 1 -Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. B. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device-Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997. C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing In manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A.. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate. B. Provide two protective rings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Arrow Hart: www.arrowhart.com. B. Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 A . Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and W01 . 1. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle. 2. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. B. Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, 3-way, 4-way, keyed. and pilot. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1. 1. Device Body: White plastic. 2. Configuration : NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. B. Dedicated Receptacles and Vanity/Lavatory Receptacles: Type 5-20. D. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: Type 5-15 E. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements , Type 5-20. 2.04 TELEPHONE JACKS A . Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.05 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plates: White, smooth plastic. B. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and w ill be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wirin g installation is completed, tested, and ready for co nnection to wiring devices. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension r ings to bring out1et boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from o utlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and j unction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings , and on surface mounted outlets. Battlement Mesa Developme nt 06-128 WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 [] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J 0 0 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install wall switch 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor. B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches (150 mm) above counter, or as specified on plans. D. Install telephone jack 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor. E. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches (1.4 m) above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 46 inches (1.2m) above finished floor. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCl receptacle device for proper operation. F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16155 EQUIPMENT WIRING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16131-Conduit. B. Section 16123-Building Wire and Cable. C. Section 16138-Boxes. D. Section 16140-Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association: 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. B. Determine connection locations and requirements. C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with Installation of equipment. D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 16140. B. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 16131. C. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 16123. D. Boxes: As specified in Section 16138. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 EQUIPMENT WIRING 16155-1 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance w ith equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to e quipment using flexible conduit. Use nquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat p roducing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required . F. Install suitable str ain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers. control stations, and controt devices to complete equ ipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements . I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiri ng between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. Battlement Mesa Developmen t 06-128 END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT WIRING 16155-2 0 0 D 0 u 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [1 0 0 J 0 0 0 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 D PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 16443 PANELBOARDS A. Power distribution panelboards and circuit-breaker type switchboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16060-Grounding and Bonding . B. Section 16075-Electrical Identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA 1 -Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2000. B. NEMA PB 1 -Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000. C. NEMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996. D. NETA STD ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999. E. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circu it breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions : Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements. E. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies ; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and ind icated. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. See Section 01600-Product Requirements. for additional provisions. B. Furnish two of each panelboard key, if applicable. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 PANELBOARDS 16443-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D: www.sguared.com. B. General Electric C. Cutler Hammer E. Substitutions: See Secti on 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS A. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated . Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard . C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating : As indicated. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole ; UL listed. For air conditioning equipment branch circuits provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: NEMA P81, circuit breaker type, lighting and appllance branch circuit panelboard. B. Panelboard Bus : Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled . C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated on plans. 1. 250 Volt Panelboards: 10 ,000 amperes rms symmetrical. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnet ic t11ip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip handle for all poles; UL listed. 1. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment oifcuits. 2. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. 3. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) w id e for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 480 volt panel boards. G. Cabinet Front Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1. B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. C. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboar ds taller than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches ( 1 00 mm) above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory fo r each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075. G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panetboard to an accessible location above Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 PANELBOARDS 16443-2 0 n 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 fJ 0 0 0 D 0 8 ~ 0 J 0 0 D 0 0 ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. 1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch (DN27). H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit breakers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 16443-3 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D J] 0 0 0 0 0 J 1 J SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts. E. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. F. Lamps. G. Luminaire accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379-American National Standard for Electric Lamps-Reflector Lamps- Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994. B. ANSI C82.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts; 1997. C. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 1992. D. NECA/IESNA 500-Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1998. E. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997. F. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. G. NFPA 101-Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2000. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Furnish two of each plastic lens type. C. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp type. D. Furnish two of each ballast type. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lithonia Lighting: www.lithonialightlng.com. B. Others -see Fixture Schedule on Plans. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.03 BALLASTS AND CONTROL UNITS A. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic ballasts, solid-state, full light output, energy saving type, suitable for lamps specified. 1. Voltage: 120/277 volts. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast, suitable for lamp specified. 1. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage . 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Pr oduct Requirements. C. Fluorescent Lamp Emergency Power Supply: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of fluorescent luminaire. 1. Lamp Ratings: One F32CW lamp providing 1100 lumens, minimum. 2. Include TEST switch and AC ON ind icator light, installed to be operable and visib le f rom the outside of an assembled luminaire. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.04 LAMPS A . Manufacturers: 1. GE Lighting : www.gelighting.com. 2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting .philips.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. B. Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A . Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting). B . Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with buifding lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires tn grid ceiling directly from building structure. F . Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency fighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510-2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ll (J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u· a 0 0 0 0 0 ~ D D 0 0 0 0 a 0 H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16138 using flexible conduit. J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01400. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULE ~ See Drawings Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510-3 0 0 0 0 G 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 D a 0 0 0 0 0 SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. B. Poles. C. Pole Bases -See Detail on Plans, and coordinate with G.C. and Civil Engineer. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379-American National Standard for Electric Lamps -Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994. B. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 1992. C. IESNA RP-8-American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting; Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; 2000 (ANSIIIES RP8). D. NECAIIESNA 501 -Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2000. E. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITIALS A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. D. Maintenance Data: For each luminaire. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600-Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Furnish two of each type and wattage lamp Installed. C. Furnish two gallons of touch-up paint. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.02 BALLASTS A. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, high pressure sodium lamp ballast, suitable for lamp specified. Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16520-1 1. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements. 2.03 LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. GE Lighting: www.ge llghting.com. 2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lightin g.philips .com. 3. Sylvania/Osram. B. Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire. 2.04 POLES A . Provide factory poles as scheduled on plans with pole-mounted l uminaires. Verify that poles are suitable for use in the wind load for the project area with manufacturer. Provide poles that provide luminaire mounting height as scheduled in combination with a 36" high concrete base. 1. Provide proper bolt pattern for pole in concrete base. 2. Provide bolt covers for all poles installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures securely , in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 501. B . Provide concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, in accordance with Section 03300. C. Install poles plumb. 1. Provide shims to adjust plumb. 2. Grout around each base. D . Install lamps in each luminaire. E. Bond 11uminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment groun din g conductor. Provide supplementary g rounding electrode at each pole. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each lumlnaire after in stallation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A . Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution indicated on Drawings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A . Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.06 SCHEDULE -See Drawings Battlement Mesa Development 06-128 END OF SECTION EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16520-2 0 0 0 ll fl D u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0